Home

Pelco DX8100 DVR User Manual

Contents

1. Value Description None First part of transaction field is not used CR Carriage return character 13 in ASCII LF Line feed character 10 in ASCII FF Form feed character 12 in ASCII DATE Date field TIME Time field TEXT Ten selected another field appears to let you enter a text string up to 20 characters that defines the start of the transaction 171 172 Using Custom Device Filters The DX8100 allows you to use a custom device filter to remove unwanted characters from the data input port These characters may be printer commands or some other type of device control overhead Each entered line of text in the Custom Device Filter table defines a separate character filter A filter can be a combination of exact characters to match character ranges to match and character counts Incoming characters matching any of the character filters will be discarded Use the Control Code drop down box Special Character drop down box and Range text box to create the desired filter Then transfer the created filter to the Custom Device Filter table by clicking the Add button Creating a New Data Format Create the data format based on information contained in the ATM POS transaction For example a sales receipt provides detailed transaction information The data format values determine how data from ATM or POS terminals is interpreted This information is used to separate the data stream into individual transactions
2. Button Name Description A Live Enters the display mode and opens the DX8100 main window where live and playback video is displayed A Live mode Allows all users to view live video Playback mode Allows users with playback access rights Standard User by default and higher to play back recorded video Search Enters the search mode and opens the Search window providing access to search features Users with al Standard User access and higher are allowed to search video data using specific criteria Setup Enters the setup mode and opens the Setup dialog box to the Camera page default view and allows access to the other pages Users with Power User access and higher are allowed to set up the features and options for the DVR Export Enters the export mode where you configure the export options and parameters Print Enters the print mode where you print the selected video image O Single Division Displays one camera E 4 Division Displays four cameras simultaneously quad display E 9 Division Displays nine cameras simultaneously ES 16 Division Displays 16 cameras simultaneously 25 Division Displays 25 images Each DVR accommodates up to 32 cameras You can display images from the local and remote DX8100 DVRs Use the expansion unit to increase DX8108 from 8 to 24 camera inputs orthe DX8116 from 16 to 32 camera inputs 36 Division Displays 36 images Each DVR accommodates up to 32 cameras You can display images from the local and
3. Figure 1 Front Panel and Power Switch 2 Wait while the unit starts this may take several minutes C2630M B 4 08 15 SHUTTING DOWN THE DX8100 You must have Power User or Administrator access to shut down For information on users security levels refer to Definition of User Access Levels on page 193 To shut down 1 From the DX8100 menu bar choose File gt Exit The Shut Down dialog box opens 2 Select Shut down 3 Click OK DX8100 DOCUMENTATION You can print selected technical documentation free directly from the Internet To access technical documentation 1 Go to www pelco com products The Pelco Products Web page is displayed 2 Scroll to the Control Site Equipment section and click Video Recorders The DVR Web page is displayed 3 Scroll to the DX8100 and locate the specific document you want to view or print You will need Adobe Acrobat Reader to open search and or print the document Go to www adobe com to download a free copy of Acrobat Reader 16 C2630M B 4 08 Logging In to the DX8100 Application To access the features of the DX8100 Series DVR you must log in with a valid user name and password The DX8100 comes equipped with a built in user account named Guest Each time the unit is turned on the Guest account is automatically activated In addition to the Guest account there are four other user access levels or groups that can be configured on the DX8100 The Guest user
4. ATM POS Address fatw poso1 ATM POS Name arm7Pos01 1 Linking Relay Outputs to Video Loss Events To set relay outputs to activate in response to a video loss event 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 29 3 Click the Event Relay Link Settings tab 4 Inthe Video Loss Link Settings section do the following a Select a camera from the Video Loss Channel drop down box b Click the button for each relay you want to link to the selected Video Loss Channel 5 Click Apply r Video Loss Link Settings Video Loss Channel CAMERADI Camera Name Camera 1 CJ 90 a aC Cn 0 1 we 52 18 5 Figure 99 Event Relay Link Settings Video Loss Link Settings Section LINKING CAMERAS TO RECORD IN RESPONSE TO EXTERNAL EVENTS Multiple cameras can be configured to begin recording in response to detected motion alarm ATM POS transaction and video loss events This section describes how to link cameras to record in response to these events and includes the following topics e Linking Cameras to Record in Response to M otion Events on page 123 e Linking Cameras to Record in Response to Alarm Events on page 123 e Linking Cameras to Record in Response to ATM POS Events on page 123 Linking Cameras to Record in Response to Video Loss Events on page 124 122 C2630M B 4 08 Linking Cameras to Record in Response to Motion Events To link multiple cameras to
5. Data Overlay Box The function is not supported at this time Video Window Area where live and playback recorded video is viewed Playback video is started at the date and time specified for the respective transaction data as shown in the POS Search table The DX8100 playback controls are used to view playback video C2630M B 4 08 SEARCHING AND DISPLAYING POS DATA BY DEVICE NAME You can perform a general search for POS transaction data record for a particular ATM POS device and its associated camera Use the date and time and ATM POS device name as the search criteria The search results contain all POS transactions recorded for that device according to the specified date and time Searching POS Data by Device Name To search POS transaction data by ATM POS device name 1 2 3 On the DX8100 toolbar click ak On the Search control click O The POS search view is displayed To select a channel in the DX8100 Site tree click a camera that is linked to an ATM POS device By default the name of the ATM POS device linked to the selected camera channel is displayed in the Device Name text box In this case the Device Name text box is deselected Select the date and time for the POS search event as follows a Select the Start date b Select the End date c Select the End time d Select the Start time In the Transaction Information section click the check box to select Device Name The Device Name text
6. You can also use the hand tool and the mouse wheel to zoom in and out The zoom factor is displayed in the upper right corner of the pane The effective zoom in factor is displayed after the zoom operation is performed The effective zoom out factor is not displayed To zoom using the mouse 1 To place the DX8100 in the Playback or Search mode do one of the following On the DX8100 toolbar click Live Onthe DX8100 toolbar click Search 2 click gt to start video playback 3 Do the following a To zoom in click and drag the mouse diagonally to your right in a downward direction 07 18205 09 07 38 28 Figure 45 Zoom In Using Mouse b To zoom out click and drag the mouse diagonally to your left in an upward direction C2630M B 4 08 PANNING A ZOOMED IMAGE This section describes how to use the hand tool and mouse wheel to zoom in and out To pan a zoomed portion of video within the view panel 1 To place the DX8100 in the Playback or Search mode do one and of the following e On the DX8100 toolbar click Live e On the DX8100 toolbar click Search 2 Right click in the view panel The mouse pointer now resembles a hand 3 Click the left mouse button and drag the mouse in the direction you want to move the video image 4 Right click again to return to zoom mode era 3 Figure 47 Panning Zoomed Video with the M ouse C2630M B 4 08 Working in Search M ode The DX8100
7. 2 33 C2630M B 4 08 Click The Schedule page is displayed Click the M onth View tab if itis not currently selected In the drop down box select the type of schedule you want to change Options are as follows e Alldays Weekdays Weekends Custom Mode In the drop down box select a profile that is different from the one you want to delete This step is necessary because you cannot delete a schedule profile that is currently active Click Apply In the drop down box select the profile you want to delete Click Delete 137 138 9 Click Apply Q Month View Year View D days Back July 2005 Next Qs ha New Save Delete fs Apply Diddan Once Per Month Once Per Year Start 07 2005 El End or 2005 I Finish on End Date Figure 118 Month View Page WORKING WITH CUSTOM CAMERA SETTINGS This section describes how to configure customized camera settings and includes the following topics Configuring Custom Camera Settings Examples of Custom Camera Settings on page 139 Configuring Custom Camera Settings Each camera can be configured with custom recording settings To customize camera settings for normal motion alarm or ATM POS recording 1 2 3 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click w The Schedule page is displayed Click the plus sign next to a camera in
8. Power outage Relays configured as NO are closed if the DX8100 is server is shut down by a power outage or the AC cord is unplugged Power button Relays configured as NO are closed if the DX8100 power button is pressed and held down In the scenarios above a relay will remain closed as long as the DX8100 is powered down In this case alarms or sirens connected to the relays might produce a false alert Configuring DX8100 Basic Relay and Alarm Settings To access the Link page to program alarms and relays 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera setup page 2 Click 29 The Link page is displayed Configuring Basic Relay Operating Properties To configure basic relay operating properties 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 2 Click to display the Link page 3 In the Relay Settings section do the following a Inthe Relay Channel drop down box select the relay you want to configure b Inthe Relay Name text box enter an optional new name for the relay Relay names can be up to 32 characters long and can include spaces and special characters You can also rename sites cameras alarms and relays from the Site tree by slowly clicking twice on each object s name c Inthe Relay Type section click the NO NC button to toggle the default output type for each relay NO normally open or NC normally closed 4 Click Apply c Relay Settings Sa Re
9. 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YH The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click amp The backup configuration screen opens 3 Click the Add or Instant Backup button The Add Backup Schedule or Backup Now dialog box opens 4 Click Map a network drive The M ap Network Drive dialog box opens asking for a drive letter and path 5 In the Drive drop down box select an available drive letter 6 Type the path in the Folder drop down box for example IP_address_of_server folder_name 7 Optional Click the Reconnect at logon box if you do not want the mapped drive to remain connected each time you log on 8 Click Finish The newly mapped drive is added as a remote drive and is displayed in the Device area of the Export Video dialog box The mapped drive can now be accessed just like a local drive DISCONNECTING FROM A NETWORK DRIVE To disconnect from a network drive 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click kid The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click amp The backup configuration screen opens 3 Click the Add or Instant Backup button The Add Backup Schedule or Backup Now dialog box opens 4 Click Disconnect mapped drive The Disconnect N etw ork Drive dialog box opens 5 Select the network drive you want to disconnect 6 Click OK The drive is disconnected and removed from the Export Video dialog box s Device area C2630M B 4 08 189 SELECTING A BACKUP MEDIA DEVICE You can back up vid
10. 16 Create an ATM POS schedule for the camera you linked to the ATM POS address Month View Year View All days Applied Once Per Month Once Per Year Start Jor 2008 End Jor 2008 W Finish on End Date kkl kkl adas Back January 2008 Next gt T Th F New Save Delete Apply ee Record Mode JF Normal J Motion JE Alam IV atmvpos Camera 5 Camera 6 Camera 7 Camera 8 Figure 150 Schedule Setup Page Cancel Apply For information about verifying that the ATM POS configuration is set up correctly refer to Verifying the ATM POS Communication Connection on page 179 Setting Up an ATM POS Data Format The DX8100 allows you to create a data format for each ATM POS device You can assign a unique name to each data format The data format values determine how data from ATM or POS terminals is interpreted This information is used to separate the data stream into individual transactions and separate the various fields within the transaction Every field format must match that of the ATM or POS device especially the month format Access the Network page to configure the data format For information on accessing the Network page refer to Setting Up DX8100 Network Access on page 151 For information about the Port Device tab refer to Setting Up Port and Device Communication Properties on page 161 This section describes how to create a
11. AlarmO1 Relay0l Z3 Seconds Ma0 CM Ese Alarm03 AlarmO4 Alarm05 o Link TIA AlarmO6 No Link Y Ino Link y Alam08 No Link No Link of To activate combo box you should link lt Relay gt with lt Alarm gt in the linking setup m Figure 128 Linking Relays to Alarms 148 C2630M B 4 08 The following table describes the available options Table AL Alarm Activated Relay Settings Option Result Disable Relay will not activate when the alarm is triggered Follow Event Relay will activate at the exact moment the alarm is triggered 1 3 5 10 15 and 20 Seconds Sets the amount of time the relay will remain active after the alarm has been triggered Configuring Advanced ATM POS Activated Relay Output To configure an ATM POS activated relay output 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 In the Setup dialog box click C The Schedule page is displayed 3 Click the Configure Relays button The Configure Relays dialog box opens 4 Click the ATM POS tab if it is not already selected 5 Configure each relay that is linked to an ATM POS a Click the drop down box to select a relay b Select a relay time value from the Activation Period drop down box Configure Relays A hl Motion Alam ATM POS Video Loss Motion Input Relay Output Activation Period ATM POS 01 Relay 03 Follow Event ATM POS 02 ATM POS 03 ATM POS 04
12. Spanish 5 Click Update The Restart dialog box opens 6 Click Yes The changes are applied and the DX8100 restarts SETTING THE SYSTEM TIME Be sure to set the system time before using the DX8100 setting the internal clock for each DVR on the network ensures that each accurately reflects the local time This section describes how to set the DX8100 system time and includes the following topics Setting System Time e Working with Standard and Daylight Saving Time on page 208 Setting System Time Pelco recommends that the system time be configured only at the DX8100 server System page Only Administrator access or higher can change the system time If a subsequent attempt is made to set the system clock to a time earlier than the current time the DX8100 server will display the Confirm dialog box to alert the user The user will then be prompted to do one of the following Accept the new system time and delete data recorded between the current time and the newly set time If this option is accepted the data is deleted and the DX8100 automatically restarts Accept the new system time with the following conditions Previously recorded data will not be deleted The DX8100 will not record new data until the system time passes the time that data was previously recorded For example if data was recorded at 3 00 p m and at that time the system time was reset to 2 30 p m the DX8100 will not commence recording again until
13. Video System Users Properties Administrators Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Power Users Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Standard Users V Y Y Y Restricted Users Y Guest Users Y DEFINITION OF CAMERA SECURITY ACCESS The administrator can limit the cameras that users are allowed to view Access to a camera is determined by its security designation The Admin user can configure access rights to any user group for any of the following functions Camera security View live video Operate PTZ e Playback video SetPTZ Access export menu Only users with High Security access can view cameras designated as High Security M edium Security cameras can be viewed by users with M edium Security access and higher All users can view Low Security cameras All users can view No Security cameras If you do not want video from a low security level camera to be viewed by the Guest user set the security level for that cameras to medium or higher The following table summarizes default camera security levels and user access Table BC Default Camera Security Levels G No Security Low Security Medium Security High Security roups Cameras Cameras Cameras Cameras Administrators Vv Vv Vv Vv Power Users Vv Y Vv Y Standard Users Vv Vv Vv Restricted Users Y Y Guest Users Y MODIFYING USER ACCESS RIGHTS The Admin user can alter default access rights of lower level users In this case any permission grant
14. b To create a data format do one of the following To use and modify the ER 650 format highlight the data format and then click Edit To start a new data format click Add The Data Format dialog box opens 6 Inthe Data Format Name text box type a name LIM x Data Format Name Modified ER 650 gt Transaction Format Transaction Number IV Find by Symbol No Transaction Start TEXT esa and More Deli Transaction End TEXT bd THANK You The end of text sting Decimal 13 User String r Monetary Format Monetary Unit g Thousand Separator ii hai Decimal Separator r y r Time Format Month Type Jan X Time ma i Jm 31 fe gt Time Type 12 Hourtam Pm m Character Format Special Device Character z Type Control Code nuco zl Control Character NUL 0 a Special Character 1 2 Control Character LF 10 3 Control Character CA 13 Delete Range Custom Device Filter Char Cancel Figure 146 M odified ER 650 Data Format Dialog Box C2630M B 4 08 7 Using the information from the transaction record or other source set the parameters for the following Data Format sections as applicable Transaction Format Monetary Format Time Format e Character Format 8 Click OK The Data Format page redisplays and the newly created data format is listed in the Data Format List Device Configuration xi General Settings Data Format Text to Scree
15. remote DX8100 DVRs ALE 6 10 13 Division Displays images as follows 6 Division 145 One larger and five smaller images 10 Division 248 Two larger and eight smaller images 13 Division 1 12 One larger and 12 smaller images Cycle Views Turns window cycling on and off Automatically cycles through each view panel ensuring all cameras get displayed Group permission to change the dwell time is assigned by the Administrator to the following groups Restricted User Group Standard User Group and Power User Group For information on cycle views setup refer to Automatically Cycling Through View Panels on page 31 Full Screen Selects a full screen view The application window is expanded to occupy the entire monitor screen Click the right mouse button to exit full screen view The full screen view is not available in the Thumbnail POS and Pixel search mode E External M onitor Opens the external monitor drop down menu For more information refer to External M onitor Setup on page 210 C2630M B 4 08 DISPLAYING THE DX8100 WINDOW FROM A PAGE To display the DX8100 main window from a Setup dialog page e Onthe DX8100 toolbar click Live DESCRIPTION OF OPERATING MODES The DX8100 Series DVR has four primary operating modes Live Playback Search and Setup Each operating mode is accessed by clicking its corresponding button on the toolbar The following table describes the DX8100 o
16. t Image quality is a function of video compression Higher quality video images require larger file sizes CONFIGURING THE FRAME RATE The DX8100 can record at frame rates up to 480 ips by National Television System Committee NTSC standards and 400 ips by Phase Alternating Line PAL standards This total frame rate capacity is distributed among 8 16 24 or 32 cameras depending on the configuration of your unit Resolution and frame rate values can be assigned evenly among all cameras or they can be configured independently for individual cameras Frame rate values can also be customized according to recording mode type normal motion alarm or ATM POS Power Users and Administrators can configure recording frame rates on the DX8100 All cameras are optimized to provide 30 ips frame rates at 320 x 240 resolution for NTSC 352 x 288 resolution for PAL The DX8100 allows you to change the frame rates available to each camera while resolution values must remain constant or change both frame rate and resolution settings This section describes how to configure the frame rate and includes the following topics Accessing the Frame Rate Configuration Dialog Box Setting the Frame Rate Setting the Resolution and Frame Rate on page 142 Understanding the DX8100 Frame Rate Calculations on page 146 Accessing the Frame Rate Configuration Dialog Box To access the Frame Rate Configuration dialog box 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click Y
17. 1 In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed 2 In the Communication Port drop down box select COM 1 RS 232 is the serial data communication standard 3 In the device drop down box select a device 4 Configure the following COM port settings using the drop down boxes provided e Interface mode RS 232 is the only allowed setting by default Baud rate e Parity Data bits Stopbits 5 Click Apply Setting Up RS 422 RS 485 Communication Port Properties The DX8100 interfaces with the KBD300A ATM POS and third party dome devices using Port 1 to Port 4 All ports are compatible with both RS 422 or RS 485 serial data communication standard This setting describes how to connect a device to the DX8100 using Port 1 to Port 4 Access the Network page to configure Port 1 to Port 4 communication properties For information on accessing the Network page refer to Setting Up DX8100 Network Access on page 151 For information about the Port Device page refer to Setting Up Port and Device Communication Properties on page 161 C2630M B 4 08 163 To configure Port 1 to Port 4 properties 1 In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed 2 In the Communication Port drop down box select the port number you want to configure 3 In the device drop down box select a device ATM POS devices can use COM 1 and Port 1 to Port 4 The KBD300A and third party dome devi
18. 2 3 4 pi BE Select the recording modes and times for each camera you want to schedule Refer to Setting Up the Camera Recording M ode on page 129 for instructions Click Save Click Apply Click the Apply button at the bottom of the screen O View Year View Custom New i Delete Appy Once Per Month C Once Per Year Start SS August 2005 HEHE aaa as 2 3 4 5 6 8 3 10 11 12 13 15 197 17 18 19 20 22 23 24 25 26 27 Figure 115 Month View Page Single Day Schedule Copying and Applying Schedule Attributes To copy the schedule attributes of one day and apply them to a different day 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2i 3 C2630M B 4 08 Click C The Schedule page is displayed Right click the calendar day you want to copy 135 136 4 Select Copy from the quick menu January 2004 Next gt Revert to daily schedule Figure 116 Month View Calendar Quick M enu Right click on the calendar day to which you want to apply the copied schedule attributes Select Paste from the quick menu Click the Apply button at the bottom of the screen To change a custom schedule day to a regular schedule day right click and select Revert to daily schedule from the quick menu EDITING SCHEDULES This section des
19. Click C The System page is displayed 3 In the DX8100 Help section do one of the following Clickthe Enable DX8100 Help to select Help for viewing e Clickthe Enable DX8100 Help to deselect Help for viewing 4 Click Apply EXTERNAL MONITOR SETUP 210 The DX8100 includes one capture card which provides a BNC analog monitor output A second optional capture card can be installed to provide two analog monitor outputs The first capture card nearest to the PTZ card is user definable Users with Power User access or higher can assign cameras and configure the capture card analog output options NOTE An external monitor must be connected to the capture card to make use of the analog monitor outputs Refer to the installation manual for instructions on how to connect analog monitors to the capture card This section describes how to setup an external monitor and includes the following topics e Accessing the External M onitor Setup Setting Up Camera M apping e Configuring Display Override on page 215 e Using the External M onitor Option on page 216 ACCESSING THE EXTERNAL MONITOR SETUP To access the monitor configuration screen 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click The External Output page is displayed The Ext M onitor page is displayed SETTING UP CAMERA MAPPING The DX8100 allows you to set up automatic or manual camera mapping This sections describes h
20. Lyey 3 In the Site IP list select up to five DVR sites to be activated 4 Click Apply The new DX8100 server site s should now be listed in the Site tree C2630M B 4 08 MODIFYING A REM OTE SITE This section describes how to modify a remote site and includes the following topics Editing a Remote Site on page 201 Deleting a Remote Site on page 201 Editing a Remote Site To change the attributes of a remote site 1 8 9 10 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page In the Setup dialog box click Select the site name you want to edit from the Site IP list by clicking its site name Click Edit The Server Information dialog box opens Enter a new site name for the remote DVR Enter the new IP address of the remote site If necessary enter a base port number 9002 is the default Unless there is a conflict on your network you should not change port numbers from their default values M ake sure any changes to port numbers are made consistently across all DX8100 servers and clients on a network Client and server ports must be identical If necessary enter an upgrade port number 9003 is the default Click OK Click Apply Deleting a Remote Site To delete an existing site from the site list SYSTEM 1 2 3 4 Select the site name you want to delete from the Site IP list by clicking its site name Click Delete Click OK to confirm or
21. Pelco will offer product upgrades to purchasers of its products The upgrade policy is described in the following sections Software Upgrades Hardware Upgrades SOFTWARE UPGRADES 1 All upgrades for Pelco software shall be free to the customer for the duration of the warranty period This offer does not apply to software that may be installed in a Pelco product that is licensed from another supplier All other software such as operating systems drivers for accessory devices and so forth shall be governed by the software manufacturers upgrade policy even when said upgrades are necessary to implement an upgraded version of Pelco software 2 Whenever possible software upgrades with detailed instructions shall be provided to the customer through W eb site download Pelco will not be responsible for loss of data losses due to down time or damage to product as a result of a customer attempting to perform an upgrade 3 Hard copies on appropriate medium CD DVD ZIP or floppy disk shall be sent to the customer at no charge upon request 4 Itshall be the customer s responsibility to procure necessary hardware to perform upgrades if required necessary drives such as CD R DVD R or ZIP 5 Pelco cannot guarantee that all future software versions will be backward compatible with earlier hardware platforms 14 C2630M B 4 08 HARDWARE UPGRADES Pelco provides hardware options for upgrading the DX8100 memory channel input an
22. Series DVR allows Administrators and Power users to link relays to cameras and alarms Up to 20 seconds of delay can be set from the moment an event is triggered to the time when a relay is activated M ake sure you have linked relays to the appropriate cameras and alarm inputs before attempting to configure them For instructions on linking alarms and relays refer to Linking Alarm Inputs to a Camera on page 37 and Linking Relay Outputs to Alarm Inputs on page 38 This section describes how to setup advanced alarm and motion relay output and includes the following topics e Configuring Advanced M otion Activated Relay Output Configuring Advanced Alarm Activated Relay Output on page 148 Configuring Advanced ATM POS Activated Relay Output on page 149 e Configuring Advanced Video Loss Activated Relay Output on page 150 Configuring Advanced M otion Activated Relay Output To configure a motion relay output 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 In the Setup dialog box click C The Schedule page is displayed 3 Click the Configure Relays button The Configure Relays dialog box opens 4 Click the M otion tab 5 Configure each relay that is linked to a camera a Click the drop down box to select a relay b Select a relay time value from the Activation Period drop down box 6 Click Save 7 Click Exit Li x Motion Alam ATM POS Video Loss Motion Input Relay 04 tput A
23. calendar See schedule camera alarm input linking to camera 37 assigning all cameras to view panes 37 assigning to a view pane 36 40 D P or Coaxitron protocol support 51 event detection repositioning PTZ preset patterns linked to alarm events 125 ATM POS events 126 motion events 125 video loss events 127 expanded audio 114 external event recording alarm event linking multiple cameras to record 123 236 ATM POS event linking multiple cameras to record 123 motion event linking multiple cameras to record 123 video loss event linking multiple cameras to record 124 lens adjusting 49 mapping 210 motion detection zones 113 PC keyboard using shortcuts to operate PTZ and lens functions 50 PTZ protocols 111 Coaxitron DX8000PELCO C D protocol DX8000PELCO D disable protocol DX8000N0 PTZ P protocol DX8000PELCO P recording modes 129 relay linking to camera 38 remote setup using preset 95 51 remote accessing programming features 55 removing from a view pane 40 scheduled recording mode setting up 129 security levels 111 high low medium none settings custom settings examples of 139 customizing 129 138 support for recording modes 140 supported for recording modes 139 settings customizing 138 setup applying settings to all cameras 118 communications protocol 111 enabling disabling camera 111 145 expanded audio option 116 motion detection zones 113 name customizing 111 pan tilt and zoom 111 picture 111 picture pro
24. choose File gt Software Upgrade 9 DX8100 File Edit View Export Favorite User Log in User Log out Password Recovery be Unplug Eject Hardware Multiple Configuration Upload Exit Figure 187 Software Upgrade Server Console 2 The Select Upgrade Package dialog box opens Select Upgrade Package A r Package Information Version none Package Date none File Path Package Selected Browse Next Exit Figure 188 Select Upgrade Package 230 C2630M B 4 08 3 Click Browse The Open dialog box opens A 6 h iaitett x Look in EXDX8000 ADT dx8000sw_ 2_0_00_1170NDX8000 Server 2 0 0 Up File name setup exe Files of type Setup Execute File exe Cancel Figure 189 Open Dialog Box 4 Select the update file 5 Click Open The Select Upgrade Package dialog box becomes active Select Upgrade Package fal x r Package Information Version 2 0 00 1170 Package Date 12 15 2005 04 53 11 File Path E DX8000 AD1 dx8000sw_ 2_0_00_1170 DX8000 Ser Package Selected EADXB000 AD1 dx8000sw_ 2_0_00_1170 D Figure 190 Upgrade Package Information 6 Click Next The Select Server dialog box opens The Select Server dialog box displays a list of all connected DX8100s including the local DVR Updates can be made to the local server and all connected remote servers from this dialog box 7 Select the DVR server
25. e Enabling Instant Recording e Disabling Instant Recording For more information on instant recording refer to Instant Recording on page 45 C2630M B 4 08 45 Enabling Instant Recording To enable the Instant Recording mode 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click C 3 Inthe Camera Settings Panel from the Instant Recording drop down box select Enable Disabling Instant Recording To disable the Instant Recording mode 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 In the Setup dialog box click 3 In the Camera Settings Panel from the Instant Recording drop down box select Disable ADDING INSTANT RECORDING TO OSD To add the Instant Recording icon to the OSD From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt OSD gt Instant Recording The Instant Record icon is displayed in the lower right corner of the view pane STARTING AND STOPPING INSTANT RECORDING The Instant Recording mode must first be enabled from the Schedule page and the Instant Recording icon must be visible in the lower right corner of the view pane For more information on DX8100 instant recording refer to Instant Recording on page 45 For information on OSD refer to Live View On Screen Display OSD on page 44 The following figure shows the Record and Instant Record icons Figure 17 Activating Instant Recording C2630M B 4 0
26. for example DX8100 First Floor Lobby Names can be up to 31 characters long and can include spaces but not special characters 5 Enter your e mail address in the E mail Address text box C2630M B 4 08 219 220 6 7 8 Enter the address of your local SMTP mail server Obtain this information from your network administrator If your e mail server requires you to log in do the following a Select the check box labeled M y E mail Server Requires Authentication b Enter your e mail server address c Enter your user name User names can be up to 31 characters in length and cannot include spaces or special characters d Enter your password Passwords can be up to 19 characters in length and cannot include spaces or special characters Click Apply Emetgency Agent Setup Emergency E mail Notification Setup Disable Notification Enable Notification r Mail Group Full name Shipping Area DVA a O y Emad Address fhipdockdin pelco com To idee petco com Add to Group E None gt cc Add to Group T None Subject oxer 00 Emergency E mail Notification mai SMTP fmipdomaint pelco com Figure 180 Basic E mail Notification Setup Testing E mail Notification You test the e mail notification configuration in the Emergency E mail Notification page For information on accessing the Emergency E mail Notification page refer Accessing the Emergency E mail Notific
27. os 2005 End 08 2005 aq EE I Finish on End Date Figure 114 Month View Page Multi Day Schedule Creating Single Day Schedules This section describes how to create a single day schedule and includes the following topics Working with Single Day Schedules Copying and Applying Schedule Attributes on page 135 Working with Single Day Schedules Custom M ode schedules are defined for single days only A custom scheduled day can be set to recur on the same day of every month or the same day every year To set the DVR to record on a specific day 1 2 3 10 134 From the DX8100 toolbar click Y The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click C The Schedule page is displayed Click the M onth View tab if it is not currently selected Select Custom M ode from the drop down box Click New The New File Name dialog box opens Enter a new file name for the profile The profile file name follows the standard Windows file naming conventions Click OK Select Once Per M onth or Once Per Year Select the date range for the custom schedule a Setthe start date with the Start spinner buttons The start date cannot be set later than the end date b If you want the schedule to recur indefinitely deselect the Finish on End Date check box c Set the end date with the End spinner buttons On the calendar click the desired date C2630M B 4 08 E 1 j
28. 2006 TIME 7 26 48 2 ATM POSO1 559 2006 1 13 7 26 48 Yes MILK 1 GALLON 4 57 2 ATM POSOL 560 2006 1 13 7 26 59 Yes ES 2 ATM POSO1 561 2006 1 13 7 27 9 Yes LES eae 49 2 ATM POSO1 562 2006 1 13 7 27 23 Yes SUB TOTAL 9 55 2 ATM POS01 565 2006 1 13 7 27 54 Yes TAX 0 76 j e ATM POSO1L 569 2006 1 13 7 28 30 Yes TOTAL 10 31 2 ATM POSO1 572 2006 1 13 7 28 59 Yes EJE Figure 56 Transactions that Satisfy Specific Exception Filters SEARCHING FOR TRANSACTIONS BY LINE ITEM The DX8100 allows you to search for and display ATM POS transactions that contain a unique line item Use the asterisk as a wildcard character to substitute for zero or more characters The search criteria is based on the following Channel The camera that captured the video and is linked to the ATM POS device that produced the transaction data Date time The date and time window within which the transaction s were recorded Line item The line item has the following guidelines Line item entries are not case sensitive Enter lower or uppercase characters Specify the asterisk wildcard Search by a single word or multiple words appearing in a transaction line Enter the first few characters of the first word appearing in the transaction and the wildcard For example type sma for a line item containing the entry small orange juice The search returns all transactions that contain the word small Enter the
29. 4 59 TAX 0 37 TOTAL 4 96 2 ATM POS01 24 Channel Number Transaction Number O A la Figure 54 Searching an POS Event by Transaction Number SEARCHING FOR ALL TRANSACTIONS WITH EXCEPTIONS The DX8100 allows you to search for transactions that meet conditions defined by one or more exceptions In this case you must configure your search criteria based on the following Channel The camera that captured the video and is linked to the ATM POS device that produced the transaction data Date time The date and time window within which the transactions were recorded To use an exception to search transaction data the exception must be created before recording the transaction data If the transaction data is recorded before the exception filter is defined the exception filter will not find the data structure within the transaction data To search for only POS events by transaction with exception 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click al 2 On the Search control click O The POS search view is displayed 3 To select a ATM POS device do one of the following Inthe DX8100 Site tree click a camera that is linked to the ATM POS device By default the name of the ATM POS device linked to the selected camera channel is displayed in the Device Name text box In this case the Device Name text box is deselected Do the following 1 In the Transaction Information section click check box to select De
30. 46 motion camera settings supported frame rate during motion 140 image resolution 140 motion image quality 140 post motion 140 pre motion 140 pre motion frame rate 140 pre motion image quality 140 normal 45 normal camera settings supported framerate 140 image quality 140 image resolution 140 recording schedule profile 129 scheduled modes 129 130 alarm ATM POS motion normal recording modes 130 recording schedule 128 relays Event Relay Link Settings page accessing 120 linked relay output removing fromacamera 39 removing from an alarm input 39 manually turning On and Off 36 multiple relays linking to one camera 38 relay output alarm event linking to 38 121 ATM POS event linking to 121 motion event linking to 120 number supported 119 video loss event linking to 122 setting up advanced relay output 147 basic operating properties 119 creating custom name for 119 relay output type selecting 119 relay selecting 119 single relay linking to multiple cameras 38 remote camera menu system navigating using Keypad controls 55 56 PC keyboard keys 55 56 PTZ OSD menu control 55 PTZOSD menu controls 55 56 programming features accessing 55 protocol support 55 remote site accessing features of 18 activating 200 active remote cameras finding 200 connecting to 18 C2630M B 3 08 deleting 201 DHCP IP addressed adding 198 disconnecting from 18 editing 201 logging into 18 logging out of 19 modifying 201 overview 1
31. ATM POS 05 No Link ATM POS 06 No Link Y No Link ATM POS 07 No Link Y No Link ATM POS 08 No Link v No Link y xl To activate combo box you should link lt Relay gt with lt POS gt in the linking setup m Figure 129 Linking Relays to ATM POS C2630M B 4 08 149 The following table describes the available options Table AM ATM POS Activated Relay Settings Option Result Disable Relay will not activate when the ATM POS event occurs Follow Event Relay will activate at the exact moment the ATM POS event occurs 1 3 5 10 15 and 20 Seconds Sets the amount of time the relay will remain active after the ATM POS event occurs Configuring Advanced Video Loss Activated Relay Output To configure an advanced video loss activated relay output 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click C The Schedule page is displayed 3 Click the Configure Relays button The Configure Relays dialog box opens 4 Click the Video Loss tab if itis not already selected 5 Configure each relay that is linked to an alarm a Click the drop down box to select a relay b Select a relay time value from the Activation Period drop down box Motion Alam ATM POS Video Loss Motion Input Relay Output Activation Period Camera Relay 04 y Follow Event Ls Disable m camasi Follow E
32. Administrators guide To enable the Ctrl Alt Del key combination 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click C The System page is displayed 3 Inthe Setup Ctrl Alt Del key combination section click the Enable Ctrl Alt Del key combination selection check box 4 Click Apply 5 Reboot the DX8100 C2630M B 4 08 Using Ctrl Alt Del You must enable the Ctrl Alt Del key combination and verify your actual keyboard mapping In some cases the DX8100 keyboard is remapped and the actual Ctrl Alt and Delete key function is assigned to other keys Ctrl Alt Del allows you to access the Windows Task M anager dialog box from within the DX8100 shell When you exit the Windows environment you are returned to the DX8100 shell In this case you do not have to log back into the DX8100 To access the Windows Task M anager dialog box 1 Press the assigned keys that implement the Ctrl Alt Del function The Windows Security dialog box opens 2 Inthe Windows Security dialog box click Task M anager The Windows Task M anager window opens To return to the DX8100 shell without rebooting the DX8100 exit the Windows Task M anager dialog box SETTING UP AUTO REBOOT The DX8100 allows you to select the day and time for the server to perform an automatic reboot If there are mapped network drives the Windows feature requires that the password be entered at the Enter Network Password dialog box In th
33. Button Command Description Add Bookmark Does the following Adds a red bookmark flag to mark the beginning of a start point Adds a gray bar to indicate the range between the start point and end point Remove Bookmark Removes the selected bookmark a Remove All Removes all bookmarks Bookmarks CREATING BOOKMARKS To select a region to export 1 2 3 M ake sure the DVR is in Playback or Search mode by clicking or al Click if you are in Live mode or proceed to step 3 if you are in Search mode Select a camera from the Site tree Locate the timeline slider at the beginning of the range you want to bookmark You can use the drop down box and spinner buttons above the timeline to locate a bookmark C2630M B 4 08 5 Click A red bookmark flag appears on the timeline M Select all Jor 21 2004 y os 333 00 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 4 Figure 62 Setting a Starting Bookmark 6 Locate the timeline slider at the end of the range you want to bookmark 7 Click The bookmark flag and the region between bookmarks turn gray Exporting a bookmarked region of video requires start and end bookmarks If only one bookmark is set video will not be marked for export 8 Repeat steps 4 7 for each additional region you want to bookmark for that camera 9 Click JJ if you are in Live mode or proceed to step 8 if you are in Search
34. DX8100 CLIENT EMERGENCY AGENT The DX8100 Client Emergency Agent works with networked DX8000 Series DVRs to alert users when one or more particular channels detect a motion and or alarm event The Emergency Agent runs on a networked client PC DX8100 VIEWER The DX8100 Viewer is capable of playing back a variety of video still image and audio media formats It is designed to recognize and verify the digital watermark that is embedded in DX8000 Series DVR native video Watermarking is used to authenticate the originality of a video file and to alert users of possible image tampering The viewer application runs automatically each time a CD or DVD created by the DX8100 s export feature is inserted into a Windows based PC The software can also be installed on a PC and opened independently when necessary DX8100 MOBILE CLIENT 12 The DX8100 Mobile Client allows you to view live video remotely from multiple cameras and sites Networking capabilities include local connection using wire bound or wireless local area network LAN technologies or remote connection using the Internet The DX8100 M obile Client software runs on a standard pocket PC based personal digital assistant PDA and it can display a single channel of real time video from any camera attached to any DX8100 DVR on the network Features include hierarchical organization of multiple sites built in security through password protection and an adjustable viewing area including full scre
35. Disconnect a mapped drive to disconnect 7 In the Device Selection section click the check box for the device to which you want the data backed up 8 Click OK The Backup schedule table is displayed the newly scheduled backup time range is listed in the table and the selection check box is marked 9 Click Apply EDITING AN EXISTING BACKUP SCHEDULE The DX8100 allows you to edit or delete an existing backup schedule To edit a backup schedule 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click Y The DX8100 setup screen is displayed 2 Click amp The backup configuration screen is displayed 3 In the Backup schedule table do the following a Click the backup schedule time range you want to edit b Click Edit The Edit Backup Schedule dialog box opens displaying the current settings for the selected backup schedule r Backup schedule Name Backup start time Backup time Filter Target device Daily Backup 13 42 13 42 13 43 AM 1 REMOVALDRY D Daily Backup REMOVALDRY Instant Backup Delete Edit Add Figure 160 Editing an Existing Backup Schedule c Edit the backup parameters d Click OK The Edit Backup Schedule dialog box closes and the backup configuration screen is displayed The updated schedule details are displayed in the Backup schedule table 4 Click Apply C2630M B 4 08 187 DELETING AN EXISTING BACKUP SCHEDULE To delete an existing schedule 1 On the DX8100
36. ImagestSecond Image Quality Figure 125 Maximum Rate and Resolution Recording Understanding the DX8100 Frame Rate Calculations The DX8100 uses a complex algorithm to calculate the amount of recording resources available for each channel This calculation takes into account factors such as the number of enabled cameras whether uniform or mixed resolution values are used recording type continuous alarm or motion and the frame rate settings of enabled channels The resulting calculations provide the operator with a margin of available frame rate capacity to distribute among the recorder s channels This margin of frame rate capacity or headroom is presented to the user as color filled sections of the frame rate sliders W hite areas on the slider represent frame rate capacity that is not available to that channel In certain cases adjusting the available frame rates of one channel or resolution type may free up capacity for other channels The following figure and table illustrates available and unavailable frame rate capacity CH2 Fem 640x240 z 7IPS Figure 126 Example of Frame Rate Capacity Table AJ Frame Rate Capacity Item Description D Available frame rate capacity O Unavailable frame rate capacity C2630M B 4 08 SETTING UP ADVANCED RELAY OUTPUT Relays work much like switches W hen triggered relays can activate external devices such as sirens light fixtures and door locks The DX8100
37. Installation manual Configure the KBD300A communication settings C2630M B 4 08 181 Configuring KBD300A Communication Settings This section describes how to configure the KBD300A communication settings The KBD300A is interfaced to the DX8100 using Port 1 to Port 4 These ports support connectivity to the DX8100 using the RS 422 data communication standard A user supplied RJ 45 cable is required For information about using the KBD300A refer to Using the KBD300A Keyboard on page 63 To configure the KBD300A communication settings 1 Connect the KBD300A to the DX8100 to a RS 422 RJ 45 port 2 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 3 In the Setup dialog box click The Network page is displayed 4 Inthe Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed 5 In the Communication Port drop down box select the Port to which the KBD300A is connected 6 In the device drop down box select KBD300A Pelco 7 Configure the following port settings e Interface mode RS 422 Baud rate 9600 e Parity ODD Data bits 8 Stopbits 1 8 Click Apply KBD300A Standard M ode Operational Features The following table describes the KBD300A Standard M ode operational features Table AX KB300A Standard Operational M ode Features Control Action J oystick Controls the camera s PTZ operation Number PRESET short M oves c
38. M ail Notification Setup on page 218 The record icon turns purple indicating a video loss recording regardless of the schedule The video loss utility is constantly running in the background If a schedule is not available the record icon defaults to purple If the DX8100 loses feed video on that channel is recorded 117 To set up video loss detection 1 2 3 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page In the Video Loss Detection section do one or both of the following e Click the Loss of synchronization check box Clickthe Low level of video check box e Inthe Low Level of Video Detection Operation Time section set the Start Time and the End Time Click Apply Video Loss Detection Video Lass IV Loss of synchronization 5 I Low level of video Low Level of Video Detection Operation Time Start Time 03 00 End Time 23 53 Figure 93 Video Loss Detection APPLYING SETTINGS TO ALL CAMERAS If you want to keep the changes you made to options and parameters on the Camera page you must click Apply If you attempt to leave the Camera page the system will display a message box prompting you to apply not apply or cancel the changes To apply camera configuration options to all attached cameras 1 2 3 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page Perform the camera configuration In the Apply to All Cameras s
39. M onitor page 3c E lt Manual Camera Mapping Mode Panel Divigin Selection C H EH HH LH H EH Drag and Drop cameras from the Site Tree onto each view panel Sequence Table oO 1 0 Min 30 Sec O02 O Min 30 Sec rer oO 0 Min 9 Sec Modify Sequence No E D Min 19 Sec Load Save Delete Apply Override monitor output in response to this type of esfint Alarm input Motion alarm override dwell time 1 zi 1 60 Second Figure 178 M odify a M apping Sequence Deleting a Sequence Instance from the List To delete a sequence instance from the list On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click The External Output page is displayed In the M anual Camera M apping M ode section do the following 1 2 3 214 a b C In the Sequence Table click the check box next to the sequence instance you want to delete Click Delete Click Save The Save profile dialog box opens Select an existing profile or enter a new profile name under which to save the sequence list Click OK Click Apply C2630M B 4 08 7 Click Apply at the bottom of the External M onitor page E Manual Camera Mapping Mode Panel Division Selection Drag and Drop cameras from the Site Tree onto each view panel Ch 3 Sequence No f2 7 0 zi Min 1 z Sec Override monitor output in response to this type of event Motion a
40. O12 ATM P0S12 12 None None O13 ATM P0S13 13 None None O14 ATM POS14 14 None None O15 ATM P0S15 15 None None O16 ATM POS16 16 None None WARNING If a device is set to the single mode only one device can be assigned to the connection port Figure 152 Assigning a Data Format to an ATM POS Device Setting Up ATM POS Exceptions An exception is a predefined transaction filter used to detect a specific data structure within the ATM POS transaction data Exceptions are configured on the Advanced page To use an exception to search transaction data the exception must be created before recording the transaction data If the transaction data is recorded before the exception filter is defined the exception filter will not find the data structure within the transaction data The DX8100 allows you to configure unique exceptions for each ATM POS device from the following ATM POS device selection drop down box Exception table that contains the name and effect of each exception you create e Action code drop down box that contains exception action codes User mapping table where you create the string for the action code Use the Advanced tab to configure exceptions Entries are case sensitive For each defined data device ATM device or POS terminal you can specify up to 31 data exceptions A field left blank is not used in the exception Any fields containing values must all be found or satisfied before a data device exception is generated
41. RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 COM1 U 1 Y Y 2 Y Y 3 Y Y 4 Y Y C2630M B 4 08 SETTING UP ATM POS DEVICE COMMUNICATION PORTS The DX8100 allows you to use both the COM 1 RS 232 port and Port 1 to Port 4 RS 422 RS 485 to connect ATM POS devices Typically Port 1 to Port 4 are used to connect the KBD300A and dome devices This section describes how to select and configure the ATM POS device communication port and includes the following topics Setting Up COM 1 Port Properties e Selecting the ATM POS Device Mode and Communications Options on page 164 Setting Up an ATM POS Data Format on page 169 e Assigning a Data Format to an ATM POS Device on page 173 e Setting Up ATM POS Exceptions on page 174 e Verifying the ATM POS Communication Connection on page 179 Setting Up COM 1 Port Properties This topic describes how to set up COM 1 communication port properties Access the Network page to configure the communication ports For information on accessing the Network page refer to Setting Up DX8100 Network Access on page 151 For information about the Port Device page refer to Setting Up Port and Device Communication Properties on page 161 The following table describes the COM 1 port properties Table AS COM 1 Port Properties Property Selection Interface M ode RS 232 default Parity None Odd or Even Data Bits 5 6 7 or 8 Stop Bits lor2 To set up COM 1 communication properties
42. Screen A A be ims punidia ea bia py Gudued ba i abies 48 On Screen PTZ Movement vic A yanks A de 48 PTZ Keypad with Camera Lens Controls 0 cece cece EEEE EEE 49 MOUSE Wheel ZOOM sciences adinntincine cc a o etd bisa O A AD a de dea Cipke ka eara ib 49 A Ea agen Bastiat AM aya T an E hye E hai EELNE T PA NDE Day gh say 51 Prodramming a Preset aaa a os a daa a lc iia cias 52 A RN 52 CleannGa Presets cers gesowswg iar rini Def iia t nd da ee depa da ed dave ee 53 Programming a PAM A A A A A A ic 54 Activating a Patter ci td di Setanta a e id 54 Clearing a Pattems tncinass a A A A AL Dis 55 PEZ OSDM lin dada jor eek thas poo AAE da Par apt el AA pa HR A DR 56 PLZ Control Pl ii a o a a we ie ia A 57 Camera Setup MU a o cda A da secu iio 57 Auxiliary AUX BUON Ss pas taney Gaede Gaga eed Lida e ad Rane eae nd Sia O E OREA a o PA dna 58 Keypad Buttons 1 4 are Available nnn nen ttre tenner ents 58 Preset Tour Dialog BOX iii A Jie a da 59 Addino Presetto Toreo lo a ci IL Da Mehta decane TE bie ea 60 Deleting Preset froni TOUT s a sass nacos rios iii io os ia a ia iaa 61 Activating Preset TOUT oc EA EAS A AL AE AAC dd o ENAA 62 Playback OSD poor a ta ta ta ele rea dd la oa 65 Playback Control is a o A il a a A ate Wags 66 Playback Sp ed and Volume Controls ssis i icri cocino to ico pa era aa ra a as 67 Playback Time ici a a A A EEE oi aa AA 68 Date Selection Drop Down BOX 00 cocco deaenany Bapeedahaee Gheteut 69 Event Type Drop down
43. Series DVR supports four video search methods index thumbnail POS and pixel For information about the user access level required to search video data refer to Definition of User Access Levels on page 193 To enter the Search mode On the DX8100 toolbar click Search This section describes how to use the Search mode and includes the following topics Search Window on page 74 e Displaying a Deinterlaced Image in the Search M ode on page 75 e Reusing the Search Time Range on page 75 Index Video Search on page 76 Thumbnail Video Search on page 77 POS Search on page 78 e Pixel Video Search on page 88 e Working with Special View and Search M ethods on page 90 SEARCH WINDOW The search window facilitates access to the search capabilities of the DX8100 Available search methods include index thumbnail POS and pixel Each search method allows users with playback access rights Standard User by default and higher to locate video data instantly using criteria such as time of day or changes in window pixels As in Playback mode digital zoom export and print features are available in Search mode For more information refer to Operating Playback Digital Zoom on page 70 Exporting Video on page 92 and Printing Images on page 281 The following figure shows the parts of the DX8100 window in Search mode BI Select oso IEA alse 00 m 02 09 04 05 06 07 00 09 10 11 12 13 14 1516 17 1019222 4 E zL Resdy px 7 f
44. TIF rs V Audio Record RealTime Image Count 1 Interval MOS Figure 75 Still Image Export Formats FINALIZING AN EXPORT PROCESS This section describes how to finalize an export process The following guidelines are applicable Audio export is available only with DX8100 native AVI and ASF video formats RealTime setting applies only to DX8100 native AVI and ASF video formats e Whenthe Real Time check box is selected the DX8100 will export video so it can be played back in real time 30 fps for the same length of time as the original recording For example if video was recorded at 1 fps this means the DX8100 will insert 29 null frames for every one frame of actual video Thus one minute of video recorded at 1 fps 60 frames total will play back for one minute at 30 frames per second 60 frames of actual video interspersed with 1 740 null frames If the Real Time check box is not selected one minute of video C2630M B 4 08 103 104 recorded at 1 fps will play back in two seconds in real time Figure 76 illustrates the two video streams 1 one padded with null frames to match the actual time duration and 2 another stream without null frames Figure 76 Real Time Versus Non Real Time Export To finalize the export process 1 Make sure that the export media selected is inserted in the drive unit that the drive is ready 2 In the Time Range table click selection box for each backed up video
45. View Dialog Box C2630M Bio it da via ki denies 105 Period Start and End Dates co cc gi tnkia dares ee nooks Penna ote a Cunha id edna e dae 105 User Dilog Events CZO30M B iss 0 ddirt cien meto dad seu a deals dota IDO de ec 9 lar a ia dua ia dialer 106 System On Off Log EVEN loa bik A ee dd ov es ai 106 System Health View Submenu ccoo 107 System Health DIAlO BOX is dev ent bina de deer a id a a a DR A ca A 107 SyStem Health Od cae tooo o as aa sr da alana eo caida Raw paid da 108 Parts of the DX8100 Setup Dialod BOX inasistencia ata al brhaa ndo dea a 110 Camera Pri ei ad A A AE AS EO A A O iets eee 112 LOW Sensitivity Level cios toros toas hits rivalidad dada tdt e de 113 High Sensitivity AOL A A A EI araea 113 Adequate Sensitivity Level ii a id it taal e ta La 113 Camera Motion Detection eu a ii ds Bins ad A Die vader heats 114 Audio Option N ot Installed weiss geste ek cages ad da ben io dp a alar daa iia dee 115 AUX Audio Settings Dialog BOX inaire a a Gen E ET A A EE TE as bib iew es 115 WIGEOHOSS DETCCEI ON sci remade O O 118 Relay and Alarm Settings Page Relay Settings Section o ccce etter tenets 119 Relay and Alarm Settings Page Alarm Settings Section 0 cece eee eee e cere e eer e bene erent dete teen enn eens 120 Event Relay Link Settings M otion Detection Link Settings Section 0 ccc cece cece cere eee erent e eset e ene e enn eens 121 Event Relay Link Settings Alarm Link Settings Section
46. Window 2 A a Ri tena 22 Bei File Menu Comm ds caters a di dl es Se des E e E O Oi 23 A AAA PP O 24 DI View Menu COMMONS a ad e da A OAE ade tha whee af ede II 24 ENAURANT a EA EE E EE EE I A went a td tl a is Ea dd 25 F Favorite M enu Commands wo oro diery A AA de ee KEES vile EE EE RAY AA A DA 25 GS DX8T00 Help M enu Commands sass sje cars ds a cts aa E EAE AEE EEE dae 22 land 25 H DX8100 Toolbar Buttons vic cc niri e ved met ee A EE OEA A EEA PE E TEEGEE a ET 26 l Operating Modeste O 27 Ji Miew Panes Padel ariii da viene anidan el ad dd ee Gad AES dC a EE Gea E ea iha 29 Ko HoWwVi w Pal ls are Organized acia A A a E EVE REUE eh 30 L VIEW Panes ad Panel vto al a a a aa 31 MMT PP a dba 36 N Parts of the Live View OSD PaNE co cuicos rr ria ira iaa a eri ida tela dad e 44 OX Recording NOIA a O AO EA Io 47 P Standard PC Keyboard Functions for Controlling PTZ and Lens Functions ccc o corn rr rr 50 Parts of the PTZ OSDiMenuControl sng 08k A aes Pda none nee LARS E ales 56 R KB300A Standard Operational M ode Features occo 63 S KBD300A Shift M ode Operational Features cc EEEE 64 T Parts of th Playback Controls ni iire A a a A net Dda ais 66 U Parts of the Playback Speed and Volume Controls cc ccoooa 67 M Parts 0f the Playback Timeline Control caricia rara a EATE T N la 68 W Partscof the Digital ZOOMT CONTO E re e E aaa rial trata rias dl a a a li ii 71 X Parts of the DX8100 Window in Searc
47. a backup archives all channels fora specific time period while exporting only archives selected channels Following the directions below Power User and Administrators can set up and perform backups NOTE The DX8100 Export feature backs up all configuration settings to the target device However the target device setting is not restored after the import process is executed all backup settings are restored except the target device configuration setting The target device setting has to be re entered in order for the scheduled backup routine to execute You must use the DX8100 Client application to view backed up data For more information about viewing backed up data refer to the Client Applications manual This section describes how to back up data and includes the following topics Accessing the Backup Configuration Page on page 185 Adding a Backup Schedule on page 186 Editing an Existing Backup Schedule on page 187 Deleting an Existing Backup Schedule on page 188 Initiating an Instant Backup Schedule on page 188 Mapping a Network Device on page 189 Disconnecting from a Network Drive on page 189 Selecting a Backup M edia Device on page 190 Viewing Backed Up Video on page 190 The following figure shows the Backup schedule page 184 Backup schedule Backup start time Backup time Filter Target device Instant Backup OP Waiting backup information Backup time Filter Target device Enqueue time Cancel Priori
48. ccc cece eect o terete renee rr 121 Event Relay Link Settings ATM POS Link Settings Section 0 ccc cece cece terete ere ee ener rr 122 Event Relay Link Settings Video Loss Link Settings Section 0 ccc cece eee eter er eee eee rn eee etree been tenes 122 Event Relay Link Settings Video Loss Link Settings Section 0 cc cece ete cece eect eee eee e eer e eee r eee eben nnn eng 123 Event Recording Link Settings Alarm Record Link Settings Section 0 cece cece eet e eect cere rr 123 Event Recording Link Settings ATM POS Record Link Settings Section ccc cece cect ete tee cere teeter tenet een ene neeg 124 Event Recording Link Settings Video Loss Record Link Settings Section ccc cc ete e cece eee e stent eee ene e eee nn ene 124 Event PTZ Link Settings Linking Presets and Patterns to Motion EventS 0 0 csc sc et cerco o eee e eee teen e seen ene eng 125 Event PTZ Link Settings Linking Presets and Patterns to Alarm Events 00 ccc cece cust e sete eee rr 126 Event PTZ Link Settings Linking Presets and Patterns to ATM POS Events liccc ccecce o tees ee ete ee teen en eneng 127 Event PTZ Link Settings Linking Presets and Patterns to Video Loss Events cece ececee eset rro rr 127 A A ty cet deity O A CNO 128 Filling In Recording Blocks ina Schedule Grid cc cece cece cece terete eee ene eee ener EEE EEE Ene EEE EEE ES 130 Clearing Recording Times for a Specific Record M ode 1 ett teen 131 Clearing Recordi
49. channel is limited to the maximum setting of the ALL frame rate slider The frame rate ranges from 1 30 ips depending on the DX8100 Series DVR configuration The 8 camera DVR has 8 sliders the 16 camera DVR has 16 sliders the 24 camera DVR has 24 sliders and the 32 camera DVR has 32 sliders Repeat step 5b for each camera you want to configure Click OK Click Apply at the Schedule page Frame Rate Configuration A xj C ATM POS 220240 115 320x240 Y 11PS 320x240 11Ps 300x240 11Ps 320x240 y 11Ps 220x240 11Ps 3204240 y 11PS 320x240 y TIPS 320x240 11Ps 320x240 11Ps 320x240 y 11PS 320x240 y 11PS 320x240 11PS 320x240 11PS 320x240 11PS 320240 y 11PS Figure 121 Frame Rate Configuration Dialog Box 141 142 Setting the Resolution and Frame Rate Both resolution and frame rate settings can be adjusted using the Frame Rate Configuration dialog box For information on accessing the Frame Rate Configuration dialog box referto Accessing the Frame Rate Configuration Dialog Box on page 140 To set recording resolution and frame rates for each channel 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 In the Setup dialog box click The Schedule page is displayed 3 In the Camera Settings section click Frame Rate Configuration The Frame Rate Configuration dialog box opens 4 Select the button for the recording resolution and
50. check the camera information box above the playback timeline or verify that the desired view panel is framed with a thin red outline Index video can also be displayed in full screen view For information about displaying playback video in full screen view refer to Displaying Index Search Video in Full Screen View on page 27 76 To search video by motion or alarm events 1 2 3 On the DX8100 toolbar click ak On the DX8100 Search control click 6 On the DX8100 toolbar click a view panel division button From the Site tree drag the camera channel you want to search onto one of the view panels Click the view panel of the channel you want to search From the drop down box on the playback timeline select the day you want playback to begin Select the event type you want to view from the event type drop down box Only events recorded for the selected camera are listed in the index A sensor event is identical to an alarm event Options are as follows All None Motion Alarm in ATM POS Video Loss Select an event from the index Verify that the Select all check box is selected Deselecting the Select all check box will disable playback for all view panels except the channel being searched The DX8100 allows you to view playback on multiple cameras in addition to the camera being searched This feature is valuable if you want to examine a variety of views recorded at the time a certain event wa
51. communications properties 161 site name assigning 151 TCP IP and bandwidth throttle setting up 153 network setup static IP address entering 153 overview 109 PTZ presets and patterns alarm events linking to 125 ATM POS events linking to 126 linking to external events 124 motion events linking to 125 PTZtest 112 video loss events linking to 127 relay output advanced alarm activated configuring 148 advanced ATM POS activated configuring 149 advanced motion activated configuring 147 advanced video loss activated configuring 150 alarm event external linking to 121 ATM POS event external linking to 121 motion event external linking to 120 See also relays video loss event external linking to 122 relay properties settingup 119 See also relays schedule setup frame rate basic configuring 140 frame rate configuring 140 record mode 128 130 system setup 201 useraccess 190 setup pages Backup page 184 Camera page 110 Ext Monitor page 210 Linking page 119 Network page default Network page 151 DNS WINS page 155 Schedule page 128 Site page 197 System page 201 Userpage 190 shortcut keys PC keyboard 50 Home and End Insert and Delete 242 Left and Right Arrow Page Up and Page Down Plus and M inus Up and Down arrow using to operate PTZ and lens functions 49 50 shortcut menus local site shortcut menu 36 relay shortcut menu 36 remote site shortcut menu 36 site designator 44 sitename 151 site tree
52. data format template and includes the following topics e Understanding the Data Format Page e Creating a New Data Format on page 172 e Editing a Data Format on page 172 Deleting a Data Format on page 173 C2630M B 4 08 169 Understanding the Data Format Page The DX8100 allows you to create a device data format for each ATM POS device You can assign a unique name to each device data format template The following figure shows the Data Format page Access the Data Format page from the Port Device page For information on accessing the Data Format page refer to Setting Up DX8100 Network Access on page 151 For information about the Port Device tab refer to Setting Up Port and Device Communication Properties on page 161 er fro 1 Control Character NUL O 2 Control Character LF 10 3 Control Character CR 13 Figure 151 Data Format Page C2630M B 4 08 The following table describes the parts of the Data Format page Table AT Parts ofthe Data Format Page Item Command Description Data Format Name Text box where a specific name for the data format template is created Transaction Format Includes the following options Transaction Number Allows a transaction symbol to be entered Transaction Start Selects the control character for indicating the start of a transmission Transaction End Selects the control character for indicating the end of a
53. do the following Add Opens the Add New User dialog box to create a new user account Remove Deletes the selected user Properties Opens the Properties dialog box to view and modify user details Set Password Opens the Set Password dialog box to specify or modify the user s password User Groups Allows you to create user accounts for the following user groups Power Standard Restricted The DX8100 allows the administrator to configure access rights to any user group for the following functions Camera security e View live video Operate PTZ Playback video Set PTZ Access export menu For more information about user groups refer to Definition of User Access Levels and Definition of Camera Security Access on page 193 14 User Timeout Allows you to configure the amount of time a user is allowed to remain logged on to the DX8100 system before the system automatically logs out The time period is from 5 60 minutes in increments of 5 minutes The manual setting allows the user to stay logged on to the DX8100 until the user is manually logged off O Auto Login User Allows you to configure a user to log on to the DX8100 automatically BUILT IN USER ACCOUNTS There are two built in user accounts that come pre configured with the DX8100 which cannot be deleted or changed Guest The Guest account provides limited access to the system The Guest user can view live video but cannot play back recorded video or
54. drop down box select the group you want to copy 5 Click Apply Emergency Agent Setup Emergency E mail Notification Setup C Disable Notification Enable Notification ie ESTO Ft Foor Lab Emal Addess xB100_fist_tr pelcocom Pl _ rca B TIT oc asave peice com Add to Group Ac 1 d O Al malSMTP fimtpdomaint pelco com I7 My E mail Server Requires Authentication l 3 T Stat men End 1 18 01 PM Server address mtp domain pelco com L ae 3 i j Figure 186 Sending E mails to Groups C2630M B 4 08 Administering and Maintaining the DX8100 This section describes how to perform DX8100 system administration and periodic maintenance including the following topics e Updating the DX8100 Server and Client Applications Recovering a Password on page 233 UPDATING THE DX8100 SERVER AND CLIENT APPLICATIONS From time to time software updates may be made available for both the DX8100 server and client applications These updates will be free and will be available on CD from Pelco When an update is issued it must be loaded onto a single DX8100 Series DVR server Once installed on a server the updates will be automatically distributed to clients on the same network when the client applications are started Remote DX8100 severs can be updated from a local DVR using the Software Upgrade utility To start the update process 1 From the DX8100 menu bar
55. e ad dae ea daa ed 59 OMA PMA A A ais 59 Activating a Preset TOUR a a A A ba 62 Deactivating a Preset ToU soned ienen eune A vibe E E TERTA a dali 62 Using the KBD300A Keyboard yoo icon nye marie io a EE ida a a 63 KBD300A Standard M ode Operational Features 00 nor 63 Working in Playback Mode virii miitin ronner ca pl a pl dogs Gane da prat ada 65 Accessing Playback MiOde ie 42th A Pe tie RE Sd hoe ca cee ALE RAE es E ee 65 Assigning Cameras to View Panels occ ccoo nnn netted treed enn 65 Playback On Sereen Display OSD arcano hob d Lotus co dl to E ASA e tho dais ob e 65 Playback Controlan iere cla lt ola 66 Playback TIMES iio AA A AAA ARA A AA A DATA 68 Playing Back Video DY TIME scams tasas tiros letal arsed laipo baba aloe dl e E EE iaa 69 Starting Playback from a Specific Point in Time oo ieee ccc nono 69 Understanding Instant Playback pyran orion td e ata cd iaa 69 Playing BackVidEO by EVeNt cut ca e da pi AT RA da AAA cal 70 Operating Playback Digital ZOOM ica aan lA ica Di e a api dow dled aida Alai 70 Zoom Using the Digital Zoom Control oo ccc oc renee te rere EEE EEE Eee EEE dene EEE 71 ZOOMMUSING ThE MOUSE A A E das tal easel ed bea area An TON 72 Panning a Zoomed IMAGE os eek Pewee E E ones 73 Working in Search Modemi isnot isis tard ali depa cd e oad da a ata ia len ictal 74 Search Window ita do a anaa ty en lhe a Ueda ol hao E EET Ibias ies A 74 Displaying a Deinterlaced Image in the Search M ode cocco ccc
56. extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the PTZ controls To switch between the standard and extended view mode From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt Extended View Alternative methods to navigate the remote camera menu system are as follows e Keypad controls For information on using the keypad controls refer to Accessing a Remote Camera Programming M enu on page 56 Keyboard keys For information on using the keyboard keys refer to Using PC Keyboard Shortcuts to Operate PTZ and Lens Functions on page 50 C2630M B 4 08 59 The following figure shows the PTZ OSD Menu control Figure 29 PTZ OSD Menu The following table describes the parts of the PTZ OSD Menu control Table Q Parts of the PTZ OSD Menu Control Item Part Description 11 Enter Provides the following actions Accepts the selected remote camera OSD menu choice Accesses menu option parameters For example point the cursor at the Language option and click Enter accesses the list of available languages 2 Exit N A Up and Down Navigate up and down the remote camera OSD menu or cycle through a list of options or parameters Buttons O Left and Right Perform no activity Buttons Accessing a Remote Camera Programming M enu The DX8100 allows you to navigate the remote camera menu system using any of the following PTZOSD Menu controls For information on using
57. for up to 36 cameras PLAYBACK ON SCREEN DISPLAY OSD The on screen display for playback is identical to live view with the exception of a date time field in place of the PTZ designator Figure 38 Playback OSD C2630M B 4 08 65 PLAYBACK CONTROLS Use the playback controls to start playback control direction and adjust speed Click MW at any time to return to live view 66 The playback controls are hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the playback controls To switch between the standard and extended view mode From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt Extended View The following figure shows the DX8100 playback controls ole do Q gt OQO Figure 39 Playback Controls The following table describes the parts of the payback controls Table T Parts of the Playback Controls Part Description Frame By Frame Reverse Each frame is displayed in the reverse direction with each click of the Frame by Frame Reverse button Frame By Frame Forward Each frame is displayed in the forward direction with each click of the Frame by Frame Forward button Fast Forward to End Advances the bookmark to the end of the latest recorded video Play Forward Initiates normal playback of recorded video in the forward direction Stop Stops playback control activity and returns to the Live View mode Pause Pauses video playback in the for
58. iia criado rial ta bat as 128 Setting Up the Camera Recording Mode cnco ccoo 129 Creating Yearly Recording Schedul s ccoo a ta Do an DORA aio id 132 Creating M onthly or Multiple Day Recording Schedules 0 cece cece c rr 133 Editing Schedules x ti ceases e a diated Marah Mati lata Galen Vt est tates Bann e eR a 136 Working with Custom Camera Settings 0 ccc cece cece tere e rr e ete e rede eee ete seen tere ners 138 Configuring the Frame Rates doista danna dais Madey dalled dada dif neers doo 22 8 cala hes 140 Setting Up Advanced Relay Output 20 rn tere EEE EEEE ERE E 147 Setting Up Network Properties vacia ia da ci E a apes 151 Configuring the DX8100 for Network ACCESS 0 cece cece etc ete e eee e rene rr ede t ebb enn e ener 151 Setting Up TCP IP and Bandwidth Throttle oo ccc cece cece teeter eee eee eee ere ree ere nee e enn eee 153 Working WithiM UIEICAStING cacedseds o a A Greed A sedate habitat dens 154 Accessing Network Information 00 cece ccc cece creer ener rere eee e deere rE EEE een e Eden dene Ene 155 Setting UP DNSIWINS css canicas amas ines rl n teeta id child tati 155 Working with Time Synchronization rocio AA o Mower bla 156 Setting Up Port and Device Communication Properties ccce EE 161 Understanding the Port Device Page 6 ccc cece cece teeter rere rr 161 Setting Up ATM POS Device Communication Ports 0 2 0 cece rr tn nent eee neg 163 Setting UP ATM POS Device Properties sca cocci a vee ona a
59. is granted only limited access to the system The other four access levels range from the Administrator group with the most rights and privileges to the Restricted group with the least rights and privileges To operate and configure all but the most basic features of the DX8100 you must be assigned a user account other than Guest If you have not been assigned a user account contact your system administrator before proceeding For information on the rights and permissions of the user groups refer to Definition of User Access Levels on page 193 NOTE The Guest user account does not have access to the setup features of the DX8100 Only users with Administrator and Power User accounts are allowed access to setup functions This section includes the following topics Local DX8100 Login Remote DX8100 Login on page 18 LOCAL DX8100 LOGIN If you are logging into the DX8100 for the first time the login procedure is different from the method described below For information on first time login instructions refer to the DX8100 Installation manual This section includes the following topics Logging in to a Local DX8100 on page 17 Logging Out of the Local DX8100 on page 17 Exiting to the Windows Operating System on page 18 LOGGING IN TO A LOCAL DX8100 You must have a valid user name and password to log in to the DX8100 The user name and password are case sensitive To log in with a user name other than Guest 1 From the DX
60. low and high operating thresholds for various system devices If a threshold is exceeded the system displays an alert notification You can elect to open a subsequent event log which provides a more detailed 106 description about the event The system devices are as follows CPU temperature Fan speed Power supply status Self M onitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology SM ART for hard disk drive status Network information Uninterruptible power source UPS status when connected NOTE The UPS area is reserved for future use An alert notification also appears on remote client computer For this to occur the remote client must be connected to the server to receive the notification C2630M B 4 08 WORKING WITH SYSTEM HEALTH STATUS VIEW To access the System Health dialog box 1 From the DX8100 menu bar click View gt System Health View view Export Favorite Help OSD Log Resolution Cycle Views Setup Extended View Index View ovovov m Health View Status View Log View Display deinterlaced image Figure 82 System Health View Submenu 2 On the submenu select Status View The System Health dialog box opens r Hardware Information Low Limit High Limit CPU Temperature 40 C 104 00 F eo c 2 176 000 F Fan Speed 2242 APM 1600 RPM voe 1280 Y f aov f 1 600 Y a 3424 y 1 000 Y 4500 Y sv siav 3s00v 700Y 12 12408 Y 950 y 1450Y J SMART Info
61. mail notification include once every 1minute 10 minutes 30 minutes e 1hour 3hours e 6hours Setting the Time of Day To set the time of day during which e mail notifications will be sent 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 2 The Notification page is display 3 Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab 4 Inthe Frequency section do the following a Click the Start check box to use the spinner buttons or type the earliest time of day you want e mail notifications to be sent for example 7 30 a m b Click the End check box to use the spinner buttons or type the latest time of day you want e mail notifications to be sent for example 6 00 p m 5 Click Apply Sending E mail Notifications in Response to Motion Events E mail notifications can be sent whenever a camera attached to a DX8100 detects motion To cause e mail notifications to be sent in response to motion events 1 2 3 5 6 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click 2 The Notification page is displayed Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab In the Notification Items section do the following a Click the Motion check box b Inthe Selected Channels field click once to the right of the word Motion The Selected Channels dialog box opens c Doone of the following Clickthe check box for each channel you want to mo
62. mame mem mh mie a mm my gh ihe ome gis me mbes ime me me me me me Ome Ome lm Figure 66 Select Channel Dialog Box c Click the check box for each channel to which you want to assign the book mark region d Click OK The time range for each selected channel is displayed in the Time Range table 7 Do the following a In the Device panel click the check box of the desired export device b Click the check box for each time range you want to export 8 Click Export x r Device Time Range E e OPTICAL DISK DRIVES 5 0 CD R RW Mi 08 24 2006 08 39 00 000 08 24 2006 09 09 00 000 ch01 082406_083900_ O NEC DVD_RW ND 35504 M2 08 24 2006 0951 00 000 08 24 2006 10 12 00 000 ch02 082406_095100_ 5 8 Dvo A Ma 08 24 2006 08 39 00 000 08 24 2006 09 09 00 000 ch05 082406_083900__ As NECIO ENDE M4 08242006 09 51 00 000 08 24 2006 10 12 00 000 ch05 D82406_095100_ Evaa BERDIGISRIBANES AS 08242006 10 1200 000 08 24 2006 10 13 00 000 ehOS O82406_101200 Remote drive Q NOT INSTALLED Removable drive 3 NOT INSTALLED Delete Item File name Apply 4 gt r Export Format I AM C ASF C Native C BMP C JPEG C TIF Refresh Create folder Y Audio Record W Real Time Image Count 13 Interval Continuous y J MapNetDry DiscomectNDiy F Enable deirterlacing fter eer ee Figure 67 Selecting the Export Device and Time Ranges INSERTING AND REM OVING A US
63. minute intervals C2630M B 4 08 71 Click again to change from 10 minute intervals to 1 hour intervals 7 Click the thumbnail of the interval you want to search 8 click gt to view video Double clicking a thumbnail image will enlarge the image and begin playback 9 Click a to return to thumbnail images dedede ele ele le ADE foma foe 24 2008 2113 03 03 ZA r A A 05 08 07 Figure 50 DX8100 DVR Thumbnail Search Screen POS SEARCH 78 The DX8100 allows a user to search any 24 hour period of recorded POS video and data To record ATM POS video and data the ATM POS devices and DX8100 must first be connected and configured as follows e Physically connect the ATM POS devices to the DX8100 Set up camera to ATM POS device linking Configure the DX8100 ATM POS settings for each attached ATM POS device e Startan ATM POS transmittal and verify that the DX8100 is receiving the ATM POS video and data For information about setting up the DX8100 for ATM POS applications refer to the following sections Linking Relay Outputs to ATM POS Events on page 121 e Linking Cameras to Record in Response to ATM POS Events on page 123 Linking Presets and Patterns to ATM POS Events on page 126 Setting Up ATM POS Device Communication Ports on page 163 Setting UP ATM POS Device Properties on page 164 C2630M B 4 08 This section describes how to use the PO
64. mode 10 click and follow the directions in Performing the Export on page 99 CLEARING BOOKMARKS This section describes how to clear bookmarks and includes the following topics Clearing a Single Bookmark on page 93 Clearing All Bookmarks on page 93 Clearing a Single Bookmark To clear a single bookmark 1 Select a bookmark flag from the timeline The bookmark flag should change to a light green color 2 Click to remove the selected bookmark M Select all 01 COS Camera 9 or 21 2004 y p 00 foo E 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 SS Se ee a E o HA A A RA PA a AA B i 1 Figure 63 Removing a Single Bookmark Clearing All Bookmarks To clear all bookmarks Click Remove All Bookmarks C2630M B 4 08 BOOKMARKING AND EXPORTING MULTIPLE CHANNELS The DX8100 allows you to bookmark a video region for one camera and apply that book marked time window to multiple channels This feature is used in conjunction with the export feature For example if you want to export video recorded between 9 00 a m and 9 05 a m for multiple cameras you set the bookmarks for camera 1 at 9 00 a m and 9 05 a m During the export process you can associate that same bookmarked time window with multiple cameras To book mark data and export video for multiple channels 1 Make sure the DVR is in Search mode by clicking a 2 Select a camera from the Site tree 3 Loc
65. monitor For each channel live video is displayed on the VGA monitor at the maximum recording rate For example channel 1 is set to 2CIF recording resolution and the actual record rate is 1 image per second ips In this case live video for channel 1 is displayed at 15 ips Additionally the capture card provides a BNC analog output of the live video image The analog image is the same as the image displayed on the VGA monitor The DX8100 External Monitor option allows you to configure how analog video is displayed on an external monitor connected to the capture card For information about the External M onitor feature refer to External M onitor Setup on page 210 MUX card displays real time video If the DX8100 is equipped with the M UX option real time video from the M UX card s is displayed onthe main VGA monitor at 30 ips Real time video is displayed for all the channels regardless of the recording resolution Additionally the M UX Card provides a BNC analog output of the real time video image The analog image is the same as the image displayed on the VGA monitor The analog output does not contain any display icons labels or text but video is displayed on the analog monitor in the same division mode as is displayed on the VGA monitor One operational difference is that the M UX stops the display of real time video if the search mode is active for one channel In this case the capture card s are used to display the video When inst
66. of shipment resulting from the specific use or application made of the Products Pelco s liability for any claim whether based on breach of contract negligence infringement of any rights of any party or product liability relating to the Products shall not exceed Five years on fiber optic products and TW 3000 Series unshielded twisted pair the price paid by the Dealer to Pelco for such Products In no event will Pelco be UTP transmission products liable for any special incidental or consequential damages including loss of use loss of profit and claims of third parties however caused whether by the negligence of Pelco or otherwise Exceptions to this warranty are as noted below Three years on Spectra IV products Three years on Genex Series products multiplexers server and keyboard Three years on DX Series digital video recorders DVR5100 Series digital video The above warranty provides the Dealer with specific legal rights The Dealer may recorders DigitalSENTRY Series hardware products DVX Series digital video also have additional rights which are subject to variation from state to state recorders NVR300 Series network video recorders and Endura Series distributed network based video products Three years on Camclosure and Pelco branded fixed camera models except the CC3701H 2 CC3701H 2X CC3751H 2 CC3651H 2X MC3651H 2 and M C3651H 2X camera models which have a five year warranty 1 Model and serial number Th
67. of the ATM POS device linked to the selected camera channel is displayed in the Device Name text box In this case the Device Name text box is deselected Do the following 1 In the Transaction Information section click the check box to select Device Name The Device Name text box is available 2 Type the ATM POS device name in the Device Name text box Set the date and time range you want to search for the transaction number In the Transaction Information section click the check box to select Transaction Number The Transaction Number text box is available In the Transaction Number text box type the transaction number Click Start Search If the channel date time and transaction number are valid the POS transaction is displayed in the POS Search Table In the POS Search Table click a transaction entry The transaction data is displayed in the Data window 83 9 On the playback controls click Forward Playback The video recorded for the transaction is displayed in the Video window Playback Start for 10 2006 for foo foo End for 10 2006 J fos 05 0 Transaction Information y Device Name J8TM P0s01 Y Transaction Number as m Data Information I Transaction with Exception Only I Line ltem J F Action Code F Exception Code 01 10 2006 09 04 39 562 Start Search Stop Search F Data Overlay Enable TRANSACTION NUMBER 24 DATE 1 10 2006 TIME 9 5 0 T BONE 4 59 SUB TOTAL
68. on to step 6 without clicking Apply To activate a preset tour 1 2 3 On the DX8100 toolbar click EX Click and then to bring up the Preset preset tour group dialog box From the drop down box select the preset tour 1 4 you want to activate Click Save Click Apply Click Exit to return to the main screen Click on the PTZ keypad to exit programming mode Click on the PTZ keypad to activate the tour x Available presets y Number Name DwellTime sec 4 Preset01 2 Preset02 Preset03 Preset04 Preset05 PresetnA JOOOoOoO si Add to Group Preset Tour Group fv 02 O y Number Name DwellTime Sec 2 y Oo 1 Preset01 O 2 Preset02 7 O 3 Preset03 5 Delete IE Save Ti su Exit Figure 37 Activating a Preset Tour To reactivate the last preset tour you configured On the keypad click Preset DEACTIVATING A PRESET TOUR To deactivate a preset tour do one of the follow ing Use the mouse to move the on screen PTZ control Activate a PTZ preset C2630M B 4 08 USING THE KBD300A KEYBOARD The KBD300A allows you to operate certain DX8100 live view display functions and control camera PTZ operations from a keyboard rather than a mouse When connected to the DX8100 server the KBD300A supports two modes the Standard mode and the Shift mode The Shift mode is entered by pressing the Shift button and is indicated by a lit LED For information about how to op
69. one camera channel per pane are displayed in the panel e Inthis case 7 hidden panels four cameras channels per panel or 4 x 7 28 panels remain to be displayed The following figure shows how the DX8100 cycles through view panels depending on the display format Figure 4 Example of Single 4 9 and 16 Division View Panels The following table describes how the DX8100 view panes and panels are organized Table K How View Panels are Organized Display Type Grouping va ae a Single 1 32 1 32 4 Division 1 8 4 8 9 Division 1 4 9 4 16 Division 1 2 16 2 25 Division 1 2 25 2 36 Division 1 1 36 1 6 10 13 Division 145 Division 1 6 6 248 Division 1 4 10 4 1412 Division 1 4 13 4 C2630M B 4 08 Pressing one of the view panel division buttons sets the number of visible channels displayed in the panel The following figure illustrates the view panel identifier Panel 1 8 502 C02 502 C02 Camera 2 07 14 2005 y 1 13 33 473 oo 4 al 00 01 02 03 04 05 fa 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1919 2 a e 2 TEST EN ee ES fess RE ES SA En pas Ready i COLL LO Figure 5 View Panel Identifier The following table describes how the DX8100 view panes and panels shown in Figure 5 are organized Table L View Panes and Panel Item Description 1 Indicates the panel number bein
70. oo ccc cece rece cece ener eee ened eee E need Ee bende e EEE eE nS 18 Remote DXO100 LOGI asics tie cid a hae tate dws Gat aad uated Ad aa dis 18 Connecting to a Remote Site 00cc nner end n dnt nets 18 Disconnecting from a Remote Site icc cece cen eee ee eee rr EEE EH enn EERE EEE 18 togging intoa Remote Site sci ee reciti ticiet a dw dcii hitai Plead dads MEG said betta Paani daa ci 18 LoggingOUt Of REMOTE Site naco nta da per eaneraeaasvereed canes 19 Working with Dali MONITO casos ica rd ia beta a da Daas dai 19 Configuring the Dual Display Card s its0tserceeevestecaeanads rociado Da diran peLaad ee aasd bee eedes eee 19 Understanding the DX8100 Application WindOW oo ccce ccc ccecce co nee een eee e en Ere rete eee Ede e Een Een Ens 20 Description of the DXBLOO Mai WiINdOW it ora eter ian vias dee a ean a vba A Eaa dd dds ba 20 DAGLOONMIGMUIB AN acts NA a 23 DX8100 TOODA it A Goyer eed aig dot Oe daa age PE wedded dd a ia 26 Displaying the DX8100 Window from a Page c cece cece cece eee tence erent een eee eed Ebene EEE EES 27 Description or Operating Modes as dete chan orini ek sae iba sa WEA le Cis daw Ga wales wal ia Pa deta teed 27 Displaying Video in full screen VIEW oo cece cece cece ect e eee ener rr ED E Een EERE EES 27 Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views cece ccc cece cere eee e cette etre teen tee enn ee enenenns 28 Understanding View Panes and Panels ccc ccc cece o rr ER EEE EEE Ee E
71. or POS event is detected in the camera s POS predefined ATM POS field For information on ATM POS detection refer to Linking Cameras to Record in Response to ATM POS Events on page 123 4 Click and drag the mouse to highlight the time periods and channels where you want the recording mode to apply Drag the mouse diagonally to highlight periods across multiple camera channels simultaneously 5 Click Apply Q_ Record Mode BB Normal I Motion KM Alam PF ATM Pos 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2021 2 23 24 1 Cancel Apply D Figure 109 Filling In Recording Blocks in a Schedule Grid Clearing a Scheduled Recording The DX8100 Schedule feature allows you to do the following Foroneor multiple channels clear the scheduled recording times for a specific record mode You can select one channel or you can drag and select a group of channels For example you can select and drag the recording times for channel 1 32 However the system does not allow you to select random channels from the list For example you are not allowed to select channel 1 2 and 4 excluding camera 3 Forone or multiple channels you can clear the scheduled recording times for all record modes simultaneously Youcan select and clear recording times periods in increments of 30 minutes to 24 hours This section describes how to clear a scheduled recording and includes the following sections Clearing
72. person to whom you would like to send a copy of the notification to c In the Subject text box enter text in the subject line as you would like it to appear in e mail notifications The default subject line is DX8100 Emergency E mail Notification Click Apply Emergency Agent Setup Emergency E mail Notification Setup Disable Notification Enable Notification E None z Q ae actos r Nore z f3 Subject DX8100 Emergency E mail Notification ma SMTP femtpdomaint pelco com Full name 06100 Fist Floor Lobby E mail Address ex8100_first_fr pelco com Qr Add to Group Y My E mail Server Requires Authentication Test E mail Notification Figure 185 Sending E mails to Individuals Server address emp domain pelca com Password e C2630M B 4 08 Sending E mail Notifications to Groups To configure e mail notification to send e mail alerts to a group of individuals 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click The Notification page is displayed 3 Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab 4 Do the following a Click the To check box b In the drop down box select the group to which you want to send event notifications c Optional If you want to e mail a copy of the event notification to another group of users click the CC check box d In the
73. programmed preset position Number PRESET long Programs the current camera position to the desired preset number Number PATTERN long Starts the pattern record mode ACK Stops the pattern record mode Number PATTERN Runs the desired pattern Number AUX ON AUX OFF Turns on off the specified auxiliary output Number M ON Assigns the selected camera to the desired view pane The active view pane is highlighted To place the KBD300A in the standard mode e Onthe KBD300A keyboard press the SHIFT button The LED indicator should not be lit C2630M B 4 08 63 64 KBD300A SHIFT MODE OPERATIONAL FEATURES The KBD300A Shift mode allows you to control certain DX8100 operation features in the Site tree from the keyboard This section describes the KBD300A Shift mode features functions The Shift mode is effective within the DX8100 Site tree You can move the cursor to select elements within the Site tree expand collapse elements and select the display division For detailed information about how to operate the KBD300A refer to KBD300A Universal Keyboard Installation Operation manual For information about configuring DX8100 data communication settings for the KBD300A refer to Setting Up the KBD300A Keyboard on page 181 The following table describes the KBD300A Shift mode operational features specific to the DX8100 server Table S KBD300A Shift M ode Operational Features Key
74. record in response to motion detection events 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 29 The Linking page is displayed 3 Click the Event Recording Link Settings tab 4 Inthe Motion Record Link Settings section do the following a Select a camera from the Motion Source Camera drop down box b Click the button for each camera you want to begin recording when motion is detected by the source camera 5 Click Apply r Motion Record Link Settings Motion Source Camera cameraor gt e Camera Name Comerst Qe ee oo aaa 60 ce 00 ea exe eo ca cs cs cx ca cs eo en ez Figure 100 Event Relay Link Settings Video Loss Link Settings Section Linking Cameras to Record in Response to Alarm Events To link multiple cameras to record in response to a single alarm input 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 29 The Linking page is displayed 3 Click the Event Recording Link Settings tab 4 Inthe Alarm Record Link Settings section do the following a Select an Alarm channel from the Alarm Channel drop down box b Click the button for each camera you want to begin recording when the source alarm is triggered 5 Click Apply Alam Record Link Settings Alarm Channel JALARMOT 3 Alarm Name hamon a Q FE eles eee ee ee eo ea ec i ewe ee ew ee ee es ew ee Linking Cameras to Record in Respons
75. recording In this case pre event motion alarm or ATM POS recording is set at the frame rate of the active record mode when the alarm motion or ATM POS event occurred For example if the DX8100 DVR is recording at 1 ips in the Normal record mode when an alarm event occurs video is recorded at 1 ips during the pre event time period After the pre event time period expires the recording rate switches to the frame rate configured for the event C2630M B 4 08 129 To schedule a record mode for one or more channels 1 From the DX8100 toolbar click ki The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click C The Schedule page is displayed 3 Click the check box for the record mode you want to apply to a channel Normal Motion Alarm ATM POS The following table describes the record modes Table AE Record Modes Mode Color Description Normal Green Continuous recording Motion Blue Recording is triggered during the selected time block if a motion event is detected in the camera s predefined motion field For information on motion detection refer to M otion Detection Setup on page 113 Alarm Red Recording is triggered during the selected time block when an alarm is activated At least one alarm must be linked to the camera for this option to work For information on alarms refer to Linking Alarm Inputs to a Camera on page 37 ATM Yellow Recording is triggered during the selected time block if an ATM
76. sections Setting Up the Standard Audio Options Setting Up the Expanded Audio Options on page 116 e Listening to Live Audio on page 116 Setting Up the Standard Audio Options By default the DX8100 supports two standard audio inputs if the expanded audio card is not installed If the expanded audio card is installed the two standard audio inputs are disabled To set up the standard audio options 1 Connect the audio input source to the DX8100 For information about connecting an audio source to the DX8100 refer to the DX8100 Installation manual 2 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 3 In the Channel Information area verify that expanded audio option is not installed This is indicated by the label Audio Not Installed r Channel Information Name Camera 1 Camera 1 Resolution 320 x 240 Frame Rate 15 fps Recording Mode Normal Recording Pre Alarm Post Alarm Linked Alarm 1 Linked Relay None Audio Not Installed Figure 91 Audio Option Not Installed 4 Inthe Audio Settings area click Advanced gt gt The AUX Audio Settings dialog box opens 5 In the AUX Audio Settings dialog box do the following a Click to deselect the Audio Disable check box b In the Input Device drop down box select Mic single channel only or Line in two standard channels c Click the Left Channel check box and in the drop down box select an associated camera d Clic
77. set to begin later than the end date and time To define the time range of the data to be backed up 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page In the Setup dialog box click 4 On the Backup schedule page click Add to add a backup schedule The Add Backup Schedule dialog box opens Add Backup Schedule E xi r Device Selection Time Setting oF ae rte Backup Statt Time Lo NEC DVO_AWND 3550A Pi D Nec DVD_RW ND 35504 Tmefiz z 25 z S HARD DISK DRIVES T ee IOIND Backup Time Range E Removable drive N NOT INSTALLED Time 12 y 28 y EEL fs z Channel amp Record Type Diles a o pauco Ge OODDagao O sale la a late Map a network drive Disconnect mapped drive Categories AI Recor ng Sea Caeni Figure 159 Add Backup Schedule Dialog Box Inthe Time Setting section to set up the time schedule do one of the following a For daily recording click Daily if it is not selected and do the following 1 Click the Time drop down boxes and select the time you want the backup schedule to start 2 Click the Backup Time Range drop down boxes and select the time you want the backup schedule to stop or b For weekly recording click Weekly if it is not selected and do the following 1 Under the Backup Start Time click the Day drop down box Select the day of the week In this case each day represents an individual backup schedul
78. sines ATM POSO1 2006 1 10 9 11 34 ATM POSO1 2006 1 1 ATMIPOSO1 2006 1 1 1 0 9 11 47 0 9 12 3 0 9 12 16 ATMIPOSO1 2006 1 Figure 55 Searching for Transaction with Exception Only Events SEARCHING FOR TRANSACTIONS THAT SATISFY SPECIFIC EXCEPTIONS The DX8100 allows you to search for and display ATM POS transactions that meet conditions as defined by one or more exceptions You can use specific exception codes to define the search criteria To use an exception to search transaction data the exception must be created before recording the transaction data If the transaction data is recorded before the exception filter is defined the exception filter will not find the data structure within the transaction data The search criteria is based on the following Channel The camera that captured the video and is linked to the ATM POS device that produced the transaction data Date time The date and time window within which the transactions were recorded Exception code The predefined transaction filter used to detect a specific data structure within the ATM POS transaction data To search for transactions that meet specific exceptions 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click ak 2 On the Search control click O The POS search view is displayed 3 To select a ATM POS device do one of the following Inthe DX8100 Site tree click a camera that is linked to the ATM POS device By default the name of the AT
79. speed Press the minus key once or more times to decrease the pan tilt speed C2630M B 4 08 PTZ PRESETS A preset is a user defined camera position using PTZ and focus commands the camera s auto focus option must be turned off Only cameras that support positioning and programming using D P Coaxitron or supported third party protocols can use this feature The DX8100 Series DVR can address up to 150 PTZ presets 1 150 Preset 95 is reserved for remote camera setup and preset 99 is reserved for camera autoscan mode The PTZ controls are hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the PTZ controls To switch between the standard and extended view mode From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt Extended View For information on changing view modes refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 28 The following PTZ operating guidelines must be observed To program or clear presets preset tours and patterns the icon must be engaged To activate presets tours and patterns the icon must be disengaged This section describes how to program activate and clear presets and includes the following topics Programming a Preset Activating a Preset on page 52 Clearing a Preset on page 53 PROGRAM MING A PRESET This section describes how to program a preset The following PTZ operating guidelines apply Clicking the icon places DX8100 in PTZ pro
80. the DX8100 Setup Dialog Box The following table describes the parts of the Setup dialog box Table AC Parts of the DX8100 Setup Dialog Box Item Button Part Description 11 Camera Click the Camera icon to configure cameras Available options are PTZ functions motion detection picture adjustment audio and video loss detection settings Linking Click the Linking icon to configure relays and alarms associate relays and alarms with cameras link relays to alarms and link cameras to other cameras Schedule Click the Schedule icon to build custom recording schedules set image resolution frame rate and image quality and configure relay settings O Network Click the Network icon to set up the network configuration and communication port settings O s Backup Click the Backup icon to configure and perform backups O Ca User Click the User icon to add delete or change user accounts O Site Click the Site Setup icon to add delete and configure additional DX8100 Series DVRs System Click the System icon to set up additional system options O Ext Monitor Click the Ext M onitor icon to configure an additional display monitor This icon appears only if the optional display card has been installed Notification Click the Notification icon to configure emergency agent and e mail notification options C2630M B 4 08 CAMERA SETUP Depending on your system s cu
81. the DX8100 application window do the following a Assign a camera to a view pane b Assign the ATM POS device to the camera designated to record ATM POS events 4 Verify the following a The POS record indicator is yellow and flashing b The ATM POS record symbol flashes blue during an ATM POS event c The ATM POS events are displayed yellow in the time line ATM POS 102519 ATM POS 102510 ATM POS 10 2453 ATM POS 10 24 51 ATM POS 102442 11 00 ny 1 4 i TA reas MEN ATM POS 102434 0 ATM POS 102405 zl O T Feo 01 2006 10 27 03 AM Ready hi p Admn Total recorded 38 0 12 Hu 29 M Figure 157 Recording ATM POS Transaction SETTING UP THE KBD300A KEYBOARD The KBD300A allows you to operate certain DX8100 live view display functions and control camera PTZ operations from a keyboard rather than a mouse W hen connected to the DX8100 server the KBD300A supports two modes standard and shift mode Shift mode is entered by pressing the Shift button and is indicated by a lit Shift button LED For information about how to operate the KBD300A refer to the KBD300A universal keyboard Installation Operation manual For information about using the KBD300A refer to Using the KBD300A Keyboard on page 63 In summary the steps required to set up the KBD300A for operation are as follows e Connect the KBD300A to the DX8100 For information about connecting the KBD300A to the DX8100 refer to the DX8100
82. the PTZ OSD Menu controls refer to Using the PTZ OSD M enu Control on page 55 Keypad controls For information on using the keypad controls refer to Accessing a Remote Camera Programming M enu Keyboard keys For information on using the keyboard keys refer to Using PC Keyboard Shortcuts to Operate PTZ and Lens Functions on page 50 The following procedure instructs you to use the PTZ OSD M enu control to navigate the remote camera programming menu To access a programming menu for a remote camera 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click EX 2 Drag a remote camera from the Site tree onto a view panel For certain camera models you can also select preset number 95 from the keypad to access remote setup mode C2630M B 4 08 3 To access remote camera setup mode do one of the following e On the DX8100 keypad click from the keypad Click ES 9 5 and Preset from the PTZ keypad Figure 30 PTZ Control Panel 4 To navigate up and down through camera menu choices do one of the following Use the PTZ OSD Menu controls Use the on screen PTZ controls or the focus and focus buttons 5 To select an option from the camera s on screen menu do one of the following e On the PTZ OSD Menu click Enter e Onthe keypad click the iris button 6 Click the iris button to cancel an option or select the Exit command You can also use the on screen PTZ controls with your mouse to navigate through camera menus
83. the Site tree Select a recording mode from one of the following options Normal Motion Alarm ATM POS In the Camera Settings section click Frame Rate Configuration The Frame Rate Configuration dialog box opens Adjust the parameters in the camera settings section Click OK C2630M B 4 08 8 Click Apply pu bo H eo le Camera 1 Settings Figure 119 Custom Camera Settings Panel Examples of Custom Camera Settings The DX8100 allows you to configure customized camera settings for the following recording modes Normal Motion Alarm ATM POS The following figure shows camera settings for the supported modes Normal Camera 9 Settings Image Resolution 320 X 240 Frame Rate so Images Second Image Quality NORMAL X Instant Recording Enable X Frame Rate Configuration Configure Relays C2630M B 4 08 Motion Image Resolution fazo 240 Frame Rate During Motion so Images Second Pre Motion Frame Rate E Images Second ba Pre Motion Image Quality BEST X Motion Image Quality BEST X Pre Motion 30 Seconds Post Motion 60 Seconds X Camera 9 Settings Alarm ATM POS Camera 9 Settings Camera 9 Settings Image Resolution Image Resolution 320 240 ezo 2240 Frame Rate During Alarm Frame Rate During Event feo Images Second 30 Images Second Pre Alarm Frame Rate Pre Event Fram
84. the delete action Assigning an Exception to An ATM POS Device To assign an exception to an ATM POS device 1 2 3 8 In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed In the Communication Port drop down box select a port Port 1 to Port 4 The device mode option is not available for COM 1 In the selected device drop down box select an ATM POS device In the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration page is displayed Click the Advanced tab In the ATM POS Name drop down box select an ATM POS device In the Exception Table click the ID box of the exception you want to assign to the ATM POS device Do one of the following e Click OK to accept the changes and exit the Exceptions dialog box C2630M B 4 08 e Click Cancel to exit the Exception dialog box and not save the changes ATM POS Name taTm POS01JaTM POs018 y r Exception Table Any field containing values must all g TEE Name Effect Add be found or satisfied before a data sae DEFINE Don t Show device exception is generated Oo m di Each data device can trigger the Delete Dx8000 to record at a special rate and for a special length of time Figure 155 Assigning an Exception to an ATM POS Device Verifying the ATM POS Communication Connection To verify that the ATM POS connection is working correctly 1 2 3 C2630M B 4 08 In the Network page
85. the monitor output e Alarm input Motion detection 4 Set the dwell time an event will be allowed to override the screen 1 60 seconds 5 Click Apply USING THE EXTERNAL MONITOR OPTION To assign a sequence profile to an external analog monitor 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click 2 On the DX8100 toolbar click The External M onitor drop down menu is displayed 3 Select a profile from the External M onitor drop down menu EMERGENCY NOTIFICATION SETUP The Emergency Agent Notification alerts selected clients to motion alarm and video loss events detected by DX8100 server sites When a motion alarm or video loss event is triggered a pop up window opens on the monitor of the remote site client The window displays one or more still images taken during the event Users with Power User access and higher can configure the emergency agent notification system The first step in the setup process requires that clients be added to the emergency agent notification list To complete this step you must provide a valid name and the IP address of each client PC After clients have been added they can be linked to one or more cameras Finally the amount of time a server sends images after an event occurs and the interval between sending each image must be set NOTE Before configuring the Emergency Agent Notification make sure the Emergency Agent Client utility is installed on one or more client PCs For information on installing t
86. the system time passes 3 00 p m If the user changes the system time from the Windows Control Panel the data recording protection feature described above is defeated resulting in impairment of the recording time line Without notice previously recorded data can be overwritten by new data To set the system time 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YA The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click C The System page is displayed 3 In the Date Time Setup section do the following a Inthe Date Time drop down box select the current month day and year b Select the current time WARNING Attempting to set the system clock to a time earlier than the current system time will require that you either perform one of two options delete all data recorded between the current time and the new time or do not delete previously recorded data and begin recording only after the system time has passed the recorded time One exception to this rule involves Daylight Saving Time For more information refer to the Working with Standard and Daylight Saving Time on page 208 c Click Update d In the Time zone drop down box select the correct time zone e Click Update C2630M B 4 08 207 208 4 Click Apply Date Time Setup Date Time Wednesday August 03 2005 X 3 40 03 PM a Update Time zone GMT 08 00 Pacific Time US Canada Tijuana Y Update Figure 173 System Setup Time Working with Standard and Dayligh
87. this type of event Load profile Motion detection Mation alarm override dwell Manual Camera W Default Panel Division Selec Drag and Drop cameras fron D Min 30 Sec Ch 1 Profile name Building 1 OK Ch 3 Ch4 Sequence No 2 o Y Min 1 J Sec Load Save Delete Apply Override monitor output in response to this type of event alarm inpft y Motion alarm override dwell time 1 E 1 60 Seconds Figure 177 Loading a Mapping Sequence Modifying a Sequence Instance in the List To modify a sequence instance in the list 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click The External Output page is displayed 3 In the Manual Camera M apping M ode section do the following a Click the button if it is not selected to select the M anual Camera M apping mode b Click one of the sequence instances from the list C2630M B 4 08 213 2 o D Select a screen division Drag cameras from the Site tree onto each view panel until all panels have been assigned a camera From the M in and Sec drop down boxes select the amount of time the sequence instance will remain on the monitor Click M odify Click Save The Save dialog box open Select an existing profile or enter a new profile name under which to save the sequence list Click OK Click Apply Click Apply in the External
88. today 502 C02 Camera 2 Figure 42 Date Selection Drop Down Box UNDERSTANDING INSTANT PLAYBACK The DX8100 s ability to perform instant playback of video is limited by a one minute delay interval The DX8100 has a built in latency of approximately one minute between the time that video is captured and when it is written to the hard disk This delay exists to ensure that video is accurately stored and the DVR s database is updated correctly The delay interval is not affected if the DX8100 is in the alarm or motion record mode In this case the pre alarm or pre motion time period does not become a factor in determining the delay interval To initiate an instant playback On the playback control click Instant Playback The timeline is zoomed to the last two or three minutes of data The user has the ability to view video that is just recorded This video image resides in memory and has not yet been stored on the hard drive The color of the timeline will be green This is because the system cannot tell what the data characteristic is while the data resides in memory For example if this data is recorded from a camera configured to monitor motion and there is no motion activity the data will not be stored on the hard disk drive C2630M B 4 08 69 PLAYING BACK VIDEO BY EVENT Users with playback access rights Standard User by default and higher can search video by events such as motion detection or alarm activation A
89. toolbar click ki The DX8100 setup screen is displayed 2 Click amp The backup configuration screen is displayed 3 In the Backup schedule table click the backup schedule you want to delete 4 Click Delete 5 Click Apply INITIATING AN INSTANT BACKUP SCHEDULE The DX8100 allows you to schedule an instant backup time setting options are displayed when you select instant backup In this case you are given quick access to select the backup device day and time channel record type and recording category Once you establish the backup schedule you can view the estimated backup size before starting the actual backup process The DX8100 provides initial default settings You can save time by accepting the following defaults Backup time range The current day and time you initiated the instant backup routine Channel record type All channels Categories All Recording To perform an instant backup 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click 94 The DX8100 setup screen is displayed 2 Click amp The backup configuration screen is displayed 3 In the Backup page do the following a Click Instant Backup The Backup Now dialog box opens b Click the selection check box for the device you want to receive the instant backup data 4 Do one of the following a To accept backup schedule options 1 Click Estimated Backup Size The Estimated Backup Size dialog box opens displaying backup details 2 Read the backup i
90. vent Camera03 d CameraD4 No Link Camera05 No Link Y No Link CameraQ6 No Link Y No Link CameraD No Link Y No Link Camera08 No Link Y No Link To activate combo box you should link lt Relay gt with lt Wideo Loss gt in the linking setup mes Figure 130 Linking Relays to Video Loss 150 C2630M B 4 08 The following table describes the available options Table AN Video Loss Activated Relay Settings Option Result Disable Relay will not activate when a video loss event occurs Follow Event Relay will activate at the exact moment the video loss event happens 1 3 5 10 15 and 20 Seconds Sets the amount of time the relay will remain active afterthe video loss event occurs SETTING UP NETWORK PROPERTIES The DX8100 networking capability allows you to network up to five DX8100s You can configure such networking options as follows e Configuring the DX8100 for Network Access Setting Up DHCP Setting Up a Static IP Address Setting Up TCP IP and Bandwidth Throttle Setting Up DNS WINS e Working with Time Synchronization on page 156 Setting Up COM 1 Port Properties This section describes how to set up DX8100 network communication and includes the following topics Configuring the DX8100 for Network Access on page 151 Setting Up TCP IP and Bandwidth Throttle on page 153 e Working with M ulticasting on page 154 Accessing Network Information on page 155 e Setting U
91. you want to update To update the local DVR select site name of your system from the Select Server list Refer to the Select Server dialog box on the left in the following figure C2630M B 4 08 231 To update a remote DVR select its site name from the Select Server list and then click Connect Refer to the Select Server dialog box on the right in the following figure selectServer A select Server Server Information Server Information ServerName DX8000 Building 7 Server Name local DYR IP Adress Local System IPAdress 169 254 54 214 Current Status Local System upgrade available Current Status Off line m Select to Server List m Select to Server List i DX8000 Building 7 DX8000 Building 3 Loading Dock rd DX000 Building 3 Front Office i DX8000 Building 3 Lobby i DX8000 Lab A DX8000 Lab B 2 DX8000 Parking Lot C Dx8000 Building 7 Fra DX8000 Building 3 Loading Dock Pr DX000 Building 3 Front Office DX8000 Building 3 Lobby DX8000 Lab A i DX8000 Lab B i DX8000 Parking Lot C Connect Back Nert Exit Figure 191 Selecting the Local DVR left and Remote DVR right Update 8 Click Next and wait for the upgrade utility to copy the necessary files to the selected DVR 9 Atthe completion of the update process a dialog box will appear prompting you to update another server if desired The options are as follows ClickYes to se
92. 0 menu bar click Favorite gt Organize Favorites 3 4 5 6 C2630M B 4 08 The Organize Favorites dialog box opens A list of the current favorites and folders is displayed in the favorites area oramzerarones jj x pios FB Building 6 Day shift Create Folder Rename Move to Folder Delete fA Building 6 Evening Shift Folder amp File Note Figure 13 Organize Favorites Dialog Box and List of Favorites Folders In the favorites area click a favorite Click M ove to Folder The M ove to Folder dialog box opens Move to Folder E He Favorites Building 6 Camera Views Building 6 Camera Views Figure 14 Move to Folders Dialog Box Select a destination folder Click OK The favorite is moved under the destination folder 43 LIVE VIEW ON SCREEN DISPLAY OSD The DX8100 OSD consists of camera and site information that is superimposed on each view pane Each display item in the OSD can be customized for both live and playback viewing The following figure shows the Live View OSD pane a PTZ G Figure 15 Live View OSD Pane The following table describes the parts of the Live View OSD pane Table N Parts of the Live View OSD Pane Item Part Description Q PT Indicates that the PTZ control is enabled G mps lll is enabled The DX8100 compresses audio data to save space In this y not be of the same quality as liv
93. 0 view panel to the default Camera page Excluding the video visible through the Camera page M otion Zone window you cannot see video from any of the other setup pages You must exit the Setup dialog box to access the DX8100 functions in the main window The following figure shows the parts of the Setup dialog box Motion Zone Name Camera 1 Zonet ho Channel Information Camera 1 Resolution 320 x 240 Frame Rate 1 fps Recording Mode Normal Recording Pre Alarm PostAlarm Linked Alarm 1 Linked Relay None Audio Installed Enable 110 r Camera Properties r Motion Detection Selected Channel Cameradr I Disable Number of Blocks H 20 20 Camera Name Camera 1 Sensitivity 4 50 Camera Security ll Protocol PELCO C PTZ Locking Auto timeout 10 Sec PTZ Adjustment Test Pant PanR Titu TitD p Audio Settings i EE E Audio Channel I Disable ip Swi None z Vi PA wre r Video Loss Detection r Picture Adjustment Video Loss M Loss of synchronization Bright n A Civenkvane I Low level of video Pa O a 0 Ta 0 Low Levelof Vileo Detection Oca Fave Contrast r 3 se Time MAH end Time Bana i pe ER Apply to All Cameras 127 0 128 0 Y Protocol Y Motion Detection Saturation Camera Security Audio Settings 127 0 128 0 gt Picture Adjustment F Video Loss Default Apply to All Cameras D Cancel Apply Figure 85 Parts of
94. 00 site User Log Out Logs you out of the DX8100 site Connect Disconnect 2 Camera Expands and collapses the Camera tree o Channel information Displays icons that represent the configuration of the camera Recording mode o Recording resolution e Recording frame rate Recording image quality 4 Alarm Expands and collapses the Alarm tree ATM POS Expands and collapses the ATM POS tree Q 2 O F Relay Expands and collapses the Relay tree Right clicking a relay opens a shortcut menu that provides the following commands ON Allows you to turn on the relay OFF Allows you to turn off the relay O 2 Remote site Expands and collapses the remote DX8100 site Right clicking the remote site name opens a shortcut menu that provides the following commands User Log In Opens the User Log In dialog box where you enter your user name and password to log into the remote DX8100 site User Log Out Logs you out of the remote DX8100 site Connect Allows you to connect to the remote site Disconnect Allows you to disconnect from the remote site This section describes how to work with the Site tree and includes the following topics e Assigning Cameras to View Panes on page 36 e Setting Up Links on page 37 Removing Links on page 39 ASSIGNING CAMERAS TO VIEW PANES The DX8100 provides view panes that are organized into view panels The DX8100 includ
95. 07 End os 2007 FF Finish on End Date Figure 123 Setting Up DX8100 for Maximum IPS Recording 7 Click the Frame Rate configuration button The Frame Rate Configuration screen is displayed Frame Rate Configuration C Alam C ATM POS 1 fas2x240 7 1 1Ps A 704x240 y 2 IPs HO foxa x ors A om ates A ora ors CA 704x240 21PS A roman ors A formos oe ora rs A 704x240 y 11PS A orm ops wi A forn ours an2 A foan 7 irs cama LAA 704x240 11PS ema E formos cs foka oles me y frnaxaan y 01PS Figure 124 Frame Rate Configuration Screen C2630M B 4 08 145 8 Do the following a Using the ALL frame rate settings slider set the frame rate to 30 ips The recording rate for each enabled camera is changed to 30 ips b For the ALL resolution setting from the drop down box select 704 x 480 from the drop down box The resolution for each enabled camera is set to 704 x 480 c Click OK 9 Click Apply at the Schedule page and verify that each enabled camera listed in the site tree is configured to record at 30 ips at 4CIF Eh Dx8100 E Camera 1 Motion Record Alarm Record 11 ATMIPOS Reco Ee Camera 5 5 Normal Record Motion Record Alarm Record 113 ATM POS Reco E Camera 9 5 Normal Record Motion Record Alarm Record 11 ATM POS Reco Ee Camera 13 gt Camera 1 Settings Image Resolution rex 400 Frame Rate 30
96. 13 2004 9 DVD R RW O3 10132004 13 00 00 10 13 2004 E Not installed O4 10132004 14 00 00 10 13 2004 Hard disk drives O5 10132004 16 00 00 1013 2004 Remote dive JE 10132004 17 00 00 1013 2004 O a 10 0 1 14 public Susers Removal drive I Enable deinterlacing filter Figure 74 Renaming Export Time Ranges SELECTING THE EXPORT FORMAT O la gt r Export Format E avi C ASF C Native Refresh reate folder Y Audio Record IV Real Time Map NetDrw Disconnect NetDry 08 02 00 10 16 00 13 02 00 14 41 06 16 05 00 17 05 00 File Name Security Lobby C BMP chO1 101304_080000_ 101304 chO1 101304_101500_ 101304 ch01 101304_130000__101304 chO1 101304_140000_ 101304 ch01 101304_160000__101304 Security Lobby Apply e pply i JPEG 2 coc _ The DX8100 allows you to select the export format The following table shows the available export formats NOTE The computer must meet the recommended remote client PC system requirements to play back video including recorded audio exported in the native AVI and ASF formats Refer to Recommended System Requirements in the DX8100 Series Client Application Software Operation Configuration manual C2631M for more information Native format W hen exporting video in the native format the DX8100 embeds a digital watermark in the video stream for the purpose of authentication Watermarking ensures that
97. 142004 0900 00 10 14 2004 10 00 00 NorhEntance E DVD R RW O3 10442004 11 3018 10442004 1200 18 East Entrance gt o ee O4 10142004 140018 10 14 2004 15 00 18 South Entrance Bree adana OS 1044 2004 17 00 18 1014 2004 18 00 18 West Entrance E Remote drive x Not installed 2 6 Removal drive Oe 10 14 2004 20 00 18 10 14 2004 22 00 18 Lobby on Delete Item File Name Apply r Export Format E avi C ASF C Native BMP C JPEG C TIF Refresh Create folder IV Audio Record IV Real Time Image Count 13 Interval Continuous gt Map NetDrw Disconnect NetDrv BE tae Export Cancel Figure 70 Export Video Dialog Box DISCONNECTING A NETW ORK DRIVE To disconnect a network drive 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click ST The DX8100 is in the Search mode 2 Click g The Export Video dialog box opens 3 Click Disconnect NetDrv The Disconnect Network Drive dialog box opens 4 Select the network drive that you want to disconnect 5 Click OK The drive is disconnected and removed from the Export Video dialog box Device area C2630M B 4 08 PERFORMING THE EXPORT This section describes how to export data and includes the following topics e Starting an Export Process Changing a Bookmarked Time Range on page 100 e Assigning a Custom Export Video File Name on page 101 e Selecting the Export Format on page 102 e Exporting a Sequence of Still Images on page 103 e Finalizing an
98. 210 Accessing the External M onitor Setup ccc cece cece EEEE 210 Setting Up Camera Mapping det o dees A NUENA PELEA EEA EI TAER duis 210 C nfig ring Display OVeMidG yei fara aenn AR A Ad EAE A E AA 215 Using the Extemal Monitor Option zase ros iio aa a ia E dd e ands 216 EmergencyN otification Setup La AA At a AAA AAA ia dh 216 Accessing the Emergency Agent Notification Setup 00cooocococo ccoo teen rere rr rr 216 Adding Client Emergency Agents to be Notified oo icici cece cece tener etree rr rr 217 Changing Client Emergency Agent Properties cic e cece cece o rere nee etre dere eee eet een e ene eng 217 Deleting Clients from the Notification List 100000 ooo eect EEEE 217 Linking Cameras to Client Emergency Agents 0 0 cic i cece crete rene rr rr 218 Setting Server Event Transmission Time 0 0 ccc cece EEEE 218 Emergency E M all Notification Setups nas conc ad A a a ls ats dob dds etd a aa REM ic laa 218 Accessing the Emergency E mail Notification Setup 0 cece cette ee ete eer rr rr 219 Configuring Emergency E mail Notification 0 cic cece cee tere ener etree eee denn eee renee d enn E nrg 219 Setting Up the Time Period omnia nos Lilas Vesta a nas al des Mba ddd Vedat dsd Lada 221 Setting Up E Mail Notification GroupS 0 cece cece reece rere ener rr 223 Sending Email Notifications cti at a nda 228 Administering and Maintaining the DX8100 0 0 cece cece creer rr 230 Updating the DX8100 Server and Client Applicatio
99. 3 C2630M B 4 08 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click 29 The Linking page is displayed Click the Event PTZ Link Settings tab In the Alarm Record Link Settings section do the following a Select an alarm from the Alarm Channel drop down box b In the Linked PTZ Setting section select a camera to be linked from the Linked Camera Channel drop down box This camera will change PTZ position in response to an alarm input detected by the source alarm 125 5 To select a PTZ preset or pattern for the linked camera in the Linked PTZ Setting section do one of the following To force the linked camera to move to a PTZ preset in response to an alarm input detected by the source camera 1 Click the Linked Camera Preset button to select this option 2 Inthe Preset drop down box select a PTZ preset 1 150 To force a PTZ pattern to be activated in response to alarm input detected by the source camera 1 Click the Linked Camera Pattern button to select this option 2 In the Pattern drop down box select a PTZ pattern 1 4 to be activated on the camera The selected camera must support PTZ functions and at least one PTZ preset pattern must be defined for this function to work 6 Click Apply Linked PTZ Setting Lied Caneel 7 Linked Camera Preset Not in use C Linked Camera Pattern Not Alarm Record Link Settings i Alarm Channel facaamor sy Alarm
100. 33 IP Configuration Information Box SETTING UP DNS WINS The DX8100 allows you to set up DNS or WINS services if your network supports these services Access the Network page to configure DX8100 DNS WINS services For information on accessing the Network page refer to Setting Up DX8100 Network Access on page 151 To set up DNS WINS 1 In the Network page click the DNS WINS tab The DNS WINS page is displayed 2 Doone of the following e Ifyou are using dynamic IP addressing through a DHCP server click the Obtain DNS WINS info from DHCP check box e Ifyouare using static IP addressing provide the following information in the appropriate fields This information can be obtained from your network administrator 1 Primary DNS server IP address 2 Secondary DNS server IP address 3 Primary WINS server IP address 4 Secondary WINS server IP address 3 Click Apply to update the configuration C2630M B 4 08 155 WORKING WITH TIME SYNCHRONIZATION The DX8100 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP which allows the DX8100 to access Network Time Protocol NTP servers to synchronize DX8100 clocks The DX8100 allows you to manually or automatically synchronize its time to a NTP time server Additionally the DX8100 server can provide time synchronization for the other DX8100 network There can be only one NTP time server in the DX8100 network This section describes how to synchronize the DX8100 clock and is organ
101. 5 Admin IP Address is 10 80 2254 01 29 2008 16 56 42 Admin Channel 3 Video Loss 01 29 2008 16 52 00 Admin Channel 6 Video Loss 01 29 2008 16 52 00 Admin Channel 8 Video Loss 01 29 2008 16 47 21 Admin Channel 4 Video Loss 01 29 2008 16 47 21 Admin Channel 7 Video Loss 01 29 2008 16 39 50 Admin Channel 5 Video Loss 01 29 2008 16 13 04 Admin Channel 8 Video Recovery 01 29 2008 16 13 04 Admin Channel 6 Video Recovery 01 29 2008 16 13 00 Admin Channel 6 Video Loss 01 29 2008 16 13 00 Admin Channel 8 Video Loss 01 29 2008 16 12 59 Admin Channel 8 Video Recovery Figure 80 User ID Log Events _C2630M B The next figure shows the log events that occurred for System On Off System Off Das Time user 01 29 2008 16 04 38 Guest 01 29 2008 16 01 59 Admin 01 28 2008 06 57 15 Guest 01 28 2008 06 31 28 Admin 01 28 2008 00 04 27 Guest 01 28 2008 00 01 00 Admin Description A scheduled reboot was performed Figure 81 System On Off Log Events 7 To save the log search results to a file do the following a Click Save As The DX8100 Save As Log Info dialog box opens b Select a destination folder and then type the name of the file c Click Save The file is saved 8 Do one of the following To remain in the Log View dialog box and run another report click Clear Toexitthe Log View dialog box cl ick OK VIEWING SYSTEM HEALTH STATUS The system health feature allows you to view the health status and configure
102. 8 The following table describes the recording indicators Table O Recording Indicators Item Icon Description 1 REC Indicates camera recording mode and status A blinking REC indicator signifies event recording Green indicates normal recording Blue indicates motion recording Red indicates alarm recording e Yellow indicates ATM POS recording Purple indicates video loss recording Black on white background indicates instant recording O Instant Recording Starts stops instant recording if enabled Changes from silver to blue to indicate that instant recording is activated This section describes how to start and stop instant recording and includes the following topics Starting Instant Recording Stopping Instant Recording Starting Instant Recording To start instant recording e Double click the Instant Recording icon located in the lower right corner of the view pane The Instant Recording icon changes from silver to blue indicating that instant recording is activated If video recording is enabled verify that REC is black and highlighted white If video recording is not enabled REC is not displayed or will show another recording mode color Stopping Instant Recording To deactivate instant recording e Inthe view pane double click the Instant Recording icon The instant recording icon changes from blue to silver indicating that instant recording is de activated OPER
103. 8100 main menu go to File gt User Log in The User Log in dialog box opens 2 Enter a valid user name in the User Name field and a valid password in the Password field 3 Click OK LOGGING OUT OF THE LOCAL DX8100 Logging out of the local or a remote DVR does not disconnect you from that system Logging out will return you to the Guest account To disconnect from a remote server refer to Disconnecting from a Remote Site on page 18 To log the current user out of the system and return to the Guest account e ClickFile gt User Log out You can also log out of a local or remote DVR by right clicking its site name from the Site tree and then selecting User Log Out from the quick menu C2630M B 4 08 17 EXITING TO THE WINDOWS OPERATING SYSTEM You must have Administrator user access to exit to Windows Refer to Definition of User Access Levels on page 193 for information on users security levels You must have a Windows password to exit to the Windows operating system For information on the Windows default password refer to the Important Security Information for System Administrators guide To exit the DX8100 application and log into the Windows operating system 1 From the DX8100 menu bar choose File gt Exit The Shut down dialog box opens 2 Click Exit to Windows 3 Click OK The Log On to Windows dialog box opens 4 Enter the Windows password and then click OK The system logs you into the Windows operating system
104. 97 static IP addressed adding 197 remote sites overview 197 resolution resolution value setting for recording 142 screen 24 RS 232 162 RS 422 RS 485 162 163 S schedule accessing 128 all record modes clearing schedule 131 clearing a recording schedule 131 copying attributes 132 135 custom settings 129 deleting a schedule 137 editing a profile 136 individual days scheduling 132 multi day schedule creating 133 recordmode 128 settingup 129 single day creating 134 types of 129 yearly recording schedule creating 132 screen resolution 24 search mode 27 sharing of time range search 75 sensitivity motion 113 server sites connecting to DX8000 server sites 197 server e mail 218 Setup dialog box 109 setup mode accessing 109 alarm properties setting up 120 See also alarm inputs camera setup 111 138 See also camera commands listing of 110 Backup Camera Ext M onitor Linking Netw ork Notification Schedule Site System User 241 data backup 184 Ext monitor setup 210 how to open Setup dialog box 27 motion sensitivity setting 113 multiple cameras alarm events linking cameras to record 123 ATM POS events linking cameras to record 123 motion events linking cameras to record 123 video loss events linking cameras to record 124 network properties accessing DX8000 network configuration details 155 base port setting up 153 DHCP setting up 152 DNS or WINS services setting up 155 overview 151 port and device
105. A Geena ee Abe wen daa ods 164 Setting Up the KBD300A Keyboard si i iirrainn ence ied dice gis tine ee ele nog Sewn as antes Diad taeun Bann date ed 181 Installing or Updating Device Protocols 0 ice ect ono 183 Data Backup A A Ala qablylen ER Ea dubiodn dy iae a ante ohana gata ROe tae Ei 184 C2630M B 4 08 5 Accessing the Backup Configuration Page 0c cocco nr rr rr 185 Adding a Backup Schedules sa rasnita sana A A A dd Bo a T 186 Editing an Existing Backup Schedule 0000oooocco ccoo ccoo rr 187 Deleting an Existing Backup Schedule 00 0 rr 188 Initiating an Instant Backup Schedule siii todo abria de dasha dd ai do 188 Mapping a Network Devica cc li e a i a da acme bie male eae 189 Disconnecting from a Network Drive oo cic ec ener rr 189 Selecting Backuip M Edi DEVICE vir a a AS EAE Ai edad 190 Viewing Backed UpVid OGsi ssid corr a ds 190 US rico ii a A o A AA E ig Ge A A A Er cee 190 Accessing the USer A A aa DEn AA nN T EDE PERAE Ba adds DE E EET EADAE Beate DEN 190 B lltin User ACCOUNTS cc A a AAA Yen bane oe Moy NAA 192 Definition of User Access Levels oo cc cece cece nee e E CRETE EERE CE EEE EE a a 193 Definition of Camera Security Access oc 193 Modifying UserAccess Right cto iaa o ii enced akan ai Bicone ena 193 Adding New Users ci a a oo A A OETA A en cnn ee wus 194 Modifying User Properties coria ied yea dae atin cae Stave ete ek epee ets beck Meera i fear een hones ite 195 Changing User PASSW OTAS niidi c
106. ATING THE ON SCREEN PTZ CONTROLS Users with PTZ access rights Standard User by default and higher can operate PTZ lens functions of cameras that support such features PTZ functions can be controlled on the screen in Live mode using the mouse PTZ control is available for cameras that support PTZ functions using Pelco s P D or Coaxitron protocols It is also available for supported third party dome cameras For more information about configuring PTZ ports refer to Setting Up COM 1 Port Properties on page 163 and Setting Up RS 422 RS 485 Communication Port Properties on page 163 In addition the PTZ option must be enabled and a protocol must be assigned to the camera channel For more information refer to Camera Setup on page 111 This section describes how to use the PTZ controls and includes the following topics e Operating the PTZ Controls e Adjusting the Camera Lens on page 49 e Adjusting the Camera Zoom on page 49 Using PC Keyboard Shortcuts to Operate PTZ and Lens Functions on page 50 C2630M B 4 08 47 48 OPERATING THE PTZ CONTROLS To operate the on screen PTZ controls 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click 4 2 Select a PTZ enabled camera from the Site tree 3 Place the mouse pointer in the middle of the camera s view pane The mouse pointer will change to a black cross when on screen PTZ control is available Figure 18 On Screen PTZ Control 4 Click and hold the left mouse button and then drag the mou
107. Audio Settings 127 0 128 0 IV Picture Adjustment IV Video Loss Default Apply to All Cameras Cancel Apply Figure 86 Camera Page C2630M B 4 08 MOTION DETECTION SETUP Up to five motion detection profiles can be defined for each camera When the DX8100 is set to record motion detection any motion sensed in the selected zone will be recorded on that channel Motion detection can also be used to trigger relays PTZ presets and the recording of multiple cameras Refer to Schedule Setup on page 128 and Link Setup on page 118 for more information To define motion detection profiles for the selected camera 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 2 To set up the motion grid do the following a Select the motion zone 1 5 from the drop down box b Click the Hide Show button to either hide or display the motion grid c Move the Number of Blocks slider to change the grid size of the motion overlay 3 Define the area for motion detection as follows a Click Clear All to remove the currently defined motion detection area b Click Select All to enable motion detection for the entire viewable area c Hold down the left mouse button and drag to select areas d Hold down the right mouse button and drag to deselect areas 4 Inthe Motion Detection section move the Sensitivity slider to adjust motion sensitivity M oving the slider to the left decreases the sensitivity mov
108. B FLASH DRIVE The DX8100 supports both USB 1 1 and USB 2 0 flash drives To ensure data is not lost or corrupted when exporting data to a USB flash drive follow the steps listed in Removing a USB Flash Drive on page 96 This section describes how to insert and remove a USB device and includes the following topics e Installing a USB Flash Drive on page 96 Removing a USB Flash Drive on page 96 C2630M B 4 08 95 96 INSTALLING A USB FLASH DRIVE This section describes how to install a USB flash drive To install a USB flash drive into the DX8100 1 2 Insert the USB drive into the USB 2 0 port on the DVRS front panel POWER HDD e o Figure 68 Installing a USB flash drive Wait five seconds while the DX8100 recognizes and automatically installs the device REM OVING A USB FLASH DRIVE You can remove a USB device within the DX8100 environment In this case you do not have to exit to the Windows environment A WARNING Improperly removing a USB drive can cause data to be lost or corrupted To remove the USB flash drive from the DX8100 1 2 3 4 5 Click gt File Unplug Eject Hardware The Unplug or Eject Hardware dialog box opens Select the USB flash drive in the Hardware devices list Click Stop The Stop a Hardware device dialog box opens Select the USB device Click OK Wait for the DX8100 to respond with a message stating that it is safe to remove the USB device from the DX8100 Removing
109. BOX Sees ici ci a AA AAA ARA Eva NEI E A eE Ritka 70 Playback Digital Zoon Contos iendane ar dd dara a a he a aE AAA cinta Edad 71 ZOOM MUSA MUS a AA A Mebane yee A venta ied sawn AAS 72 ZooM QUE USING MOUSE te Sista Blea a dd AS a Ie 72 Panning Zoomed Video With the MOUSE cocco teen ten eee rr EEE EEE EEE H EEE EEE EES 23 DX8100 DVR Search Mode WindOW chain ia da e da ibid 74 DX8100 DVR Index Search Screens nirre raai add Mv edeat el Sevlaa odes ha daa ea es devsasiedevraded das DETA 71 DX8100 DVR Thumbnail SearchScre n i e cnore iin be ceiied aig e T deans Geom coud eves ve dan deren dc 78 POS Search View se eit corro eit ee coved qe eee ee eA NODE Alera eG nae Jobe deena Led ia Onn 79 POS Transaction Search by Device Name coca de A ered a DAL e Mogens e abla 82 Display a POS Transaction Search by Device Name aaiue 83 Searching an POS Event by Transaction Number cocco EEEE 84 Searching for Transaction with Exception Only Events 0 0 0c cect eect ete reece rete eer eee eset e entre ered ener e ener 85 Transactions that Satisfy Specific Exception Filters 0 cece cece teeter etree eens etree nese eerste ebb etn eneennenns 86 Transactions that Contain a Unique Line Item 0 cocco eet ere rr 87 Searching Transactions by Action Code Ere ete enn ttt nner 88 PiX Car CHEM nd di le A alia A Dative la aaa ica died dado eel aoe 89 7 121 Thumbnail Images Marking Pixel Changes cece cece cece reer rr 90 Bookmark C
110. Camera J Linking TF Schedule User T Monitor J Emergency T Port TT Backup TT Site Setup F osb TF ATM POS FT Select All Figure 167 Exporting DVR Settings Using the Edit Menu to Perform an Export To save current DVR settings 1 From the DX8100 menu bar choose Edit gt Export Setup The DX8100 Setup File Export Dialog box opens Select the folder in which you want to save the settings file Click the Up button to move up a level in the folder hierarchy Enter a file name in the space provided Click Save WORKING WITH THE IM PORT FEATURE This sections describes how to import DX8100 DVR settings and includes the following topics Importing DVR Settings Using the Edit M enu to Perform an Import on page 204 Importing DVR Settings To import a saved settings file 1 A ER C2630M B 4 08 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click C The System page is displayed Select the Import button Do one of the follow ing a To specify the file name for import enter the drive path and file name information in the text box Settings file names follow standard Windows file naming conventions For example C System Settings Backup bak or b To browse for a location 1 Click Browse The DX8100 Setup File Export Dialog box opens 2 Navigate to the drive and folder where the settings file is located 3 Click the Up button to move up a level in the folder hie
111. Click and drag the mouse up or down to move between menu options 7 Click the iris button to select the option or to exit a menu when the cursor is pointed at the Exit command rm D m AANA r m lt en oon D Dm lt 4 Imm n om MV C AN NADI N nca vt vvD ar t onm MDD_ZA O a E m pol 22 mmm pq DNA MaN NDD M lt OT T S ae NMM AWz BIR o a 4 ia Figure 31 Camera Setup Menu C2630M B 4 08 57 SENDING AUXILIARY COMMANDS TO A DEVICE The DX8100 auxiliary feature allows you to control external equipment connected to the auxiliary outputs of Spectra domes or Esprit positioning systems The auxiliary function is implemented through the D protocol and P protocol In this case the attached camera and DX8100 must be configured to communicate using one of these protocols The Aux key selects the auxiliary mode Buttons 1 4 select which of the camera s auxiliary outputs to operate Buttons 1 4 operate as a toggle on off each time they are clicked For example an Esprit equipped with a wiper uses Aux 1 to control the wiper In this case pressing Aux and then 1 sends a command to the Esprit to operate the wiper You must configure the camera to establish how the camera responds to an auxiliary command For detailed information about how a specific Spectra or Esprit camera system interprets auxiliary commands refer to the documentation that accompanies your Spectra or Esprit camera sys
112. E The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 In the Setup dialog box click C The Schedule page is displayed 3 In the Camera Settings section click Frame Rate Configuration The Frame Rate Configuration dialog box opens Setting the Frame Rate The DX8100 Series DVR is optimized to provide 8 16 24 or 32 cameras of continuous video recording with a frame rate of 30 ips at a resolution of 320 x 240 NTSC or 320 x 288 PAL The DX8100 allows you to change the frame rate independent of the resolution For information on accessing the Frame Rate Configuration dialog box refer to Accessing the Frame Rate Configuration Dialog Box C2630M B 4 08 To set the frame rate values for cameras 1 C2630M B 4 08 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page In the Setup dialog box click C The Schedule page is displayed In the Camera Settings section click Frame Rate Configuration The Frame Rate Configuration dialog box opens Select the button for the recording mode you want to configure Options are as follows 604 704 Normal Motion Alarm ATM POS Do the following a Using the ALL frame rate settings slider set the frame rate for all channels b To set the frame rate for an individual channel use the frame rate slider for that channel to select a frame rate from 1 30 ips according to the available capacity for the channel The frame rate of an individual
113. EATING MONTHLY OR M ULTIPLE DAY RECORDING SCHEDULES Unlike schedules set in the Year View M onth View schedules are recurrent Schedules can be set for subsequent weekdays weekends everyday ora single day This section describes how to create a monthly or multiple day schedule and includes the following topics Creating M ultiple Day Schedules Creating Single Day Schedules on page 134 Creating Multiple Day Schedules To create a recording schedule to recur indefinitely 1 2 3 10 C2630M B 4 08 From the DX8100 toolbar click Y The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click C The Schedule page is displayed Click the M onth View tab if it is not currently selected Select All days Weekday or Weekends from the drop down box Click New The New File Name dialog box opens In the New File Name text box enter a new filename for the profile The profile file name follows the standard Windows file naming conventions Click OK Using your mouse select the recording modes and times for each camera you want to schedule For information on camera scheduling refer to Setting Up the Camera Recording M ode on page 129 Click Save Click Apply 133 11 Click the Apply button at the bottom of the Schedule page Month View Year View O y Weekend AugWeekends New Save Delete Apply lt Back August ES 2005 Next gt Once Per Month Once Per Year Start
114. EE DEE dE EEE EEE 28 Working with View Panes and Panels 00 ccc cect ete tet e rete rene rete etree eee eee Here ene En Eten eS 28 ConfigUringVSW PANGS ire cds sates anata i Ada 29 Navigating VieW Panels cscsceuesls bietantcneetdaebeae taras dc tiara 29 Mapping Channels on the Extended Monitor 0 csi cece eect coronar renee eee etree rr 32 Viewing Video on The Extended Monitor ccc cece cece eee eter eer ree rr 34 Modifying an Extended MonitorVieW oo cise cece cece eee oo r eee rene Ener edd He Eee E EEE ene EEE EES 34 Working WHEN THE Sitetree aorta a wiit dai ai datga Ds A IR Male whe Mba Ts Gadde gwen 35 Assigning Cameras to View Pan S cess ccc c ccc arre 36 O A hea e ea N a aera en Phe Leas nena te ceed ana ae Sided a a ket EES 37 Removing LINKS iio Tisserant iia va EEE EAN Ea ERANA ae baa ee ed a wada de Oey aa bina a oer a ad Sede Abbe 39 Working iM LiVe ViGW ModE iser irie divaeae coved renatka a eai veo aed da a wea edled ae RaDa pidana Eaa 40 Assigning and Removing Cameras from View Panes cece cece ete cece terete enter nee ener eee eden nee EEE EEE rg 40 Setting UP FAVONILES cocos ses irritada po idad doug 41 Adding a Camera View to Favorites icici cece nono rr rr ener e teen Ee Eee EEE EEE EEE 41 Organizing Favorites iniFolderS scsi zioosaarrana citada ctra riada aaa ari 42 Live View On Screen Display OSD 0o0ocococcccoc ccoo 44 Customizing the On Screen Display OSD cnc ccc rcc nr rrr ern nn
115. Each data device can trigger the DX8100 to record at special rates and for a special length of time as determined in the Record On Data Exceptions screen This section describes how to work with exceptions and includes the following topics Using Action Codes e Creating an ATM POS Exception on page 176 Editing an ATM POS Exception on page 178 Deleting an ATM POS Exception on page 178 e Assigning an Exception to An ATM POS Device on page 178 C2630M B 4 08 Using Action Codes To use an action code to search transaction data the action code must be created before recording the transaction data If the transaction data is recorded before the action code is defined the action code will not find the data structure within the transaction data The following table describes the ATM POS action codes Table AV Action Codes Code Description Code Description AL ALL CODES item or merchandise sold normally GR GAS REFUND refund of unused portion of gasoline prepayment AM AMOUNT TENDERED cash amount tendered IM INFORMATION MESSAGES displays message fields as is CC CREDIT CARD amount tendered with credit card IT ITEM SALE TRANSACTION displays message fields CD CASH DROP safe drop LO LOTTERY PAYMENT lottery pay out CG CHARGE ACCT amount added to charge account balance LS LOTTERY lottery sale CH CHAN
116. Export Process on page 103 Stopping an Export While in Process on page 104 e Working with DX8100 backed up Video on page 104 STARTING AN EXPORT PROCESS To start the export process 1 Make sure the DVR is in Playback or Search mode by clicking or ah 2 Click J if you are in Live mode or proceed to step 3 if you are in Search mode 3 Click IS The Export Video dialog box opens 4 Click the plus sign next to a drive in the Device list Available devices are indicated by a check box to the left of the device name 5 Select the check box of the desired device If you choose a remote device select the drive and folder path where you would like to store the exported file You can also click the Browse button to access the file system for the appropriate folder If your DX8100 is connected to a network that supports shared folders and drives you can map a network drive from within the Export Video dialog box For more information refer to M apping and Disconnecting a Network Drive on page 97 The following table shows a listing of available devices Table AA Available Backup Space Type Description Optical drives The DX8100 supports the following drives CD R DVD R Hard disk drives The hard disk drive can be any of the following Local drives Remote drives Removable drives USB flash drives 6 Select the check box of the video time range you want to export You can export multiple ti
117. Figure 48 DX8100 DVR Search M ode Window 74 C2630M B 4 08 The following table describes the parts of the DX8100 window in the Search mode Table X Parts of the DX8100 Window in Search M ode Part Description Index Search Allows users to search motion and alarm events listed in the event index panel Thumbnail Search Allows users to visually search video that has been recorded over a 24 hour period Video is presented as a series of thumbnail images Each thumbnail represents the first image recorded during a specified period of time Thumbnails can be expanded and collapsed to represent hourly 10 minute and 1 minute intervals POS Search Allows users to search ATM POS transaction text data Pixel Search Allows users to search any 24 hour period of recorded video automatically for changes in screen pixels View Window Displays search video image thumbnails and pixel grid Site Tree Facilitates top down hierarchical management of DX8100 resources such as servers cameras alarms and relays Event Index Panel Select All Check Box Lists motion and alarm events over the 24 hour time period specified in the playback timeline Enables playback for all visible view panels when selected If this check box is deselected only the selected channel will play This control is only available while using Index Search Playback Timeline Displays a 24 hour timeline marked with color coded video eve
118. GE change due to customer MT Not included CK CHECK amount tendered with check NS NO SALE no sale CL CLERK NAME and or number or CLERK LOGIN NT NEG TAX negative tax CM MFR COUPON manufacturer coupon redemption OT Description not available CP COUPON store coupon redemption OV OVERRIDE override programmed price displays message fields CR CRITICAL CODES determined by Action Critical PL PRICE LOOKUP displays message fields CX CANCEL cancel entire sale before completion PO PAID OUT pay out cash from register DB DEBIT CARD amount tendered with debit ATM or credit RA RCVD ON ACCT customer payment toward charge account balance DC DRAWER CLOSED no display RF REFUND payment of refund to customer DD DISCOUNT discount entered as absolute amount RT RETURN merchandise returned DO DRAWER OPEN no display ST SUBTOTAL sale subtotal DP DEPOSIT deposit amount paid pending purchase SX TAXABLE AMT taxable subtotal DR DEPOSIT RETURN deposit return TI CURRENT TIME displays description field DS PCT DISCOUNT discount as percentage of cost or total TK TRANSACTION RECEIPT NUM BER displays description field El EMPLOYEE SIGN ON to register TN Tim Norris publicly view able EO EMPLOYEE SIGN OFF to register TR NEGATIVE TOTAL negative amount as the total FC COMPLIMENTARY complimentary or on the house charge TT TOTAL total amount due FS FOODSTAM PS amount tend
119. GRAM MING FEATURES OF REMOTE CAMERAS You can use the PTZ function to program features of remote cameras such as Pelco s Spectra or Esprit Only cameras that support remote programming through D P Coaxitron or supported third party protocols can use this feature The DX8100 allows you to navigate the remote camera menu system using any of the following PTZOSD Menu controls For information on using the PTZ OSD Menu controls refer to Using the PTZ OSD M enu Control on page 55 e Keypad controls For information on using the keypad controls refer to Accessing a Remote Camera Programming M enu on page 56 Keyboard keys For information on using the keyboard keys refer to Using PC Keyboard Shortcuts to Operate PTZ and Lens Functions on page 50 The PTZ controls are hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the PTZ controls To switch between the standard and extended view mode From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt Extended View This section describes how to access the programming features of remote cameras and includes the following topics Using the PTZ OSD M enu Control Accessing a Remote Camera Programming M enu on page 56 Using the PTZ OSD Menu Control The DX8100 allows you to navigate the menu system of remote cameras using the PTZ OSD Menu control The PTZ OSD Menu control is available when the DX8100 is in Live View mode The PTZ controls are hidden in the
120. Health View v POS v Select All Display deinterlaced image 9 Background Color gt w Camera 5 Figure 16 DVR OSD M enu Options 2 Do one of the following e From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt OSD gt Background Color gt Set Color to add a contrasting background field behind each OSD display item From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt OSD gt Background Color gt Disable Background to remove background field INSTANT RECORDING This section describes the instant recording mode Users with Power User access and higher can configure the DX8100 for recording video both instantly and in accordance with a preset schedule The Instant Recording mode is enabled from the Schedule page Instant recording is activated from the main window by double clicking the Instant Recording icon If the DVR is not in the normal recording mode you can use the instant recording mode to manually start and stop a video recording session instantly For information about adding the Instant Recording icon to the OSD refer to Adding Instant Recording to OSD on page 46 This section includes the following topics Enabling and Disabling Instant Recording on page 45 e Adding Instant Recording to OSD on page 46 Starting and Stopping Instant Recording on page 46 ENABLING AND DISABLING INSTANT RECORDING This section describes how to enable and disable the instant recording mode and includes the following topics
121. ICASTING The DX8100 supports a layer 2 multicast feature that allows the multicast and unicast mode to co exist In this case the DX8100 Web Client and DX8100 Client software can connect to a DX8100 server simultaneously The recommended multicasting IP range is from 224 0 1 1 to 224 0 1 253 If the DX8100 server is not configured to operate in the multicast mode then the DX8100 netw ork automatically uses the unicast protocol The DX8100 layer 2 multicast feature conserves bandwidth and reduces network traffic by simultaneously delivering one stream of data to an unlimited number of connections This section describes the DX8100 layer 2 multicasting feature and is organized into the following topics e Multicast Requirements e Enabling M ulticasting on page 154 Multicast Requirements The DX8100 multicast feature has the following requirements Table AP DX8100 M ulticast Requirements and Operation Item Description Network equipment The switch or router must support layer 2 multicasting Network requirements The DX8100 Web Client establishes multicast connections with DX8100 servers in its own VLAN The network must support Internet Group M anagement Protocol IGM P The number of DX8100 Web Client connections is unlimited Operation e Initially the DX8100 Web Client uses the IP address of the target DX8100 server using the TCP port to establish a connection to the DX8100 After the connection is established the session
122. Inthe Period section do the following a Click the Start Date drop down arrow and then select a start date b Click the End Date drop down arrow and then select an end date Period Start Date or 31 2008 y End Date XJ January 2008 gt Sun Mon TuewedThu Fri Sat 112 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 User Go to today Figure 79 Period Start and End Dates 5 Do one of the following Search by user ID Click User and type the user s login ID in the text entry box Search by system state Click System State and then click the drop down arrow to select a log C2630M B 4 08 105 6 Click Start Update If the system logged events for search criteria those events are displayed in the Log View window The following figure shows all the events that occurred for user ID Admin Type User Change On Connect On Disconnect On Connect On Disconnect User Change On Connect Video Loss Video Loss Video Loss Video Loss Video Loss Video Loss Video Recovery Video Recovery Video Loss Video Loss Video Recovery 01 31 2008 14 21 29 Admin Logout 10 80 2 254 htrumbo 01 31 2008 15 02 06 Admin IP Address is 10 80 2254 01 31 2008 14 57 27 Admin IP Address is 10 80 2254 01 31 2008 14 28 31 Admin IP Address is 10 80 2 254 01 31 2008 14 21 29 Admin IP Address is 10 80 2 254 01 30 2008 18 23 11 Admin Login Success 10 80 2 254 htrumbo 01 30 2008 18 22 2
123. Log Files DX8100 Log View Windows OS Log View System On Off Success System Failure Error Export Warning Backup Information Network Connection Audit_Sucess Login ID List with Time Audit_Failure Video Loss Audit_Failure 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YA The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click C The System page is displayed 3 In the Log Information section select a log file from the Choose drop down box 4 Do one of the following a To view DX8100 logs click View The Log View dialog box opens Log Information Choose System On Off L View OS Log View Save As Figure 169 Viewing a Log File The following figure shows the Log View dialog box or C2630M B 4 08 Log View Type Date Time User Description Video Loss Video Loss Video Loss Video Loss Video Loss Video Loss Video Loss 08 03 2005 00 59 03 htrumbo Channel 1 Video Loss 08 03 2005 06 07 17 htrumbo Channel 3 Video Loss 08 03 2005 06 07 17 htrumbo Channel 4 Video Loss 08 03 2005 06 07 17 htrumbo Channel 2 Video Loss 08 03 2005 07 24 45 htrumbo 08 03 2005 09 53 42 Admin 08 03 2005 10 24 32 Admin Channel 2 Video Loss Channel 2 Video Loss Channel 2 Video Loss xl Period Start Date 08 03 2005 y End Date 08 03 2005 y User 1D C System State j H Figure 170 Log View Dialog Box 205 b To view OS log infor
124. M POS device linked to the selected camera channel is displayed in the Device Name text box In this case the Device Name text box is deselected Do the following 1 In the Transaction Information section click the check box to select Device Name The Device Name text box is available 2 Type the ATM POS device name in the Device Name text box 4 Setthe date and time range for the search 5 In the Data Information section do the following a Click the check box to select Transaction with Exception Only The Exception Code check box is available b Click the check box to select Exception Code The Exception Code text box is available c Type the exception code in the text box C2630M B 4 08 85 6 Click Start Search If the device name channel date and time are valid and if transactions with exceptions were recorded during the time range the transactions are displayed in the POS Search Table 7 Inthe POS Search Table click a transaction The transaction data is displayed in the Data window Live End for 13 2006 for 447 00 4 Transaction Information I Device Name ATM7POSOT 3b T Transaction Number m Data Information IV Transaction with Exception Only 0O T Line Item I Action Code EH z IV Exception Code BANANA Start Search I Stop Search 6 Ch Device Name _ Trans Date Time Exception F Data Overlay Enable TRANSACTION NUMBER 559 DATE 1 13
125. Name filam SO camenan e Figure 105 Event PTZ Link Settings Linking Presets and Patterns to Alarm Events Linking Presets and Patterns to ATM POS Events To link an ATM POS input to a camera so the detected ATM POS event results in a repositioning of that camera On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click 29 The Linking page is displayed Click the Event PTZ Link Settings tab 1 2 3 126 In the ATM POS Link Settings section do the following a b Select an ATM POS address from the ATM POS Address drop down box In the Linked PTZ Setting section select a camera to be linked from the Linked Camera Channel drop down box This camera will change PTZ position in response to an ATM POS input detected by the source ATM POS device To select a PTZ preset or pattern for the linked camera in the Linked PTZ Setting section do one of the following To force the linked camera to move to a PTZ preset in response to an ATM POS input detected by the source camera 1 Click the Linked Camera Preset button to select this option 2 In the Preset drop down box select a PTZ preset 1 150 To force a PTZ pattern to be activated in response to ATM POS input detected by the source camera 1 Click the Linked Camera Pattern button to select this option 2 In the Pattern drop down box select a PTZ pattern 1 4 to be activated on the camera The selected camera must suppo
126. OPERATION CONFIGURATION DX8100 Series Digital Video Recorder Server Application Softw are C2630M B 4 08 C2630M B 4 08 Contents Operation and Programming Welcome to the DX8100 Series DVR oooooococccoccocooncnnrr rr rr 12 DX8100 Client Emergency Agent ooo ccoo ccoo 12 A A Ea E a ai EEN AES DEERE E EPERE EEEN EONA 12 DX8100 Moblle Clint cota ver caia 12 DXGTOOW CDiCN ONE a antares a eee uaa hata ri eds 13 New DX8100 Features 230 cissns rara ria ban oati otito ds cha snd Mado pe EMT Rs A 13 Getting Started with DX8100 DVR Software oo ccc ocre 14 Upgrade Poll Cys cavininded satis ct wea E ads A A sad adds a 14 SoftWare Upgrades rt sett A ai aaie deia Baiah daen aia det dekah aie iaon a Bid ated aiea agek dhiiit weblogs 14 Hardware Upgrades 2 ooie cis la dd Gd dd eevee da bad Saar dae sea ae ene 15 Starting and Shutting Down the DX8100 oo cic ccrr EEEE 15 Starting the DXB100 iia ina Vid eich a Wa A da hia Pahoa nd dade died Ed 15 Shutting Down the DX8100 oo ccoo rr EEE taci aiti DEKA a La EREE Direidi EES 16 DX8100 DocumentatiO secos sas eee pa lineas dd ld etre reat Enei 16 Logging Into the DX8100 Application 02000 ctehad coeees caegeed carnada titikan ii tE varada rad oawadls Elena d Fees 17 Local DXBLOOLOGIN coria RA AAA arma RA eee eas 17 Logging mto LocallDXB100 0 ici ida ata beeen la ad range 17 LOQGING OULOF the Local DA rra tarda ni oa lt Ed Id aia dade 17 Exiting to the Windows Operating System
127. REM OTE DX8100 LOGIN You can view live and playback video from up to five DX8100 Series DVRs simultaneously To access the features of a remote DX8100 a link must be established between the local and remote DVRs Refer to Adding a Remote Site on page 197 for instructions on establishing a network connection with a remote DVR After establishing an active connection refer to Logging in to a Remote Site on page 18 for login instructions This section includes the following topics e Connecting to a Remote Site Disconnecting from a Remote Site Logging in to a Remote Site Logging Out of a Remote Site CONNECTING TO A REMOTE SITE To connect to an active DX8100 server on the network 1 In the DX8100 main window right click the remote site name from the site tree The shortcut menu is displayed 2 Select Connect from the shortcut menu DISCONNECTING FROM A REMOTE SITE To terminate a connection with a remote DX8100 server 1 In the DX8100 main window right click the remote site name from the site tree The shortcut menu is displayed 2 Select Disconnect from the shortcut menu LOGGING IN TO A REMOTE SITE After a connection to a remote site has been established log in with a valid user name and password for that site To log in to a remote site 1 In the DX8100 main window select a remote DX8100 Series DVR site from the site tree 2 From the DX8100 menu bar choose File gt User Log in You can also log in to a remote
128. ROGRAM MING A PATTERN This section describes how to program a pattern Certain PTZ devices such as Pelco s Spectra series domes will display an on screen message Stating the amount of remaining memory available for pattern programming C2630M B 4 08 53 Start Programming a Pattern To program a pattern 1 2 3 On the DX8100 toolbar click 4 Drag a camera from the Site tree onto a view panel On the DX8100 keypad click to enter programming mode Using the PTZ keypad select a number for the pattern 1 4 Click Pattern Move the camera through a series of movements using the on screen PTZ and focus controls Figure 26 Programming a Pattern Stop Programming a Pattern To stop programming a pattern 1 On the DX8100 keypad click Pattern 2 Click S28 ACTIVATING A PATTERN When activated a pattern will repeat indefinitely until it is cleared another pattern is set or the on screen PTZ control is moved To activate a pattern 1 On the DX8100 keypad click a pattern number 1 4 on the keypad 2 Click Pattern 54 Figure 27 Activating a Pattern C2630M B 4 08 CLEARING A PATTERN To clear a pattern 1 On the DX8100 keypad click to enter programming mode 2 Select a pattern number 1 4 on the keypad 3 Click Pattern 4 Click Cir 5 Click Pattern again 6 Click en again to exit programming mode Figure 28 Clearing a Pattern ACCESSING PRO
129. Recording Times for a Specific Record M ode on page 131 Clearing Recording Times for All Record M odes on page 131 C2630M B 4 08 Clearing Recording Times for a Specific Record M ode To clear the scheduled recording times for a specific record mode for one or more channels 1 2 33 From the DX8100 toolbar click 74 The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click C The Schedule page is displayed Click a record mode check box to select the specific record mode Right click and drag to highlight the time periods and channels for which you want to clear recording times Release the right mouse button The highlighted recording times are cleared Do one of the following To accept the change click Apply The selected time period is deleted To cancel the change click Cancel The deleted recording times are restored E Record Mode KZ Normal J Motion JE Alam FF atm Pos ran an 0 1 2 3 ps Figure 110 Clearing Recording Times for a Specific Record Mode Clearing Recording Times for All Record Modes To clear the scheduled recording times for all record modes 1 X 3 C2630M B 4 08 From the DX8100 toolbar click bia The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click C The Schedule page is displayed Click a record mode check box to deselect the record mode No record mode is selected Right click and drag to highlight the time periods and channels for which you want to clear recording
130. S search feature and includes the following topics Understanding the POS Search View Searching and Displaying POS Data by Device Name on page 81 Searching by POS Transaction Number on page 83 Searching for All Transactions with Exceptions on page 84 e Searching for Transactions That Satisfy Specific Exceptions on page 85 Searching for Transactions by Line Item on page 86 Searching for Transactions by Action Code on page 87 UNDERSTANDING THE POS SEARCH VIEW To enter the POS Search mode 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click ak 2 On the Search control click O The POS search view is displayed The following figure shows the parts of the POS search view Start for 10 2006 jf co 003 03 End or 10 2006 00 00 00 Transaction Information I Device Name FF Transaction Number Tmas Data Information I Transaction with Exception Only T Line Item I Action Code I Exception Code Q Data Overlay Enable Figure 51 POS Search View C2630M B 4 08 The following table describes the parts of the POS search view Table Y Parts of the POS Search View Item Part Description a Date Date range for which to search the video and data 2 Time Time range based on a 24 hour time period for searching POS events Transaction Allows POS search by transaction information options as follows Information Device name The ATM POS device linked to a
131. This section describes the Setup M ode and includes the following topics e Accessing the Setup M ode e Understanding the Setup Dialog Box on page 110 Camera Setup on page 111 Link Setup on page 118 Schedule Setup on page 128 e Setting Up Network Properties on page 151 Data Backup Setup on page 184 User Setup on page 190 e Site Setup on page 197 System Setup on page 201 External Monitor Setup on page 210 Emergency Notification Setup on page 216 Emergency E Mail Notification Setup on page 218 ACCESSING THE SETUP MODE The Setup M ode is accessed from the DX8100 toolbar by clicking the Setup icon W hen clicked the Setup icon opens the Setup dialog box in the DX8100 view panel M ajor configuration categories are displayed on individual tabbed pages Each configuration page contains all of the options and parameters for the respective functions which allows you to customize how the DX8100 operates for your particular application To access a setup page click the icon displayed on the right side of the view panel The Setup dialog box allows Administrators and Power Users access to the DX8100 s setup functions However only Administrators can define user names and passwords for new users To access the Setup M ode On the DX8100 toolbar click Setup The Setup dialog box opens to the default Camera page C2630M B 4 08 109 UNDERSTANDING THE SETUP DIALOG BOX The Setup dialog box opens in the DX810
132. Toolbar on page 26 NAVIGATING VIEW PANELS This section describes how to move between the DX8100 view panes and panels This section includes the following topics Navigating Between View Panels on page 30 e Expanding and Collapsing View Panes on page 31 e Manually Cycling Through Hidden View Panels on page 31 e Automatically Cycling Through View Panels on page 31 C2630M B 4 08 30 Navigating Between View Panels The DX8100 allows you to monitor up to 36 channels each channel is assigned to one pane within the view panel If the 36 division display format is selected all 36 panes occupy one panel However for single 4 division 9 division 16 division and 25 division display formats the DX8100 displays the panes in multiple panels In this case to view all of the panes you must cycle through multiple panels to display hidden panels Channel As pertains to video one DX8100 camera port input The term channel is sometimes used interchangeably with camera e Camera One external video device such as a Spectra III that provides input video to the DX8100 DVR For example if you select the single division display format one channel video pane fills the entire panel e The pane and panel represent the same amount of viewing area e Inthis case there will be an additional 31 hidden panels one pane equals one panel through which to cycle Similarly if you select the 4 division display format Four panes
133. a USB flash drive before the DX8100 acknowledges that it is safe to do so might result in lost or corrupted data Remove the USB flash drive C2630M B 4 08 ENABLING THE DEINTERLACING FILTER Images recorded at 4CIF at a low frame rate per second might move ortear The DX8100 provides a global option for enabling deinterlacing filtering to enhance the exported image for 4CIF recorded channels In this case the exported image is converted to 2CIF resolution This setting is effective for all channels and cannot be set for enabling individual channels For more information about viewing video in the deinterlaced mode refer to Viewing Video in the Deinterlaced M ode on page 91 To enable the deinterlacing filter 1 Make sure the DVR is in Playback or Search mode by clicking or al 2 Click J if you are in Live mode or proceed to step 3 if you are in Search mode 3 Click The Export Video dialog box opens 4 From the Export Format area select the Enable deinterlacing filter check box Export Format av C ASF Native C BMP C JPEG C TIF VV Audio Record VV Real Time Image Count 13 Interval Continuous y peste deinterlacing filter Figure 69 Enabling the Deinterlacing Filter from the Export Video Dialog Box MAPPING AND DISCONNECTING A NETWORK DRIVE You can export sections of prerecorded video to a network drive The DX8100 allows you to map to or disconnect from a network drive In th
134. abling Multicasting eiee rna A wid A O OAA ERATA aa A E Ad 154 IP Configuration Information BO a a a Aaa E a a a apelins 155 NTP Server List Dialog BOX occ cia a ce ici a o e a i aika VE EEE EURA a AA A 156 Add EdIENTP Server Dialog BOX dead di 156 Editing a N TP TIM SV rea a o A hasan tai 157 Selecting a NT AR a A a ads ti d aan 157 Selecting NTP io coria ni ao pai pra bt 158 Checking TiMe Diterencesixy mA A e In andas 158 Manually Synchronizing the DX8100 TMB cece oca 159 Automatically Synchronizing the DX8100 TMG ect c cee ccoo rr eee eee e reenter EE Ener EE tre enn 159 Port Device Pagers aa dt Dl dio ds dE Lit Ed IIA i aita fenh 161 Multi Mode Communication Port Settings coro 165 Device Configuration A Ok Se ies 165 Data Format List Pager cos ds exch via id a Ra EI Miia AS ca tod 166 M odified ER 650 Data Format Dialog BOX comisaria ada ala BES ad 166 Data Format Listine cios pri ta tl a a ea AE te id x oes 167 Assigning the Data Format ATM POS Devices cei cece teeter ce reer eer rr eee e ents beet e tne en ene 168 Event Recording Link Settings Page cuca a Wenge Desig ansaid at deal da de ans 168 ScheduleSetup Pade i save cya cer e A A oie bum at teams a a asad 169 Data FormatPade lion a dd a da dant 170 Assigning a Data Format to an ATM POS Device ccc ccce EEEE 174 Advanced Pdo a ias iia idas 176 Exceptions Dialog Brico ia A A A o ai Baa los 177 Assigning an Exception to an ATM POS Device o co cece EEEE 179 Verify
135. about view panels and panes refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 28 PTZ Control Panel Allows users with access rights to operate camera lens control features and to program PTZ presets patterns auxiliary outputs and tours This panel is hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the PTZ control panel For information on how to select view modes refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 28 Index View Panel Allows users with access rights to search motion and alarm events within a 24 hour period specified in the playback timeline By default this panel is not displayed Playback Timeline Displays a 24 hour timeline marked with color coded video events Allows users with Standard User access rights to select a date and time for playback This panel is hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the playback timeline For information on how to select view modes refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 28 Playback Control Panel Provides buttons for users with access rights to control video playback Includes forward and reverse playback and still image It also provides controls for playback speed and volume This panel is hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the playback timeline control pane
136. access system configuration functions The Guest account automatically becomes active when the system is first started and each time a user logs out The Guest useris not a member of any group However a Guest retains all of the rights and privileges of the Restricted Users group including the ability to view low security cameras If you do not want video from a low security level camera to be viewed by the Guest user set the security level for that cameras to medium or higher Admin The Admin account has full access to the system The Admin user can view live and playback video access all configuration settings add and modify users and can perform searches and backups The Admin user is a member of the Administrators group and cannot be removed 192 C2630M B 4 08 DEFINITION OF USER ACCESS LEVELS There are four predefined user access levels or groups User access levels range from the Administrator group to the Restricted group By default the system starts up with a default Guest account The Admin user can assign automatic login for a specified user For information about setting up auto login refer to Assigning Automatic Login Permission to a User on page 197 The Guest account has Restricted user access The following table describes the default user group access rights Table BB Default User Group Access Rights userGroups uve Recorded Ora Search Backup System Down Remove croup yt Video
137. acti eet ennai een by beads once da meer pa P eas Ee sale ned EEE EETA 196 Changing Users Group Affiliation isr sees asian ee Kee e ALGER ar oan een Ada 196 Deleting Existing Users cir td id A A ti 196 Setting Login TIMO AA a AA A AE ad de wae Rees 196 Assigning Automatic Login Permission to a USE coa 197 Site Setup vo dc a A A Pathe ga a A le 197 ANDA Remote Sitis A A di E IA 197 Finding Active Remote Cameras cic cect re eee rere EEE EEE EEE DEED EE Eee re Ener E EEE EES 200 Activating Remote Sites duros nadas ad Satsang ld ia dia daa ide 200 Modifying a Remote cia a a A A A a ees Gen aa bi 201 A Ur ea 201 PP bet doe aaG Deeg e eben eke aaa oeeaG bE idea aoe Una 202 Working with the Export Featurenn ce er ccnve coeaty AA iia nen tial henge yearns Mikes T COENA 202 Working withthe Import Featurencts ce hin A a A a AE gees 203 Using System Logs einai E Seana A E heer deans Nae Pv geen fdas ae ia binges lla 204 Selecting the Langquade cst ieceri orgias tomate roving da bende nadaa dad lag sade payee ena deba 206 Setting the System TIME a A A A A a a ddr 207 Selecting the Video Format cc EEEE 208 Working with Ctrl Alt Del Function ccc cect ocre rr 208 Setting contit pagaia hai Gyles yell Boasts BPE EA AE GERR E eS BE e Nea 209 Specifying the Data Retention Time Limit co 209 Working With Online HElD a a anaa aaa e a aana hs Mia AA A AEA A ia E ein 210 External M OnitOrSe tup oia e a a goaod ERIA PEENE DARA V ERa ERAR TPN A AS den A a an
138. action is played back and is displayed in the Video window C2630M B 4 08 6 Use the playback control to stop or pause playback reverse playback and so forth Playback Stat moa jo oo foo End or 10 2006 os 34 os oo gt Transaction Information Device Name arm Poso1 FF Transaction Number I p Data Information IT Transaction with Exception Only I Line Item I T Action Code z I Exception Gade I 01 10 2006 09 03 21 562 3 Start Search Stop Search F Data Overlay Enable TRANSACTION NUMBER 16 DATE 1 10 2006 TIME 9 3 36 CHEESE 4 99 SUB TOTAL 4 99 AX 0 40 TOTAL 5 39 Chan Device Name Trans Date Time ATM POSO1 1 10 9 3 ATMIPOSO1 1 10 9 3 A A ATMIPOSO1 ATM POSOL ATM POSOL ATM POSOL ATM POSO1 ATM POSO1 NNNNNNNN Figure 53 Display a POS Transaction Search by Device Name SEARCHING BY POS TRANSACTION NUMBER The DX8100 allows you to search for a POS event by transaction number You must specify the channel date and a time window in which the transaction is recorded To search for a POS event by transaction number 1 2 3 C2630M B 4 08 On the DX8100 toolbar click ak On the Search control click OM The POS search view is displayed To select a device name do one of the following Inthe DX8100 Site tree click a camera that is linked to an ATM POS device By default the name
139. all cameras assigning from 37 how organized 22 local expanding and collapsing 36 overview 35 remote expanding and collapsing 36 single camera assigning from 36 software DX8000 DVR server using 14 upgrading 14 software upgrade port 153 standard audio inputs 13 114 standard view mode 49 static IP address adding remote site with static IP address 197 assigning 152 153 remote site 197 status bar 22 stop bits 164 165 synchronization loss of 117 system administration 230 system administrator obtaining useraccount 17 system configuration language 15 language setting 14 printer adding 14 time setting 14 systemID 152 system setup accessing the System page 202 Ctrl Alt Del key enabling 208 using 209 DVR settings exporting 202 importing 203 Edit menu exporting from 203 importing from 204 export feature 202 import feature 203 language 206 selecting 206 Supported languages 206 log files exporting 206 C2630M B 4 08 overview 204 viewing a log file 205 overview 201 system time setting 207 standard and daylight saving time 208 video format selecting 208 system time 14 207 T TCP IP ports default 153 third party domes 47 163 164 protocols supported 51 53 55 111 time system setting 207 title bar 22 toolbar 22 26 tour preset 51 59 transaction format 171 parameters 171 transaction filter predefined 80 85 174 U upgrade policy hardware 14 software 14 user security level 190 acce
140. alling the MUX card option ensure that the M UX Card matches the capture card channel capacity as follows e Ifan 8 channel capture card is installed the DX8108 M UX option is required The DX8124 model DVR has two capture cards installed an 8 channel and a 16 channel capture card In this case the DX8108 M UX and DX8116 M UX option are required e Ifa 16 channel capture card is installed the DX8116 M UX option is required The DX8132 model DVR has two 16 channel capture cards installed In this case two DX8116 M UX options are required To view live video in the DX8100 main window On the DX8100 toolbar click Live This section includes the following topics e Assigning and Removing Cameras from View Panes Live View On Screen Display OSD on page 44 e Customizing the On Screen Display OSD on page 45 ASSIGNING AND REMOVING CAMERAS FROM VIEW PANES The DX8100 allows you to quickly move cameras to and remove cameras from a view pane To assign a camera to the view pane 1 Drag a camera from the Site tree onto a view pane 2 Repeat the process in step 1 for up to 36 cameras and up to five different DX8100 sites To remove a camera from a view pane e Right click in the view pane and drag the camera to the Site tree pane For information about the DX8100 view pane and panels refer to the following topics Working with View Panes and Panels on page 28 e Configuring View Panels on page 29 e Navigating View Panels on
141. alog video output audio input capacity and hard disk storage For information about DX8100 upgrade options refer to the DX8100 product specification sheet Hard disk upgrades are available as follows 1 Notall products are capable of being upgraded for additional hard drive space For information on whether a particular model can be upgraded consult the relevant installation operation manual or technical support department at Pelco 2 Ifahard disk upgrade is possible it is available through Pelco at established prices and is subject to the usual 24 hour turnaround for service When a larger hard drive is being substituted for a smaller one the smaller drive will be returned to the customer along with the upgraded unit While Pelco will perform all upgrades with the utmost consideration and care Pelco cannot guarantee that any of the data and or video stored on the existing hard drives will not be lost or damaged Pelco is not responsible for damage or loss of data STARTING AND SHUTTING DOWN THE DX8100 This section describes how to start and shut down the DX8100 and includes the following topics Starting the DX8100 Shutting Down the DX8100 For information on logging in to the DX8100 refer to Logging In to the DX8100 Application on page 17 STARTING THE DX8100 To start the DX8100 1 Once the system is installed open the front panel of the DVR and press the power switch
142. ame TCP IP subnet or LAN The first three octets of the IP address of the DVR host or subnet must be known The range of addresses used in the last octet of the DVR host or subnet must be known To add a remote DVR site when the IP address is known 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click Et The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click Lyey 3 Select the Search DX8100 button if it is not already selected 198 C2630M B 4 08 4 Enter an IP address range to search for DVR sites a Enter the first three octets of the IP range you want to search for example 10 10 1 b Enter the beginning value for the search range in the fourth octet for example 001 c Enter the final value for the search range in the text box provided for example 254 Each octet of the IP address must be an integer number between 1 and 255 5 Click Find and then wait while the DX8100 searches the network for remote DVR sites 6 Select the DVR site s you want to add to the site list 7 Click Add 8 Click Apply She IP list DXS100Lab 10 108 12 213 iP MAC Address 10 107 11 164 00 13D4 6E 1C e lol Camera Selif ton Setting aan ola aman Ce EEE PEERS Figure 165 Adding a Site with a Dynamic IP Address C2630M B 4 08 199 200 FINDING ACTIVE REM OTE CAMERAS After connecting to a remote site you should query the serve
143. amera To remove a relay link from a camera 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click 2 Inthe Site tree click the plus sign next to the camera from which you want to remove the relay output 3 Left click and drag the relay outside the Site tree panel to the DX8100 toolbar or panel above or below the Site tree panel and then release the mouse button 4 Repeat the above process for each relay you want to remove Removing a Linked Relay Output from an Alarm Input To unlink a relay from an alarm 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click 2 In the Site tree click the plus sign next to the alarm input from which you want to remove the relay output 3 Left click and drag the relay outside the Site tree panel and then release the mouse button 4 Repeat the above process for each relay you want to remove C2630M B 4 08 39 Working in Live View M ode This section describes how to use the DX8100 to view and record live video All users can view live video from the main window Users with PTZ access rights Standard User by default and higher can operate the on screen PTZ controls Live video can also be displayed in full screen view For information about displaying playback video in full screen view refer to Displaying Live Video in Full Screen View on page 27 The DX8100 displays live video based on one of the following scenarios Capture card displays live video The capture card is used to display live video on the main VGA
144. amera to the programmed preset position Number PRESET long Programs the current camera position to the desired preset number Number PATTERN long Starts the pattern record mode ACK Stops the pattern record mode Number PATTERN Runs the desired pattern Number AUX ON AUX OFF Turns the specified auxiliary output on or off Number M ON Assigns the selected camera to the desired view pane The active view pane is highlighted 182 C2630M B 4 08 KBD300A Shift M ode Operational Features The following table describes the KBD300A Shift M ode operational features Table AY KBD300A Shift M ode Operational Features Control Action J oystick Activity within the DX8100 Site tree Up Down direction M oves the cursor vertically through each element in the Site tree An element is a DX8100 site a camera within each DX8100 site alarm or ATM POS or are relay within each DX8100 site If an element is expanded the joystick moves the cursor vertically through the objects of that element Left Right direction Right Expands an element to display objects contained under the element Left Collapses an element and hides its objects Select a camera unit at the tree Number CAM Expands the specified DX8100 Site tree If there are two sites 1 CAM expands DX8100 site 1 2 CAM expands DX8100 site 2 F2 F3 ON OFF Cameras are assigned numerically 1 16 to the respectively numbere
145. an image has not been edited or damaged after it has been recorded The watermark is an encrypted digital signature embedded in the video stream during the compression stage protecting the video from the moment of creation The DX8100 Viewer software is capable of reading a DX8100 watermark and verifying the originality of the video AVI or ASF format Video exported in AVI or ASF format can be viewed using standard viewer software such as Windows M edia Player When exporting video in the native format to a CD or DVD device the DX8100 will automatically include the DX8100 Viewer application along with the video This viewer is designed to play a variety of still image video and audio media formats including the native DX8100 format The DX8100 Viewer application will automatically run each time a CD or DVD created by the DX8100 s export feature is inserted into a Windows based PC To ensure that the viewer software runs automatically after the disk has been inserted verify that the auto run feature of your PC s optical drive has not been disabled Table AB Export Formats Format Description AVI Saves video sequence as a standard Windows video format ASF Saves video sequence as a standard Windows media file Native Saves video sequence using Pelco s engineered compression format Native format provides increased compression and smaller file sizes BMP Saves a still image file in standard Windows bitmap format Onl
146. and separate the various fields within the transaction Every field format must match that of the ATM or POS device especially the month format To create a data format 1 In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed 2 In the Communication Port drop down box select a port Port 1 to Port 4 The device mode option is not available for COM 1 3 In the selected device drop down box select an ATM POS device 4 Inthe Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration page is displayed 5 Click the Data Format tab 6 In the Data Format page click Add The Data Format dialog box opens 7 Using the information from the transaction record or other source set the parameters for the following Data Format sections as applicable Transaction Format Monetary Format Time Format e Character Format 8 Click OK 9 Verify that the new data format is listed in the Data Format List on the Data Format page Editing a Data Format The DX8100 allows you to edit a data format Once you click OK to accept the changes you cannot undo the changes To edit an existing data format 1 In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed 2 In the Communication Port drop down box select a port Port 1 to Port 4 The device mode option is not available for COM 1 3 Inthe selected device drop down box select an ATM POS device 4 Inthe Communicati
147. art action If you exit the Network page you are not prompted to apply the previous settings If you open the Network page again the Enable M ulticasting check box is selected However the DX8100 must still be restarted to activate the multicasting mode ACCESSING NETWORK INFORMATION Access the Network page to view DX8100 network settings For information on accessing the Network page refer to Setting Up DX8100 Network Access on page 151 To access network information such as IP and default gateway addresses 1 In the Network page click Network Information The IP Configuration information box appears 2 Click OK to return to the Network page I xi Windows 2000 IP Configuration al Host Name ADMINIST 94778C Primary DNS Suffix X Node Type Hybrid IP Routing Enabled No WINS Proxy Enabled No DNS Suffix Search List pelco org Ethemet adapter Local Area Connection 2 Connection specific DNS Suffix pelco org Description Realtek RTL8168 8111 PCI E Gigabit Ethernet N Physical Address 00 11 0F 00 03 FC DHCP Enabled Yes Default Gateway DHCP Server He DNS Servers 10 103 1 11 10 104 1 11 Primary WINS Server 10 151 0 21 Secondary WINS Server 10 151 0 22 Lease Obtained Tuesday August 15 2006 11 23 07 AM Lease Expires Monday August 21 2006 11 23 07 AM y 4 gt Figure 1
148. ate the timeline slider at the beginning of the range you want to bookmark You can use the drop down box and spinner buttons above the timeline to locate a bookmark 4 To create book marks do the following a Click A red bookmark flag appears on the timeline b Locate the timeline slider at the end of the range you want to bookmark c Click The bookmark flag and the region between bookmarks turn gray Exporting a bookmarked region of video requires start and end bookmarks If only one bookmark is set video will not be marked for export d Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each additional region you want to bookmark for that camera PM Select all S01 C05 Camera 5 08 24 2006 103 123 073 Al 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 OF 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 4 M PS A PS O A A O ER O O O O O O O O E l Figure 64 Book Marking Multiple Time Regions 5 Click The Export Video dialog box opens 6 Do the following a Right click the time range you want to assign to multiple channels The Duplicate Bookmark submenu is displayed r Time Range 4 StatDay _ Start Time EndDay __ EndTime Name 08 24 2006 08 57 00 000 ch01 082406_084151_ Duplicate Bookmark Delete Item File name Apply Figure 65 Selecting a Time Range for Duplication 94 C2630M B 4 08 b Click Duplicate Bookmark The Select Channel dialog box opens Select Channel q x Sime mm
149. ation Setup on page 219 To test e mail notification 1 2 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click 2 The Notification page is displayed Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab Select the M y E mail Server Requires Authentication check box if it is not already selected Enter your personal e mail address or the address of someone who can verify the receipt of the test e mail in the To text box Type DX8100 E mail Notification Test in the Subject text box C2630M B 4 08 7 Enter the following server settings if necessary Server address This address should be the same as the SMTP server address you entered above Username Password 8 Click Test E mail Notification Emergency Agent Setup Emergency E mail Notification Setup C Disable Notification Enable Notiicatiod Full name Shipping Area DVR E mail Address fihindockdvi pelco com Ta idoe pelco com Add to Group A ce Ata Go Subject 0X8100 Emergency E mail Notification mailSMTP smipdomain pelca com Q My E mail Server Requires Authentication Server address emtp domain1 pelca com User name shipdockdw P 4 a S Test E mail Notification Figure 181 E Mail Test SETTING UP THE TIME PERIOD The DX8100 can be configured to send e mail notifications on a periodic basis such as once every ten minutes This sections describes how to set
150. ation elsewhere in the document Unplug Eject Hardware Opens the Unplug or Eject Hardware dialog box for a specific device Multiple Configuration Upload Opens the M ulti configuration Upload dialog displaying a list of DX8100 sites and groups Use this dialog box to select specific DX8100 sites to configure the file to upload to those sites and to initiate the upload process Exit Opens the Shut down dialog box for selecting one of the following actions requires a specific level of user permission Shutdown Shuts down the DX8100 machine You must have Power User or Administrator access to shut down the DX8100 machine For more information refer to Shutting Down the DX8100 on page 16 Restart Restarts the DX8100 application You must have Administrator or Power user access to restart the DX8100 application For more information refer to User Setup on page 190 Exitto Windows mode You must have Administrator user access to exit the DX8100 application to the Windows operating system For more information refer to Exiting to the Windows Operating System on page 18 C2630M B 4 08 23 24 Edit Menu The following table describes the DX8100 Edit menu commands Table C Edit Menu Commands Command Description Export Setup Opens the DX8100 Setup File Export dialog box for exporting the DX8100 system configuration settings to a specific file name and location The Export fea
151. b Select the configuration file you want to use to update the DX8100 servers c Click Open The path to the configuration file is displayed in the Configuration File Path text box d Click Upload The configuration file is uploaded to the selected device If there is an issue a message dialog box opens x You are about to import the configuration file from a different model Please try it again with the right configuration file Figure 193 DX8100 Update Dialog Box 5 Click Close to exit the Multiple Configuration Upload dialog box x r Site List Dx8100Lab 10 106 12 213 Configuration File Path EXDX8T0OConfigUpdate bak Upload X Close Figure 194 Software Upgrade Server Console RECOVERING A PASSWORD Upon request Pelco can issue a password recovery code that is valid for 24 hours on the machine for which it was issued only To do so the original buyer of the system typically the dealer must contact Pelco Technical Support The serial number and order number or invoice number under which the unit was originally purchased as well as the MAC address and exact date time listed on the password recovery screen must be provided This must be done in writing by fax and the request must be accompanied by a letter from the current ow ner of the system stating the following information under penalty of perjury e He she is the legal owner of the system The password for the system was lost He she is req
152. begin playback 4 Drag the same camera from the Site tree onto a different view panel while video is playing C2630M B 4 08 91 Exporting Video Users with export access rights Power Users and Administrators by default can export sections of prerecorded video to magnetic or optical media The DX8100 must be in the Playback or Search mode to export video You cannot access Export in Live mode To export video or still images to a CD R RW or DVD R RW you must have Nero Express 7 Essentials software installed on the DX8100 DVR This section describes how to export video and includes the following topics Exporting Bookmarked Video Regions Inserting and Removing a USB Flash Drive on page 95 Enabling the Deinterlacing Filter on page 97 Mapping and Disconnecting a Network Drive on page 97 Performing the Export on page 99 Stopping an Export While in Process on page 104 EXPORTING BOOKMARKED VIDEO REGIONS You can bookmark multiple regions of video along the timeline for export Bookmarked regions are designated with start point and end point bookmarks M ultiple regions can be bookmarked along a single 24 hour timeline but only a single channel can be exported at a time Bookmarked regions are listed in the Export Video dialog box at the time of export 92 The following figure shows the DX8100 bookmark controls Figure 61 Bookmark Controls The following table describes the bookmark controls Table Z Bookmark Controls
153. bnail contains the first image of recorded video for the listed time period Double clicking a thumbnail will cause it to begin playing Click Prev and Next to move backward and forward through thumbnails To view a video thumbnail 1 Click a thumbnail The thumbnails search parameters date and time are displayed below the search grid The thumbnail s search start time is a few seconds ahead of the search start time you entered Sa lt x Fle Edt View Export Favorte Help allio 1 111110 PELLO no ias AVI a gt Figure 60 Thumbnail Images M arking Pixel Changes To locate playback at the start of the first image click NO The video scene is played back and displayed in reverse Click u to pause the video playback when the beginning of the first recorded is reached Click J gt Playback starts and the video scene is displayed Click to remove the thumbnail results WORKING WITH SPECIAL VIEW AND SEARCH M ETHODS The DX8100 allows you to do the following 90 View video in the deinterlaced mode View live and playback video simultaneously View search export and print backed up video You must use the DX8100 Client application to view search export and print backed up video For more information refer to the DX8100 Client Application manual This section describes how to use special view and search methods and includes the following topics Viewing Vide
154. board Control Action J oystick Activity within the DX8100 Site tree Up down direction M oves the cursor vertically through each element in the Site tree Anelement is a DX8100 site camera within each DX8100 site or Alarm ATM POS and relay within each DX8100 site If an element is expanded the joystick moves the cursor vertically through the objects of that element Left right direction Right Expands an element to display objects contained under the element Left Collapses an element and hides its objects Select a camera unit at the tree Number CAM Expands the Site tree and selects the first camera in each DX8100 site For example if there are two sites with one named DX8100 site 1 and the other named DX8100 site 2 e Pressing 1 CAM expands the Site tree for DX8100 site 1 and selects the first camera It does not assign the selected camera to a view pane or display video Pressing 2 CAM expands the Site tree for DX8100 site 2 and selects the first camera It does not assign the selected camera to a view pane or display video F2 F3 ON OFF Cameras are assigned numerically 1 16 to the respectively numbered video These controls display DX8100 video in the following divisions F2 OFF Single division view F3 MOM 4 division view AUX ON 9 division view AUX OFF 16 division view Repeatedly pressing a button causes the DX8100 to cycle through the display of the remaining panels To place the KBD300A in the shift mod
155. box select a PTZ preset 1 150 for the camera to move to To force a PTZ pattern to be activated in response to video loss input detected by the source camera 1 Click the Linked Camera Pattern button to select this option 2 In the Pattern drop down box select a PTZ pattern 1 4 to be activated on the camera The selected camera must support PTZ functions and at least one PTZ preset pattern must be defined for this function to work 6 Click Apply Video Loss Link Settings Video Loss Channel CAMERAO1 Camera Name Linked PTZ Setting LORO Comes Enel CAMERADI Linked Camera Preset Not in use y C Linked Camera Paltem Na SPRA Figure 107 Event PTZ Link Settings Linking Presets and Patterns to Video Loss Events C2630M B 4 08 127 SCHEDULE SETUP The DX8100 provides extensive scheduling capabilities Flexible recording schedules can be established for daily weekday weekend or individual day recording Recording time can be broken up into increments of one half hour and each increment can be scheduled to record continuously or in response to an alarm motion or ATM POS event Users with Power User access and higher can create recording schedules 128 This section describes how to setup recording schedules and includes the following topics Accessing the Schedule on page 128 Setting Up the Camera Recording M ode on page 129 Creating Yearly Recording Schedules on page 132 Creating M ont
156. box is available Verify that the ATM POS device name displayed in the Device Name text box is the correct device for the search 81 82 7 Click Start Search The POS Search Table is populated with POS transaction data 01 10 2006 y LL J 00 J Transaction Information JV Device Name aTm POS01 O I Transaction Number m Data Information TF Transaction with Exception Only T Line Item T Action Code z F Exception Code F Data Overlay Enable Device Name 2 ATM POSO1 16 2 ATM POSO1 17 2 ATM POSO1 18 2 ATM POSO1 19 2 ATM POSO1 21 Zz ATM POSO1 22 2 ATM POSO1 23 2 ATM POSO1 24 Figure 52 POS Transaction Search by Device Name Displaying POS Data Discovered by Device Name To display a POS transaction and its associated video 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click alk 2 On the Search control click O The POS search view is displayed Start Search Stop Search 0 2006 1 10 9 3 36 2006 1 10 9 3 50 2006 1 10 9 3 59 2006 1 10 9 4 12 2006 1 10 9 4 36 2006 1 10 9 4 44 2006 1 10 9 4 53 2006 1 10 9 5 0 3 Perform a POS search by device name For information about performing a search by ATM POS device name refer to Searching POS Data by Device Name on page 81 4 Inthe POS Search Table click a transaction The transaction data is displayed in the Data window 5 Onthe playback control click Play The video recorded for the selected POS trans
157. cece cect eee cece o rr 105 Viewing System Health Status s siit iaee iiaa a i e ere WENE T AEA PAASA REE EEE EEE E e EEE EEE Hens 106 Working with System Health Status View cece cece reece o EEEE 107 Working with System Health Log VieW 0ooococococonco corro 108 Setting Up theDX8100 2 05 guile tec a E E A AA A AAA AS AE E AES AO AES AATA 109 Accessing the Setup Modei socia riton nedir neirinne rar bt a ta ic 109 Understariding the Setup Dialog BOX tc cen a a A a a AA Rien a 110 A naracis iep ea eee sede ceed da eine Deek ad peed Dead fae i one einen beta EiT 111 Basie Camera Setup ry bcs nase E 111 Motion Detection S tup vs A A hastens does 113 O nai A eam Pra eee Renae Miata tea E a She ria AE 114 Listening LOLIVGAUGIO metas Rata nadaa dolar newton ate uation Na 116 Configuring Video Loss Detection iii c cece eect teen ere rr 117 Applying Settings tocall Cameras riis tics A A Mad ater Wek Bt a T 118 A A A dane eid bs denuded ean s 118 Configuring Basic Relay and Alarm SettingS 0 0 cece cece cece terete cere nett e renee eee ere ne Eee Ene eng 119 Linking Relay Outputs to External Events 0 0 0 cece cece eet EEEE 120 Linking Cameras to Record in Response to External EventS 00 0 cece cect ete e ee ete eee eset e nent teen e eee e ener e ens 122 Linking PTZ Presets and Patterns to External Events ccc cect este eee rete rr 124 Scheduie Setup i al Dis AAA E A Gh Miata EI obits delo oie hohe ol 128 Accessing the Schedule
158. ces use Port 1 to Port 4 For information on interfacing ATM POS devices to the DX8100 using COM 1 refer to Setting Up COM 1 Port Properties on page 163 4 Configure the following port settings using the drop down box e Interface mode Baud rate Parity Data bits Stopbits 5 Click Apply SETTING UP ATM POS DEVICE PROPERTIES The DX8100 allows you to connect up to 16 ATM POS devices and provides two ATM POS device modes Single Mode Use this option to interface up to four ATM POS devices to the DX8100 Multi Mode Use this option to connect up to 16 ATM POS devices to the DX8100 over one serial connection Single M ode and M ulti M ode can be combined and allows you to connect up to 16 ATM POS total devices to the DX8100 For information about installing the ATM POS equipment for each mode refer to the DX8100 Installation manual C2629M This section describes how to configure ATM POS device properties and includes the following topics Selecting the ATM POS Device Mode and Communications Options Setting Up an ATM POS Data Format e Assigning a Data Format to an ATM POS Device on page 173 Setting Up ATM POS Exceptions on page 174 e Verifying the ATM POS Communication Connection on page 179 e Recording ATM POS Events on page 180 Selecting the ATM POS Device Mode and Communications Options This section describes the complete process for configuring DX8100 ATM POS device communication options For additiona
159. click Cancel to abort the deletion Click Apply SETUP Users with Power User access and higher can save configuration settings using the system export feature Previously saved settings can be loaded into the DVR using system import This section describes how to configure system options and parameters including the following topics C2630M B 4 08 Accessing the System Page on page 202 Working with the Export Feature on page 202 Working with the Import Feature on page 203 Using System Logs on page 204 Selecting the Language on page 206 Setting the System Time on page 207 Selecting the Video Format on page 208 Working with Ctrl Alt Del Function on page 208 Setting Up Auto Reboot on page 209 Specifying the Data Retention Time Limit on page 209 Working with Online Help on page 210 201 ACCESSING THE SYSTEM PAGE To access the System page 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click C The System page is displayed WORKING WITH THE EXPORT FEATURE The DX8100 provides an import and export feature that allows you to save and reload DX8100 configuration settings You can save your DX8100 DVR configuration settings by exporting them to a specific storage media and location You can reload a specific configuration profile by importing its configuration file NOTE The DX8100 Export feature backs up all configuration settings to the target device However the target device setting
160. click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed In the Communication Port drop down box select a port COM 1 or Port 1 to Port 4 In the selected device drop down box select an ATM POS device In the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration page is displayed Click the Diagnostics tab In the ATM POS Information section select the ATM POS device in the Device ID drop down box 179 7 Do the following a Verify that transaction data is displayed in the ATM POS Raw Data View area b Verify that transaction data as interpreted by the DX8100 is displayed in the Result Box General Settings Data Format Text to Screen dvanced m ATM POS Information Port Com Mode Single Mode Device ID JaTM POS 0 EA ATM POS Name ATM POSO1 Protocol POS GENERAL Data Format ER 650 The Diagnostics Result Box contains the parsed information recevied from the ATM POS device All Clear Result Box START TRANSACTION DVR DATE Y M D 2005 07 29 DVR TIME H M S 16 14 02 ADD ITEM ADD ITEM ADD ITEM ADD ITEM ADD ITEM Recording ATM POS Events Diagnostics ATM POS Raw Data View WELCOME CHOCOLATE MILK 8 0Z 0 49 0 59 8 35 0 67 3 02 ii 7 29 2005 9 13 22 0042 ITHANK YOU TAX ITOTAL Apply Cancel Figure 156 Verifying the ATM POS Communication Connection To view POS recorded da
161. client application system M odels range from an 8 channel single 250 GB hard disk drive HDD unit to a 32 channel unit with up to 3 TB of storage DX8100 software runs on two platforms The DX8100 DVR server software runs on the DX8100 Series DVR The DX8100 Client Application software runs on a personal computer PC and allows you to log on and operate the DX8100 DVR server system from your local PC Fully implemented networking capabilities allow remote administration playback and export using the accompanying client application Live viewing is supported on a variety of client platforms including Internet browsers and pocket PC compatible hand held devices Versatile high speed search operations include time and date event list thumbnail and intelligent pixel searching Extensive scheduling features allow customizing of weekday weekend and special event recording The DX8100 provides a graphical user interface GUI allowing you quick and efficient access to all setup and operations functions Scheduled or manual backup can be performed using a number of optical external and mapped network drive options An online Help system allows you quick access to information about how to configure and operate the DX8100 server and DX8100 client application The DX8100 also supports the following PC based applications DX8100 Client Emergency Agent DX8100 Viewer DX8100 Mobile Client on page 12 DX8100 Web Client on page 13
162. clients on a network Client and server ports must be identical 4 Click OK 5 Click the Apply button at the bottom of the screen DELETING CLIENTS FROM THE NOTIFICATION LIST To delete a client from the emergency notification list 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 2 The Notification page is displayed C2630M B 4 08 217 3 Do the following a In the Emergency Agent Setup section select a client from the list b Click Delete The selected client is deleted 4 Click Apply LINKING CAMERAS TO CLIENT EMERGENCY AGENTS After clients have been added cameras must be configured to notify individual clients about an event A single camera can be linked to one or more client emergency agents Up to 32 IP addresses can be assigned to each camera The DX8100 can transmit up to 10 IP addresses simultaneously To link a camera to one or more clients 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click The Notification page is displayed 3 Inthe Camera Setup section click a camera button Camera 1 32 The Emergency Agent Selection dialog box opens 4 Click the check box to select the name of the client site you want to notify when a motion alarm or video loss event is detected by this camera 5 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for up to 32 cameras on the current site 6 Click the Apply button at the bottom of the screen 7 Confi
163. cocccoccncn cr 214 Delete a Mapping Sequences cissi ar A Ae mage PARIT a ad de and 215 Basic E mail Notification Setups acia a A A A o ee A 220 A E NOS 221 Add User to E Mail Group ocios o a a A A A EEEN EEES aE o cond 225 Remove User from E Mail Group ess acdsee canas a a nto iaa ad dape RES abla 226 9 10 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 Modify Mm A A a ES 227 Sending E MailStoulndividualS viciado cia a akan eee rags aaalw ia ls webs 228 Sending E malls to Groups vs neta Lot eine ps A A A di let edad 229 Software Upgrade Server Console ririri contadora dieaeae Pda pedi dee debds penesad aa oenagn denis ta ehiaw Obs 230 Select U parade Package irc a aby dou A AS AAA din 230 O A dgenad uses boii abide enaa a eeni ae eri a ini 231 Upgrade Package Information li A E A E ERLEEN a asii 231 Selecting the Local DVR left and Remote DVR right Update 00o0ooococcococonoccrroro rr rr 232 Upgrade Confirmation Dialog BOX vesssria cere ae ce ic ia E end A Tenney DA Dd A cb a de de 232 DX8100 Update Dialog BOX Fiat cias ll e a a id a o Pl adas 233 Software Upgrade Server Console nasaia EEEE 233 Password Recovery Dialog BOX 2 0 0 cece Enter EEA en nnn EEI Dea nee 234 Accessing the DX8100 Front Panel 0 cece cece EEEE 234 DX8100 Filter Tab Locations ccoo e a ad o lala eee dins 235 Removing the Al a A A ti 235 C2630M B 4 08 Listof Tables A Parts of the DX8100 Application
164. com 1509001 Australia Finland France Germany Italy Macau The Netherlands Russia Singapore South Africa Spain Sweden United Arab Emirates United Kingdom United States
165. cribes how to edit a schedule to change its profile or delete a schedule The following topics are included Changing an Existing Schedule Profile Deleting an Existing Schedule Profile on page 137 Changing an Existing Schedule Profile To change a profile 1 2 33 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click C The Schedule page is displayed Click the M onth View tab if it is not currently selected In the drop down box select the type of schedule you want to change Options are as follows All Days Weekdays Weekends Custom M ode Select the schedule profile from the drop down box Using your mouse assign new recording modes and times for each camera you want to schedule Refer to Setting Up the Camera Recording M ode on page 129 for instructions Click Save Click Apply C2630M B 4 08 9 Click the Apply button at the bottom of the screen O View Year View O hal Once Per Month Finish on End Date New 3 Save Delete K Once Per Year Start or 2005 End 07 2005 P Apply El ll Record Mode JE Normal J Motion Back July 2005 Next Fea ce Da Ea JE Alarm FP arm Pos Figure 117 Month View Page Deleting an Existing Schedule Profile To delete a schedule profile On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 1
166. crs cre eorex ees co cr Alarm Record Link Settings Alarm Channel ALARMO1 Alarm Name AlarmO1 r Enable Record on Source Alarm Event C15 C16 Fer elle Jl e Jl e fl es 07 0 elco en cre crs cra c17 c18 cia c20 c21 c22 c23 c24 c25 c c27 c28 c29 c30 cat c32 ATM POS Record Link Settings ATM POS Address arras 7 ATM POS Name pmo p Enable Record Live on Source ATM POS Event Je ejer eo 9 010 es ce 617 cra cra c20 c21 c22 cea 024 c25 cas car c28 c28 cao cai c32 r Video Loss Record Link Settings Video Loss Channel cameraor Camera Name Camera 1 p Enable Record on Source Video Loss Event Per elle ce 05 f 05 e C17 C18 C19 C20 C21 22 la la El Cancel Apply Figure 149 Event Recording Link Settings Page 14 In the ATM POS Record Link Settings area do the following a Inthe ATM POS Address drop down box select an ATM POS01 address to switch the address set for the associated Regcom box b In the Enable Record Live on Source ATM POS Event area click a camera to link the camera to the ATM POS address c Click Apply C2630M B 4 08 15 Click Schedule The Schedule setup page is displayed
167. cted KBD300A and dome devices only displays device configuration information ATM POS devices allows you to configure ATM POS device options and parameters for the selected device a Install Protocol installation button that opens the Protocol Install dialog box The Protocol Install dialog box allows you to do the following e View the current device protocols already installed e Update the device protocols Interface M ode Interface mode drop down box that allows you to select the serial data standard for the selected device The DX8100 supports COM 1 RS 232 and Port 1 to Port 4 RS 422 RS 485 O O Baud Rate Baud rate drop down box that allows you to select the baud rate for each device Available baud rates are as follows 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 28800 38400 57600 or 115200 Q Parity Parity drop down box You select the parity for none odd or even O Data Bits Data bits drop down box Configure the number of data bits for 5 6 7 or 8 O Stop Bits Stop bits drop down box Select the number of stop bits for 1 or 2 The following table lists the ports and the associated serial data communication standard they support ForCOM1 RS 232 is the default serial data standard For Port 1 to 4 RS 422 and RS 485 are the available serial data standards Table AR DX8100 Ports and Serial Data Communication Standards Port Serial Data Standard Supported
168. ctivation Period Camera Relay 01 y 3 Seconds v 4 Camera02 Relay 03 13 Seconds Camera03 CameraD4 3 0 lt Camera05 J CameraQ6 No Link Y No Link CameraD No Link Y No Link Camera08 No Link vo Link y To activate combo box you should link lt Relay gt with lt motion gt in the linking setup E Figure 127 Linking Relays to M otion Detection C2630M B 4 08 147 The following table describes the available options Table AK M otion Activated Relay Settings Option Result Disable Relay will not activate when motion is detected Follow Event Relay will activate at the exact moment that motion is detected 1 3 5 10 15 and 20 Seconds Sets the amount of time the relay will remain active after motion has been detected Configuring Advanced Alarm Activated Relay Output To configure an alarm relay output 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 In the Setup dialog box click C The Schedule page is displayed 3 Click the Configure Relays button The Configure Relays dialog box opens 4 Click the Alarm tab if it is not already selected 5 Configure each relay that is linked to an alarm a Click the drop down box to select a relay b Select a relay time value from the Activation Period drop down box Motion Alam ATM POS Video Loss Alarm Input Relay Output Activation Period
169. d video These controls display DX8100 video in the following divisions F2 OFF Single division view F3 MOM 4 division view AUX ON 9 division view AUX OFF 16 division view INSTALLING OR UPDATING DEVICE PROTOCOLS The DX8100 uses dynamic link library DLL files to support the various ATM dome and keyboard device protocols The DX8100 is shipped with a default set of protocols and devices for Pelco and other manufacturers As new devices or updates are made available the DX8100 allows you to install new or update existing device protocols to support the devices DLL files for Pelco devices supported by the DX8100 are provided by Pelco DLL files for other manufacturer devices supported by the DX8100 are provided by the respective vendor To install or update a device PTZ POS or keyboard in the DX8100 1 Insert the CD containing the Pelco DLL files in the DX8100 CD drive 2 In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed 3 Click Install The Protocol Install dialog box opens 4 Click Browse and locate the DLL files for the device 5 Click Update 6 Click Exit C2630M B 4 08 183 DATA BACKUP SETUP Video data recorded on the DX8100 can be backed up to a variety of media The backup process involves selecting a specific time range for archival and the type of media to be used The primary difference between backing up and exporting video is performing
170. dd to Favorites eee Building 6 Day Shift Figure 11 Favorites M enu List C2630M B 4 08 41 ORGANIZING FAVORITES IN FOLDERS As your list of favorites grows you can keep them organized by creating folders You can organize your camera views by site name user name and so forth For example you could create a folder named Day Shift for displaying camera views for the day shift Creating a Favorites Folder To create a favorites folder 1 From the DX8100 menu bar click Favorite gt Organize Favorites The Organize Favorites dialog box opens Organize Favorites E xi Favorites note FB Building 6 Day Shift fA Building 6 Evening Shift Create Folder Rename Move to Folder Delete Folder amp File Note Figure 12 Organize Favorites Dialog Box 2 Click Create Folder A new folder is added to the favorites area 3 To name the folder do one of the following a If the new folder name is already selected type the name of the folder or b Ifthe new folder name is not selected 1 Click the new folder 2 Type the name of the folder The new folder is listed in the Favorites area of the Organize Favorites dialog box and in the Favorites menu Organizing Favorites in Folders To organize existing favorites into folders 1 Create a favorites folder For information about creating a favorites folder refer to Creating a Favorites Folder 42 C2630M B 4 08 2 From the DX810
171. diately The DX8100 time is synchronized to the NTP time server NTP Server O pool ntp org 81 91 70 122 Add Edit Delete Difference 476 seconds beyond Synchronize Clock Immediately p Figure 140 Manually Synchronizing the DX8100 Time Setting Up Automatic Time Synchronization You can configure the DX8100 to be automatically synchronized to a NTP time server You can also set the synchronization interval from zero to 23 hours and 59 minutes In this case you have to enable the NTP service and synchronize time in intervals options To automatically synchronize the DX8100 to an external time server 1 2 3 C2630M B 4 08 On the DX8100 toolbar click Setup The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page In the Setup dialog box click Network The Network page is displayed Click the NTP tab The NTP page is displayed In the NTP Server drop down box select a NTP server For information about adding a NTP time server referto Adding a NTP Time Server on page 156 Do the following a To synchronize the DX8100 upon startup click the Auto start Synchronize When System Starts check box b Click the Synchronize Time in Intervals H M check box c In the Synchronize Time in Intervals H M spin box set the interval in hours and minutes d Click the Enable NTP Service check box IV Auto start Synchronize when system starts F DB Overwrite Enable NTP Service Figure 141 Automatically Synchronizi
172. e Onthe KBD300A keyboard press the SHIFT button The LED indicator should be on C2630M B 4 08 Working in Playback M ode Recorded video can be played back one channel at a time on the DX8100 Like live video recorded video is viewed from the camera view panels on the main screen Refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 28 for information on view panels Only users with playback access rights Standard User by default and higher are allowed to view recorded video Playback video can also be displayed in full screen view For information about displaying playback video in full screen view refer to Displaying Playback Video in Full Screen View on page 27 This section describes how to use the Playback mode and includes the following topics Accessing Playback M ode e Assigning Cameras to View Panels Playback On Screen Display OSD Playback Controls on page 66 Playback Timeline on page 68 Playing Back Video by Time on page 69 e Playing Back Video by Event on page 70 Operating Playback Digital Zoom on page 70 e Viewing Video in the Deinterlaced M ode on page 91 e Viewing Live and Playback Video Simultaneously on page 91 ACCESSING PLAYBACK MODE To access the Playback mode On the DX8100 toolbar click Live ASSIGNING CAMERAS TO VIEW PANELS To assign a camera to a view panel 1 Drag a camera from the Site tree onto a camera view pane 2 Repeat this process
173. e 45 notification e mail 117 emergency agent 117 Notification page 216 NTP Time Server 13 0 online Help 210 on screen display add instant recordicontoOSD 46 customizing 45 overview 24 44 selections 45 Audio Recording Background Color Camera Name 239 Instant Recording POS PTZ Select All Site Name Video Recording operating modes function 27 Display Search Setup instant record starting and stopping 46 instant recording 45 live recording 47 operation and configuration user access level 17 overriding other users 109 P P protocol 51 pan tilt and zoom PTZ control panel 22 pan tilt and zoom control enabling 44 focus command using 51 operating 47 48 preset programming 51 programming guidelines 51 protocols camera support 47 pan tilt and zoom indicator 44 pane panel background color 24 channel camera assignment to 30 configuring 29 division display format 30 division selection of 29 hidden panels automatically cycling through 31 hidden panels manually cycling through 31 live playback video display of 22 navigating between 29 30 overview 28 pane expanding and collapsing 31 site name displayed in 24 video viewing 110 parity 164 165 password recovery 23 pattern activating 51 53 54 clearing 51 55 overview 53 programming 51 53 programming starting 54 programming stopping 54 protocols PTZ enabled cameras 53 PC client application server connections number of 200 Phase Alternatin
174. e Mode This is the default setting Multi Mode Click the drop down arrow and select M ulti M ode Device Configuration xj General Settings Data Format Text to Screen Advanced Diagnostics Connection Port COM1 Device Type ATM POS Device Mode Mut Mode pS Single Mode The device mode determines how many devices can be connected to the connection port Device Information Port Status Dpened Device Protocol ATM POS Apply a Cancel Figure 144 Device Configuration Page C2630M B 4 08 165 5 In the Device Configuration page do the following a Click Data Format The Data Format List page is displayed By default the ER 650 data format is displayed You can modify the ER 650 data format or create a new one x General Settings Data Format Text to Screen Advanced Diagnostics m Data Format List This page is where you configure the data format transaction monetary time and character options Data Format Name Add Edit Delete 4 MEOR IANT The options and parameters configured at this page determines how data from ATM POS terminals is interpreted This information is used to separate the data stream into individual transactions and separate the various fields within the transactions Every field format must match that of the selected ATM POS device especially the month format Apply o Cancel Figure 145 Data Format List Page
175. e Rate 30 ImagestSecond v 30 ImagesiSecond Pre Alarm Image Quality Pre Event Image Quality BEST BEST Alarm Image Quality Event Image Quality BEST X BEST X Pre Alarm Pre Event 30 Seconds X zo Seconds aa Post Alarm Post Event feo Seconds aa so Seconds J Follow Event Figure 120 Examples of Custom Camera Settings 139 140 The following table describes the settings for the supported modes Table AF Camera Settings for the Supported Recording M odes Normal Motion Alarm ATM POS Image Resolution Image Resolution Image Resolution Image Resolution Frame Rate Frame Rate During M otion Frame Rate During Alarm Frame Rate During ATM POS Image Quality Pre M otion Frame Rate Pre Alarm Frame Rate Pre ATM POS Frame Rate Best High Normal Low Lowest Pre M otion Image Pre Alarm Image Pre ATM POS Image Quality Best High Quality Best High Quality Best High Normal Low Lowest Normal Low Lowest Normal Low Lowest Motion Image Quality Alarm Image Quality ATM POS Image Quality Best High Normal Best High Normal Low Best High Normal Low Low est Low Lowest Lowest Pre M otion 1 60 sec Pre Alarm 1 60 sec Pre Event 1 60 sec Post M otion 1 180 sec Post Alarm 1 180 sec Post Event 1 180 sec This field appears for information purposes only To change this setting refer to Configuring the Frame Rate on page 140
176. e audio REC Indicates camera recording mode and status A blinking REC indicator signifies event recording Green indicates normal recording e Blue indicates motion recording e Red indicates alarm recording e Yellow indicates ATM POS recording e Purple indicates video loss recording Black on white background indicates instant recording Site Designator Lists the number and name of the current site Camera Designator Lists the number and name of the current camera On Screen PTZ Control 00O Instant Recording Facilitates mouse control of PTZ functions Refer to Operating the On Screen PTZ Controls on page 47 Starts stops instant recording if enabled 44 C2630M B 4 08 CUSTOMIZING THE ON SCREEN DISPLAY OSD Users with Guest User access and higher can add and delete on screen display items To customize the on screen display 1 From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt OSD and then select the items you want to add to or delete from the OSD Items include Site Name Camera Name Video Recording Audio Recording PIZ e Instant Recording POS e Select All displays all items in each pane e Background Color ESTO File Edit view Export Favorite Help gt v Ste nane R Log gt y Camera Name Resolution gt y Video Recording Cycle Views Setup gt y Audio Recording Extended View v PTZ v Index View v Instant Recording System
177. e for that specific day and the configured time constraints 2 Under the Backup Start Time click the Time drop down boxes simultaneously select the time you want the backup schedule to Start 3 Under the Backup Time Range click the Day drop down boxes Select the day you want the backup schedule to start and the day you want the backup schedule to stop 4 Under the Backup Time Range click the Time drop down boxes Select the time of day you want the backup schedule to start and the time you want the backup schedule to stop Inthe Channel Record Type section select the channel record type as follows 1 Click the All or Clear button to select or clear all of the channels simultaneously or click channels 1 32 individually to select or deselect a channel 2 Click the Categories drop down box to select the type of recording The backup schedule includes only the type of recording you have specified C2630M B 4 08 6 Optional In the Device Selection section map a network drive for backup by performing one of the following a Click the Map a network drive button The Windows M ap Network Drive dialog box opens For more information about mapping a network drive refer to M apping a Network Device on page 189 1 Specify the drive letter for the connection and to which folder you want to connect 2 Click Finish The mapped drive is displayed in the Device Selection area under Remote drives or b Click
178. e item are displayed in the POS Search Table 7 Inthe POS Search Table click a transaction The transaction data is displayed in the Data window Start for 13 2006 J ov 3 23 0 3 End 0 13 2006 07 73 foo Transaction Information T Device Name ETM POS jo F Transaction Number J r Data Information I Transaction with Exception Only 5a IV Line Item CHIPS I Action Code cn 9 I Exception Code BANANA Start Search Stop Search 5 eve nane Tires betefime exepte 0 TRANSACTION NUMBER 556 DATE 1 13 2006 TIME 7 26 19 BAKED CHIPS 3 48 FROZEN CORN 1 89 ATMIPOSO1 556 2006 1 13 7 26 19 ATM POSO1 557 2006 1 13 7 26 29 ATM POSO1 560 2006 1 13 7 26 59 ATM POSO1 561 2006 1 13 7 27 9 CELERY 0 8 ATM POSO1 563 2006 1 13 7 27 33 EA we ATM POSO1 572 2006 1 13 7 28 59 TOTAL 6 76 ATM POSO1 13 2006 1 13 7 43 54 Figure 57 Transactions that Contain a Unique Line Item SEARCHING FOR TRANSACTIONS BY ACTION CODE The DX8100 allows you to search for and display ATM POS transactions by action code To use an action code to search transaction data the action code must be created before recording the transaction data If the transaction data is recorded before the action code is defined the action code will not find the data structure within the transaction data The search criteria is based on the following Channel The camera that captured the video and is linked to t
179. e magnified playback image to the left O Pan Right Allows you to move the magnified playback image to the right O Pan Up Allows you to move the magnified playback image up O Pan Down Allows you to move the magnified playback image down Q Zoom Restore Allows you to return the zoomed image to the original size C2630M B 4 08 ZOOM USING THE MOUSE The DX8100 allows you to use the mouse to drag a selection region rectangle around a specific area of a pane and to zoom the selection in and out A small rectangle about 0 25 inches 6 4 mm square provides a x6 zoom factor As the selection area increases in size the zoom in out factor decreases x5 x4 x3 x2 and x1 e Ifyou use the mouse to select an area about 0 25 inches 6 4 mm in size the zoom feature performs as follows If zooming in the zoom factor is at x6 The selected viewing area is zoomed to the largest size If Zooming out the zoom factor is at x6 The selected viewing area is zoomed to the original size Ifyou use the mouse to select the entire pane the zoom feature performs as follows If zooming in the zoom factor is at x1 In this case the selected viewing area is slightly enlarged You will have to perform many zoom in operations to arrive at the largest zoom size If zooming out the zoom factor is at x1 In this case the selected viewing area is slightly reduced You will have to perform many zoom out operations to arrive at the original size
180. e maximum recording rate and resolution 30 ips at 4CIF NTSC or 25 ips at 4CIF PAL enable one camera from each group while the other three cameras in the group are disabled For information about the various recording rates and resolutions refer to Understanding DX8100 Server M aximum IPS Recording Table Al DX8100 Camera Grouping Model Group Assigned Camera 1 1 4 DX8108 2 5 8 1 1 4 2 5 8 DX8116 3 9 12 4 13 16 To set up the DX8100 to record at the maximum rate and resolution 1 Do one of the following e Onthe DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page e If the Setup dialog box is already open click cam The Camera page is displayed 2 In the Camera Properties section for Group 1 do the following a Select a camera from the drop down box You can also select a camera from the Site tree by clicking on it C2630M B 4 08 b For the camera you want to enable verify that the Disable check box is not selected c For the remaining cameras in the group click the Disable check box to disable the respective camera 3 Repeat step 2 for Groups 2 3 and 4 if applicable 4 Click Apply 5 Click The Schedule page is displayed 6 Verify that the enabled camera from each group is displayed in the site tree Month View Year View fan days Maximum IPS Recording New eee to Once Per Month Once PerYear Start 04 20
181. e properly you must also perform the following tasks e Read the Important Security Information for System Administrators manual and configure the DX8100 to ensure maximum DX8100 server operation security Change the default language if other than English For more information refer to Selecting the Language on page 206 Set the system clock For more information refer to Setting the System Time on page 207 e Identify network parameters For more information refer to Setting Up Network Properties on page 151 e Adda printer if you want to print still video images For more information refer to Printing Images on page 281 If the above steps have not been completed refer to the installation manual supplied with the unit for instructions on installing and configuring your DX8100 NOTE System administrators are recommended to read the Important Security Information for System Administrators manual and configure the DX8100 to ensure maximum DX8100 server operation security This section includes the following topics Upgrade Policy Starting and Shutting Down the DX8100 on page 15 UPGRADE POLICY Pelco s representations regarding product features and performance are limited to those made in the specification sheet and installation operation manual at the time the product was manufactured Pelco does not represent or warrant that any upgrades to product hardware or software will be made available in the future When possible
182. e to ATM POS Events Figure 101 Event Recording Link Settings Alarm Record Link Settings Section To link multiple cameras to record in response to an ATM POS event 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 29 The Linking page is displayed C2630M B 4 08 123 3 Click the Event Recording Link Settings tab 4 Inthe ATM POS Record Link Settings section do the following a Select an ATM POS address from the ATM POS address drop down box b Click the button for each camera you want to begin recording in response to an ATM POS event 5 Click Apply ATM POS Record Link Settings ATM POS Address ATM POSO1 gt ATM POS Name ATM POSO1 O Se S o e 0J0 0 0 00 61 62 69 64 os 6 Figure 102 Event Recording Link Settings ATM POS Record Link Settings Section Linking Cameras to Record in Response to Video Loss Events To link multiple cameras to record in response to a video loss event 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 29 The Linking page is displayed 3 Click the Event Recording Link Settings tab 4 Inthe Video Loss Record Link Settings section do the following a Select a camera from the Video Loss Channel drop down box b Click the button for each camera you want to begin recording in response to a video loss event 5 Click Apply m Video Loss Record L
183. ea is organized into panes and panels much like a window contains panes Video from each camera is displayed in its own viewing pane This section includes the following topics e Working with View Panes and Panels Configuring View Panels on page 29 e Navigating View Panels on page 29 WORKING WITH VIEW PANES AND PANELS The DX8100 displays video from each camera in its own viewing pane e View pane A view pane is a division of a view panel Each view pane contains only a single camera channel Up to 36 view panes can fit in a single view panel View panel A view panel is made up of the entire DX8100 viewing area View panels are divided into multiple panes Each panel can display from one to 36 individual cameras The following figure illustrates how the DX8100 viewing area is structured Figure 3 View Panes and Panel for 4 Division Display 28 C2630M B 4 08 The following table describes the view pane and panel as shown in the figure above Table J View Panes Panel Item Description Shows a view pane for a four division display 2 Shows the view panel which contains view panes CONFIGURING VIEW PANELS The DX8100 can display up to 36 cameras simultaneously in a single panel To select a view panel division 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click EN 2 On the DX8100 toolbar click a view panel division button For information on the view division buttons refer to DX8100
184. ear View To schedule individual days using the Year View 1 From the DX8100 toolbar click YH The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click C The Schedule page is displayed 3 Click the Year View tab The Year View page is displayed 4 Click the day you want to schedule Month View Year View July 2005 Figure 112 Calendar Date Selection 5 Using your mouse select the recording modes and times for each channel you want to schedule For information on selecting a recording mode refer to Setting Up the Camera Recording M ode on page 129 6 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each additional day you want to schedule 7 Click Apply Copying Schedule Attributes to a Different Day To copy the schedule attributes of one day and apply them to a different day 1 From the DX8100 toolbar click kil The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click C The Schedule page is displayed 3 Right click the calendar day you want to copy 132 C2630M B 4 08 4 Select Copy from the quick menu January 2004 SE ER T 580 es ER Esa 0090 900608600 0000660 Oo OREA 33 ciena Revert to daily schedule Figure 113 Year View Calendar Quick M enu Right click the day on the calendar you want to apply the copied schedule attributes Select Paste from the quick menu Click Apply To change a custom schedule day to a regular schedule day right click and select Revert to daily schedule from the quick menu CR
185. eate a new time range to be exported 1 Select the desired row in the Time Range table 2 Double click the Start Day field and then use the spinner buttons to set the start date for the export The start days and times cannot be set later than end days and times 3 Double click the Start Time field and then use the spinner buttons to set the start time for the export 4 Double click the End Day field and then use the spinner buttons to set the end date for the export 5 Double click the End Time field and then use the spinner buttons to set the end time for the export C2630M B 4 08 6 Select the check box next to each time range you would like to export x r Device r Tife Range 5 6 Optical Drive A ster bay tttm end Day End Time E CD RAW Elli 02102004 05 27 07 02 10 2004 07 06 00 f ch01J021004_052700_ O EJCO TEAL CD W552E 2 021020049 10092 021020049 1319546 cho1 o21004 104201 amp DVD R AW O3 0210 2004 16 15 00 Teoe 102004 17 36 40 ch01J021004_161500_ E Not Installed O4 0210 2004 21 28 41 02 10 2004 223900 ch01J021004_212841_ a HDD B 63 Local Drives E Not Installed 2 8 Remote Drives ES Not Installed Delete tem_ Fie Name r Export Format al av C ASF Native C BMP C JPEG C TIF IV Audio Record JV RealTime Image Count f 13 Interval Continuous gt Refresh Create folder cons Figure 72 Export T
186. ection select the check boxes for one or more of the settings you want to apply to all cameras Protocol Camera Security Picture Adjustment M otion Detection Audio Settings and Video Loss Click Apply to All Cameras Click Apply LINK SETUP This section describes how to use the Link page to set up the following Relay and alarm settings Event relay link settings Event recording link settings Event PTZ link settings This section includes the following topics 118 Configuring Basic Relay and Alarm Settings Linking Relay Outputs to External Events on page 120 Linking PTZ Presets and Patterns to External Events on page 124 Linking Cameras to Record in Response to External Events on page 122 C2630M B 4 08 CONFIGURING BASIC RELAY AND ALARM SETTINGS The DX8100 can support up to 32 alarm inputs and 24 relay outputs Eight channel DVRs include 8 alarm and 8 relay terminals while sixteen channel DVRs include 16 of each This section describes how to configure basic relay and alarm settings including the following topics Understanding How Relays and Alarms React to a Power Outage e Configuring DX8100 Basic Relay and Alarm Settings e Configuring Basic Relay Operating Properties e Configuring Basic Alarm Input Operating Properties on page 120 Understanding How Relays and Alarms React to a Power Outage The DX8100 server might experience an external AC power outage that impacts how the relay and alarm features function
187. ed to a lower level user must first be granted to all other higher level users For example export rights must first be granted to the Standard user before they can be granted to a Restricted user C2630M B 4 08 193 Click the user group buttons to enable disable the access right for each access category The access right category is enabled when the button s text is red permission granted and it is disabled when the button s text is white permission not granted Click a button to toggle the access right on and off Repeatedly clicking the Camera Security button cycles through the security levels none low medium and high To modify a user s access rights 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click icon The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click icon The User page is displayed 3 Do one of the following a To grant an access right to a user left click on an access right button above the user s group list The text will toggle from white to red and that permission will be active for that user b To deny an access right to a user left click on an access right button above the user s group list The text will toggle from red to white and that permission will be denied for that user 4 Click Apply ADDING NEW USERS Administrators can create new user accounts and modify existing users this can be done locally on the DX8100 server or remotely from the DX8100 Client Application User names and passwords have the follo
188. eline control Table V Parts ofthe Playback Timeline Control 0 Part Part Currently displayed view panel Selected second Total number of view windows Increase timeline detail Site number Decrease timeline detail Camera number Alarm recording Camera name Normal recording Selected date Motion detection recording Selected hour Timeline slider 9000000000 Selected minute 00001809818 083 Instant recording C2630M B 4 08 PLAYING BACK VIDEO BY TIME This section describes how to play back video by time The time is displayed in 24 hour clock format You can select the time by moving the slider along the timeline This section includes the following topics Starting Playback from a Specific Point in Time Understanding Instant Playback on page 69 STARTING PLAYBACK FROM A SPECIFIC POINT IN TIME To start video playback from a particular point in time 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click 2 Selecta camera in the Site tree You can also select the camera from a view pane if the camera appears in the panel 3 In the Timeline section do the following a In the Date Selection drop down box select the day you want playback to begin b Use the spinner buttons to select the time 4 click gt to begin viewing EY June 2005 Ef Sun Mon TueWedThu Fri Sat 123 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 19 20 21 22 23 26 27 28 29 30 Go to
189. emoving 39 settingup 37 linking and event recording setup 119 live audio 24 44 114 Live View mode 55 local area network LAN 219 logical network ports 153 logs files 24 Backup Export Login ID list with time Network Connections System Failure System On Off Video Loss M Mapping camera 210 maximum record rate 144 menubar 22 menus Edit 24 Export 25 Favorite 25 File 23 file 22 Help 25 View 24 menus shortcut local site 36 relay 36 remote site 36 mode extended view mode C2630M B 3 08 standard view 49 instant record starting 47 instant record starting and stopping 46 instant record stopping 47 instant recording 45 interface 164 live recording 47 Live View mode workingin 55 live view workingin 40 normal recording 45 recording modes scheduled 129 See recording mode monitor extended 32 monitor external 210 motion detection of 120 130 See also relays detection zones 113 emergency e mail notification 218 emergency notification 216 motion event recording mode settingup 130 sensitivity setting 113 multicast enabling 154 multicast using 13 multi event recording 129 multiple event recording 129 multiplexed analog output 210 M UX card displaying real time video 40 output 13 National Television System Committee NTSC 140 network drive disconnecting from 189 network ports logical 153 network requirements connecting DX8000 DVRs 18 DX8000 network properties 14 normal recording mod
190. en view C2630M B 4 08 DX8100 WEB CLIENT The DX8100 W eb Client allows you to view live video and operate pan tilt and zoom PTZ features of cameras attached to DX8100 DVRs Using a standard W eb browser you can remotely monitor up to 16 cameras from up to five DX8100 DVR servers simultaneously Each DX8100 DVR can Support up to 100 Web clients either internally within an organization or externally through the Internet NEW DX8100 FEATURES The DX8100 version 1 2 release includes the following new features C2630M B 4 08 Dual monitor display Multimode device support for up to 16 ATM POS devices System health status and configuration Windows XP embedded Dual MUX card output Customized setting for data retention time 2 Built in audio channels Optional layer 2 multicasting Interoperable with DX8000 DVRs 16 Channel expansion box option Maximum increased storage capacity of 3 TB External storage raid option with DX9200HDDI Increased frame rate for 2CIF and 4CIF recording Standard analog output NTP time server compatible Standard DVD R burner writes to CD R and DVD R media Up to 704 x 480 recording resolution 4CIF Up to 32 camera inputs and outputs with auto termination 13 Getting Started with DX8100 DVR Softw are This section provides information to help you get started using the DX8100 DVR server software You must install your DX8100 Series DVR before using this guide In order for your system to operat
191. ens 92 C2630M B 4 08 Clearing BOOKMARKS ovio ir a a a dd 93 BookM arking and Exporting Multiple Channels 00oooooccccocococ cnc 94 Inserting and Removing a USB Flash Drive cece cece reece rr 95 Installinig a USB Flash DriVe gt doi tania ltda as een dada a alone baiiia ea iune dai 96 Removing USB Flash Drive tela tds dictadas did laa dida 96 Enabling the Deinterlacing Filter iieiaei t deals ida e Td Al A O aia 97 Mapping and Disconnecting a Network Drive oo cic cece cect eter rr 97 Mapping a N etwork Driven cita A an iki ur hha linante ck DARSE do iaa adas 97 Disconnecting a NGtWOrk DIVE ii Chandan Opie da Rite dents oO nina Voda al Cueshe Oui 98 Pertorming the EXPO ii en eae tel wreak aes ova A A A bedi ca eee oat ADE Make 99 Starting anEXpOrt PROCESS o ic dd ALA eta Fate en ADO a ehh di 99 Changing a Bookmarked Time Range 2 cocco E 100 Assigning a Custom Export Video File Name cece c cece cece teeter rr teen rr 101 Selecting the Export FO Matic ai a Da ad E dai enh Kaa dd ES apa aa 102 Exporting a Sequence 0EStIMMADES ccoo iio a Ts dd aa pi Pol 103 Finalizing am Export Process tios a A a AAA ios 103 Stopping an Export While in Process 0 ccc cece cece e tren rene EEE EEE Ee EEE EEE En EE een EEE 104 Working with DX8100 backed up Video oe ccc cc o etree ere eee rr 104 Logs andsHealth Statusi cocineta on apli denis cla pits daa alee ocd vt deal 105 Viewing Logs from the Application WiNdOW
192. eo to a local or remote network device Depending on your system configuration backup devices may include an optical drive such as a CD R or DVD R an external drive or a network drive The DX8100 does not support exporting or backing up to CD RW and DVD RW disks but it does support exporting or backing up to CD R and DVD R disks To select the type of backup device you want to use 1 2 3 On the DX8100 toolbar click kia The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click amp The backup configuration screen opens Click the Add or Instant Backup button The Add Backup Schedule or Backup Now dialog box opens Click the plus sign beside a backup device in the device list Select the check box of the device you want to use M ake sure that the backup media selected is inserted in the drive and the drive is ready If your DX8100 is connected to a network that supports shared folders and drives you can map a network drive by right clicking the Network Drive icon in the device list To map a network drive select Add Network Drive from the quick menu and follow the on screen directions To remove a drive mapping right click the Network Drive icon and select Remove Network Drive VIEW ING BACKED UP VIDEO You must use the DX8100 Client application to view backed up video For more information about viewing backed up video refer to the section titled Viewing and Searching Backed Up Video in the Client online Help or Client Applicatio
193. erate the KBD300A refer to the KBD300A Universal Keyboard Installation Operation manual This section describes the KBD300A operational features and is organized as follows KBD300A Standard M ode Operational Features on page 63 KBD300A Shift M ode Operational Features on page 64 For information about connecting the KBD300A to the DX8100 refer to the DX8100 Installation manual For information about configuring DX8100 data communication settings for the KBD300A refer to Setting Up the KBD300A Keyboard on page 181 KBD300A STANDARD MODE OPERATIONAL FEATURES The KBD300A Standard mode allows you to control certain DX8100 operation features from the keyboard This section describes the KBD300A Standard mode features functions The Standard mode is effective within the DX8100 view pane You can program camera presets and patterns operate the camera PTZ features and assign cameras to panes For detailed information about how to operate the KBD300A refer to the KBD300A Universal Keyboard Installation Operation manual For information about configuring DX8100 data communication settings for the KBD300A refer to Setting Up the KBD300A Keyboard on page 181 The following table describes the KBD300A Standard mode operational features specific for the DX8100 server Table R KB 3004 Standard Operational M ode Features Keyboard Control Action J oystick Controls the camera s PTZ operation Number PRESET short M oves camera to the
194. ered in food stamps WIC and TX TAX tax amount so forth GA PREPAID GAS gasoline prepayment after pumping VD ERROR CORRECT void of last item entered GP GAS PREPAID gasoline prepayment VX VOID correction of entered item within current transaction C2630M B 4 08 175 176 Creating an ATM POS Exception To create an ATM POS exception 1 In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed 2 Inthe Communication Port drop down box select a port Port 1 to Port 4 The device mode option is not available for COM 1 3 In the selected device drop down box select an ATM POS device 4 In the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration page is displayed 5 Click the Advanced tab For information about the Advanced page refer to Setting Up ATM POS Exceptions on page 174 6 In the ATM POS Name drop down box select an ATM POS device General Settings Data Format Text to Screen Advanced Diagnostics ATM POS Name tarmposo1 JATM POSD1 E AAA A r Exception Table Te Any field containing values must all be found or satisfied before a data device exception is generated Exception Name Each data device can trigger the Dx lt 8000 to record at a special rate and for a special length of time gt gt ATM POS Name Action Code aL ALL CODES item or merchandise sold normally User String User Mappi
195. es 36 view panels that can display cameras from up to five connected DVR sites For information on view panels refer to Working with View Panes and Panels on page 28 The DX8100 Series DVR supports triplex operation Triplex operation means that the DX8100 will continuously record even while users view simultaneous live and playback video or modify the system setup To assign a single camera to a view pane 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click EN 2 In the Site tree click the plus sign next to Mio expand the tree if necessary V C2630M B 4 08 3 Do one of the following Toassign a single camera to a view pane drag the camera from the Site tree onto a view pane Toassign all cameras from a single site to the view panes drag B onto a single view pane The default arrangement of cameras is Cameral Camera2 Camera3 from left to right top to bottom 4 Repeat the process in step 3 for up to 36 cameras and up to five DVR sites SETTING UP LINKS The DX8100 allows you to set up links in various configurations You can link multiple alarms and relays to a single camera You can link a single alarm or relay to multiple cameras You can link alarms and relays to cameras by dragging them onto individual camera view panes You can also manually turn a relay on and off from the Site tree This section describes how to set up links and includes the following sections M anually Turning On and Off a Relay on page 37 Link
196. et rennet 75 Reusing the Search Time ROSS racial Ea EO E a E E EE ENTRE EOE E TEE E a E 75 Index Video Search icono tica e a a e Eeay a veu a cis 76 Thumbnail Video Search ocio ra a A o dd a e 711 POS e ln Etc RU a a a on 78 Understanding the POS Search View 00 cece rr 79 Searching and Displaying POS Data by Device Name 81 Searching by POS Transaction Number 0 c cece tree tern dete eee 83 Searching for All Transactions with Exceptions 0 0 ccc c ete cee cere eet EEEE 84 Searching for Transactions That Satisfy Specific Exceptions 0 cece rr 85 Searching for Transactions by Line Item oi kee cect terete rene rere eee EEE Eee Een nee EEE 86 Searching for Transactions by Action Code ise rer i derrer riera Den Cette vas a ad 87 Pixel Vid iii A A A ta EERTE A Ed Odo 88 Searching Video Based on Changes in Screen Pixels 89 Viewing a Video Thumbnail assier di An AAA TEE dias 90 Working with Special View and Search MethodS ccc ccce eect eter renee ere renee ere eee eden dene EEE EEE neg 90 Viewing Video in the Deinterlaced Mode ooo icc cece cece rece r er e ened need eee e debe deere rete nnn eens 91 Viewing Live and Playback Video Simultaneously 20 00 ice eet n tnt t renee 91 Exporting Vidette ac vine a 228 PEO AS A de Maas pnts 92 Exporting Bookmarked Video REGIONS 0 ccc eee e cere ere e reer E NEE E EERE DEEDES EEE DEE EEE EEE EEE 92 Creating BOOKMARKS io dan A cities Bees eee in EAS and Oi Sel ea cea eee heute e
197. etting that when selected displays POS if active for the cameras assigned to a view pane Selectall Selects all of the OSD options Background color Opens a submenu with the following choices Setcolor Opens the Colors palette for selecting or creating a background color Disable background Disables a background color from being shown Log Opens a submenu with the following choices System On Off System failure Export Backup Network connection Login ID list with time Video loss Resolution Opens a submenu with the following choices 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 C2630M B 4 08 Table D View Menu Commands Continued Command Description Cycle Views Setup Opens a submenu with the following choices Dwell time change Opens a submenu with the following choices for assigning permission to a user group allowing the selected user group to change the dwell time Restricted User Group Standard User Group Power User Group Dwell time Opens a submenu of dwell times with the following choices 2Sec 5 Sec 10Sec 30 Sec 60 Sec Extended View Enlarges the video image displayed in the view pane Index View Opens the Event Index pane System Health View Opens a submenu with the following choices Status View Log View Display Deinterlaced Image Selects the deinterlace mode for enhancing the display of video images E
198. ettings Section LINKING RELAY OUTPUTS TO EXTERNAL EVENTS This section describes how to link relay outputs to external events such as motion alarm ATM POS and video loss events The following topics are included Linking Relay Outputs to M otion Events e Linking Relay Outputs to Alarm Events on page 121 Linking Relay Outputs to ATM POS Events on page 121 e Linking Relay Outputs to Video Loss Events on page 122 To access the Event Relay Link Settings page 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 29 The Linking page opens to the Relay and Alarm Settings page 3 Click the Event Relay Link Settings tab Linking Relay Outputs to Motion Events To set relay outputs to activate in response to motion detection events 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 29 120 C2630M B 4 08 3 Click the Event Relay Link Settings tab 4 Inthe Motion Detection Link Settings section do the following a Select a camera channel from the Camera Channel drop down box b Click the button for each relay you want to link to the selected camera You can also drag relays onto cameras in the Site tree while in Live mode main screen 5 Click Apply A AA Q Ee E e e e e a e e e e ca Figure 96 Event Relay Link Settings M otion Detection Link Settings Section Linking Relay Outputs to Alarm Events To set relay o
199. first few characters of the second word in a transaction and the wildcard For example type ora for a line item containing the entry small orange juice The search returns all transactions that contain the word orange Search by abbreviation For example type 6 pk for a line item containing the entry Soda 6 pk The search returns all transactions that contain the abbreviation 6 pk To search for transactions that contain a unique line tem 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click ak 2 Onthe Search control click OM The POS search view is displayed 86 C2630M B 4 08 3 To select a ATM POS device do one of the following Inthe DX8100 Site tree click a camera that is linked to the ATM POS device By default the name of the ATM POS device linked to the selected camera channel is displayed in the Device Name text box In this case the Device Name text box is deselected Do the following 1 In the Transaction Information section click the check box to select Device Name The Device Name text box is available 2 Type the ATM POS device name in the Device Name text box 4 Set the date and time range for the search 5 In the Data Information section do the following a Click the check box to select Line Item The Line Item text box is available b Type the name of the line item in the text box 6 Click Start Search If the device name channel date and time are valid transactions containing the lin
200. fter the search has been completed the DX8100 displays a series of thumbnails below the search grid Each thumbnail contains the first image of recorded video for the specified date and time range period NOTE A pixel search might not detect obvious movement e Viewing the thumbnails For information on how to view the video thumbnail refer to Viewing a Video Thumbnail on page 90 To search video by analyzing changes in screen pixels On the DX8100 toolbar click al On the Search control click E 3 Select a camera from the Site tree E N 4 From the drop down box select the date on which you want to begin your search 5 Select the start and end times to define your search range 6 Using your mouse highlight the areas on the grid that you want to search for pixel changes Hold down the left mouse button and drag to select areas e Hold down the right mouse button and drag to clear areas 7 Adjust the pixel sensitivity threshold M oving the slider to the left decreases sensitivity and moving it to the right increases sensitivity 8 Click Start Wait for the progress line on the status bar to return to Ready 9 Use the icon to show and hide the pixel grid for a clearer view in the search screen LIL EL Figure 59 Pixel Search Screen C2630M B 4 08 89 VIEWING A VIDEO THUMBNAIL Afterthe search has been completed a series of thumbnails appear on the screen below the search grid Each thum
201. g Line PAL 140 ping port 153 240 playback control panel 22 playback timeline 22 port and device communications properties ATM POS device data format 169 mode selecting 164 COM 1 port 162 COM 1 setting up 163 overview 161 RS 232 162 RS 422 RS 485 162 port numbers changing 153 pre alarm recording rate 129 preset activating 51 52 clearing 51 53 guidelines 51 Preset 95 51 Preset 99 51 programming 51 preset tour accessing a preset tour group 59 adding presets toatour 59 60 configuring 59 delete presets fromatour 59 deleting presets fromatour 61 programming 59 printing 14 protocols D P Coaxitron 51 device installing updating 183 PTZ OSD menu control 55 PTZ presets and patterns alarm events linking to 125 ATM POS events linking to 126 motion events linking to 125 video loss events linking to 127 PTZ protocols testing PTZ functionality 112 R reboot automatic automatic reboot 209 record indicator 44 record rate maximum 144 recording mode alarm camera settings supported alarm image quality 140 frame rate during alarm 140 image resolution 140 post motion 140 pre alarm 140 pre alarm frame rate 140 pre alarm image quality 140 ATM POS camera settings supported ATM POS image quality 140 frame rate during ATM POS 140 image resolution 140 C2630M B 4 08 post ATM POS 140 pre ATM POS 140 pre ATM POS frame rate 140 pre ATM POS image quality 140 instant 45 instant disabling 46 instant enabling
202. g a NTP Time Server 4 Inthe NTP Server drop down box select a NTP server NTP Server 1 pool ntp org 80 121 153 135 Add Edit Delete O pool ntp org 81 91 70 122 1 pool ntp ora 80 121 153 135 Difference 2 pool ntp ora 193 140 151 9 Check the difference Synchronize Clock immediately Figure 137 Selecting a NTP Server 5 Click Add Edit Delete The NTP Server List dialog box opens 6 Inthe Server List select a server C2630M B 4 08 157 9 10 Click Edit The Add Edit NTP Server dialog box opens Make the desired change Click OK Click Apply Deleting a NTP Server To delete a NTP time server 1 9 10 On the DX8100 toolbar click YA The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page In the Setup dialog box click E The Network page is displayed Click the NTP tab The NTP page is displayed In the NTP Server drop down box select a NTP server NTP Server 1 pool ntp org 80 121 153 135 Add Edit Delete O pool ntp org 81 91 70 122 1 p pool ntp org 80 121 153 135 Difference 2 pool ntp ora 193 140 151 9 Check the difference Synchronize Clock immediately Figure 138 Selecting a NTP Server Click Add Edit Delete The NTP Server List dialog box opens In the Server List select a server Click Delete The selected server entry is deleted Do one of the following Toaccept the deletion and close the dialog box click OK Toreject the deletio
203. g viewed 2 Indicates the total number of panel pages available Expanding and Collapsing View Panes To expand a view pane to fill the entire panel Double click a view pane The view fills the entire view panel To collapse a view pane Double click the expanded view pane The view pane returns to its default size Manually Cycling Through Hidden View Panels To manually cycle through hidden view panels On the DX8100 toolbar click one of the panel division buttons The view sequences through the view panels For example when you repeatedly click a 4 Division display format EA the DX8100 cycles through each of the eight available view panels Automatically Cycling Through View Panels The DX8100 provides an automatic cycle feature that when selected automatically cycles through each view panel ensuring all cameras get displayed Group permission to change the dwell time is assigned by the Administrator to the following groups Restricted User Group Standard User Group and Power User Group This section describes how to configure the DX8100 to automatically cycle through camera views and includes the following sections Starting an Automatic Cycle View M ode on page 31 Stopping an Automatic Cycle View Sequence on page 32 Selecting User Groups to Set the Cycle View Dwell Time on page 32 Selecting the Cycle View Dwell Time on page 32 Starting an Automatic Cycle View Mode To start the automat
204. ge 2 Click The System page is displayed 3 In the Choose drop down box select a log file 4 Click Save As 5 Select the drive and folder in which you want to store the log file 6 Entera filename for the log information in the space provided Log file names follow standard Windows file naming conventions Alternatively you can view log files by clicking View gt Log and then selecting the desired log file Log files can be opened and printed using a text editing program such as Windows Notepad 7 Click Save Log Information i View Choose DS Log View Save As Figure 172 Exporting a Log File SELECTING THE LANGUAGE The DX8100 interface comes from the factory configured for the English language although the system supports multiple languages Language changes must be configured from both the DVR s operating system and within the DX8100 application To select the appropriate language for your location 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click The System page is displayed 206 C2630M B 4 08 3 Make sure the DVR operating system s regional and language settings have been properly set up Refer to the installation manual for information on regional setup 4 Inthe Language section select the following appropriate language from the Select Language drop down box English French German Italian Polish Portuguese Russian
205. gramming mode e While in PTZ programming mode multiple presets can be programmed until the icon is pressed again To program a PTZ preset 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click EN 2 Drag a camera from the Site tree onto a view panel 3 Click ES 4 Using the on screen PTZ controls and PTZ keypad move the camera to the desired position and adjust the zoom setting Figure 22 Creating a Preset C2630M B 4 08 51 52 5 Using the PTZ keypad select a number for the new preset for example select 1 6 Click Preset to store the preset in the selected memory location 7 Repeat steps 4 6 for each preset you want to program 8 Click again to exit programming mode Figure 23 Programming a Preset ACTIVATING A PRESET Double and triple digit presets can be set or activated by pressing the first digit and then the second digit sequentially For example preset 20 can be selected by clicking the number 2 and then the 0 zero on the PTZ keypad To activate a preset 1 On the DX8100 keypad click a preset number 1 150 on the keypad 2 Click Preset to activate preset The camera repositions to the new preset Figure 24 Activating a Preset C2630M B 4 08 CLEARING A PRESET To clear a preset 1 On the DX8100 keypad click to enter programming mode 2 Click the number of the preset you want to clear from the PTZ keypad 3 Click Cir 4 Repeat steps 2 a
206. group affiliation Users with Admin or Power User access can change name and description properties of lower level users However only Admin level users can change a user s group affiliation To modify a user s properties 1 2 3 5 6 An Administrator level user can also change the group affiliation of users by dragging user names to different groups C2630M B 4 08 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click a The User page is displayed Do one of the following Inthe main user list 1 Click a user name 2 Click Properties The Property dialog box opens Inone of the group lists 1 Click a user name 2 Click Properties The Property dialog box opens Edit the following user properties Username Fullname Description Group Click Apply in the Property dialog box Click Apply in the User Setup screen 195 196 CHANGING USER PASSWORDS Administrators and Power Users can change or reset an existing user s password To change a user s password 1 2 33 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click a The User page is displayed Click a user name in the main user list Click Set Password The Set Password dialog box opens Enter a new password in the New password field Retype the password again in the Confirm new password field Click Apply in the Set Password dialog bo
207. gt Extended View This section describes how to operate playback digital zoom and includes the following topics Zoom Using the Digital Zoom Control e Zoom Using the Mouse on page 72 Panning a Zoomed Image on page 73 e Working in Playback M ode on page 65 e Working in Search M ode on page 74 C2630M B 4 08 ZOOM USING THE DIGITAL ZOOM CONTROL The digital zoom feature is accessible when the DX8100 is in the Playback or Search mode For information on the Playback mode refer to Working in Playback M ode on page 65 For information on the Search mode refer to Working in Search M ode on page 74 To zoom using the digital zoom control 1 To place the DX8100 in the Playback or Search mode do one of the following On the DX8100 toolbar click Live On the DX8100 toolbar click Search 2 click gt to start video playback 3 Use the Digital Zoom control to zoom and pan video playback Figure 44 Playback Digital Zoom Control The following table describes the parts of the Digital Zoom control Table W Parts of the Digital Zoom Control Item Part Description 11 Zoom In Allows you to magnify the entire pane Click the Zoom In button to magnify to the next preset magnification level x1 6 O Zoom Out Allows you to reduce to the previous preset magnification Click the Zoom Out button to reduce to the previous magnification level Pan Left Allows you to move th
208. gure the server event transmission time For information on setting the duration and transmission interval refer to Setting Server Event Transmission Time SETTING SERVER EVENT TRANSMISSION TIME After clients have been added and linked to cameras you must set the amount of time a server sends images after an event occurs and the interval between sending each image for one of more clients For information on adding clients refer to Adding Client Emergency Agents to be Notified on page 217 For information on linking cameras refer to Linking Cameras to Client Emergency Agents To set the duration for sending images and the transmission interval 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YA The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 2 The Notification page is displayed 3 In the Option section of the Emergency Agent page enter the amount of time in seconds that you want the DX8100 to continue sending still images after an alarm motion or video loss event has been detected 4 Enter the time interval in seconds that you want the DX8100 to wait between sending each still image 5 Click Apply EMERGENCY E MAIL NOTIFICATION SETUP 218 The DX8100 can be configured to send e mail notifications alerting users of motion alarm and video loss events Users with Power User access and higher can configure the notification function Notifications can be sent to a single e mail address or a group of addresses either immediately afte
209. h Mode 0 0 a 15 Y Partssofthe POS Search VIEW ccoo cs er e di a e ee 80 Z Bookmark CONO Sri e IS AA AA E al donned edie de 92 AA Available Backup Spac ws sc g btndveds O ad ita da ta Surtian dere 99 AB JEXpOMt MaS e a a apa dde 102 AC Parts of the DX8100Setup DidlOg BOX inca dais iy i nhera denna dec a aora e Daba ELEDE PSN 110 AD Parts of the Schedule Pages ovocitos 129 AENRECOrd MOS artis o dr ANA a ad A a oo 130 AF Camera Settings for the Supported Recording M odes corr 140 AG Resolution Valles don aos A ia a e a de aa 142 AH DX8100 Server Maximum IPS Recording ccc ccc EEEE 144 Al DX8100 Came ra GTOUDINO Lira a O LA A al AI NRA ERTE ad a Bae ES 144 All Frame Rate Capacity citas comasiiiibares brad atari Diao pj Uleie tee iaag bra derngs loba 146 Ak Motion Activated Relay Settings ipod a di A A A A ERA AA AA ENA 148 AL Alarm Activated R lay SettingS ii a a di a 149 AM ATM POS Activated Relay SettingS 0 ccc cect eter renee rr rr 150 AN Video Loss Activated Relay Settings 0 0 ccc cece cece cono 151 AO TCP IP Ports Used by the DX8100 Arei neva yeni a va en A Waddie dened enka O wena aul 153 AP DX8100 Multicast Requirements and Operation 00 ccc cece cece eee ete rere rr 154 AQ Parts of the Port Device PAYO cio AA DAS AR dads 162 AR DX8100 Ports and Serial Data Communication Standards 0 ccc ceco nr rr 162 AS COML Port Properties bio a a A Meu dow Case bys a DEN TARERE ENA 163 AT Parts of the Data Fo
210. harnel Cameradi gt I Disable Number of Blocks Camera Name Camer al ae Sensitivity Camera Security None P Protocol ecce El PTZ Locking Auto timeout 10 Sec y PTZ Adjustment Test Panl Pan R Titu Tit D Dip Switch Address None z vew r Picture Adjustment Video Loss Iv Loss of synchronization Bee atk p Curent Value T Low level of video i 127 0 128 0 Low Level of Video Detection Operation Time gt Contrast _ A Stat Time PAH EndTime Pars ae po A Apply to All Cameras 127 0 128 0 I Protocol Y Motion Detection Saturation F Camera Security I Audio Settings 127 0 128 0 Picture Adjustment IF Video Loss Default Apply to All Cameras Cancel Apply Figure 90 Camera Motion Detection Setup The DX8100 supports two audio configurations standard audio and optional expanded audio Both of these configurations allow you to configure individual camera channels to listen to and record live audio You can monitor live audio at a local server or listen to live audio from a remote DX8100 server or client system You can play back audio recorded by a camera channel Standard audio input The DX8100 provides two standard audio inputs Line In stereo Mic In mono and one audio output The standard audio inputs are available by default if the optional audio option card is not installed If the optional audio card is installed the standard audio inputs are disabled The standard audio connections are described as follows L
211. he ATM POS device that produced the transaction data Date time The date and time window within which the transaction s were recorded Action code The special two character filter that defines a specific transaction event To search for transactions by action code 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click ak 2 On the Search control click O The POS search view is displayed C2630M B 4 08 87 3 To select a ATM POS device do one of the following a In the DX8100 Site tree click a camera that is linked to the ATM POS device By default the name of the ATM POS device linked to the selected camera channel is displayed in the Device Name text box In this case the Device Name text box is deselected or b Do the following 1 In the Transaction Information section click the check box to select Device Name The Device Name text box is available 2 Type the ATM POS device name in the Device Name text box 4 Setthe date and time range for the search 5 In the Data Information section do the following a Click the check box to select Action Code The Action Code drop down box is available b In the Action Code drop down box select an action code For information about action codes refer to Using Action Codes on page 175 6 Click Start Search If the device name channel date and time are valid transactions containing the line item are displayed in the POS Search Table 7 Inthe POS Search Table click a transact
212. he Emergency Agent Client utility refer to Installing the Client Emergency Agent Application in the DX8100 Client Application manual This section describes how to setup emergency notification and includes the following topics e Accessing the Emergency Agent Notification Setup e Adding Client Emergency Agents to be Notified Changing Client Emergency Agent Properties on page 217 e Deleting Clients from the Notification List on page 217 Linking Cameras to Client Emergency Agents on page 218 Setting Server Event Transmission Time on page 218 ACCESSING THE EMERGENCY AGENT NOTIFICATION SETUP To access the Emergency Agent Notification setup 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 2 The Notification page is displayed 216 C2630M B 4 08 ADDING CLIENT EMERGENCY AGENTS TO BE NOTIFIED After clients have been added cameras must be configured to notify individual clients of an event A single camera can be linked to one or more client emergency agents For information on linking cameras to client emergency agents refer to Linking Cameras to Client Emergency Agents on page 218 To add clients to the Emergency Agent Notification list 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 2 The Notification page is displayed 3 Click Add The Agent Setup dialog box opens 4 Do the following a Enter a name for the clien
213. he Site tree click the plus sign next to the camera to which you want to link relays Click the plus sign next to F to see the list of relay outputs Drag a relay onto a camera pane or a camera listed in the Site tree Linking Relay Outputs to Alarm Inputs To link a relay output to an alarm input 1 2 On the DX8100 toolbar click In the Site tree click the plus sign next to to expand the Alarm tree if needed Relays can also be linked to cameras and alarms on the Link settings page For more information refer to Configuring Basic Relay and Alarm Settings on page 119 Click the plus sign next to F to expand the Relay tree if needed Drag a relay output onto an alarm input in the Site tree C2630M B 4 08 REM OVING LINKS This section describes how to remove links and includes the following sections Removing a Linked Alarm Input from a Camera on page 39 Removing a Linked Relay Output from a Camera on page 39 e Removing a Linked Relay Output from an Alarm Input on page 39 Removing a Linked Alarm Input from a Camera To remove an alarm link from a camera 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click EX 2 In the Site tree click the plus sign next to the camera from which you want to remove an alarm input 3 Left click and drag the alarm outside the Site tree panel and then release the mouse button 4 Repeat the above process for each alarm you want to remove Removing a Linked Relay Output from a C
214. hly or M ultiple Day Recording Schedules on page 133 Creating Single Day Schedules on page 134 Editing Schedules on page 136 Working with Custom Camera Settings on page 138 Configuring the Frame Rate on page 140 Setting Up Advanced Relay Output on page 147 ACCESSING THE SCHEDULE To access the scheduling features of the DX8100 1 From the DX8100 toolbar click kid The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click i The Schedule page is displayed The following figure shows the Schedule page 08 200 7 eL foo 13 205 05434540 e RO a O Tod coded2miatwiom Figure 108 Schedule Page C2630M B 4 08 The following table describes the parts of the Schedule page Table AD Parts of the Schedule Page Item Part Description Schedule Type Drop down Box Selects the type of schedule Options are as follows All days Seven days a week e Weekdays M onday through Friday with the exception of any day assigned in Custom mode e Weekends Saturday and Sunday with the exception of any day assigned in Custom mode Custom M ode Any day such as a holiday Recording Schedule Profile Allows you to do the following Select and apply an existing schedule profile Create and save a new profile e Change an existing profile Delete an existing profile Scheduling Panel Calendar Displays current schedule profile in accordance with the schedule type
215. ic cycle view mode C2630M B 4 08 31 e Onthe DX8100 toolbar click Cycle Views The Cycle Views icon turns blue indicating that the DX8100 is in the automatic cycle view mode The system will cycle through each panel displaying each panel for the configured cycle view dwell time For example if you click the automatic cycle view process starts Stopping an Automatic Cycle View Sequence To stop the automatic cycle view mode On the DX8100 toolbar click Cycle Views The DX8100 stops the automatic cycle view mode Selecting User Groups to Set the Cycle View Dwell Time The DX8100 allows the Administrator to control which user group can change the cycle view dwell time In this case anyone that belongs to a selected user group can change the cycle view dwell time To select a user group to have permission to change the cycle view dwell time 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click EN 2 From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt Cycle Views Setup gt Dwell time change 3 From the Dwell time change submenu choose a user group Selecting the Cycle View Dwell Time To configure the cycle period 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click EN 2 From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt Cycle Views Setup gt Dwell time 3 From the Dwell time submenu choose a time period MAPPING CHANNELS ON THE EXTENDED MONITOR The DX8100 DVR version 1 2 and later comes standard with a Dual Display Card installed By default the DX8100 is set up to dis
216. ice 1 2 3 C2630M B 4 08 In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed In the Communication Port drop down box select a port Port 1 to Port 4 The device mode option is not available for COM 1 In the selected device drop down box select an ATM POS device In the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration page is displayed Click the Settings tab The Available ATM POS Device setup table is displayed In the Data Format column do the following a In the Device ID column click the check box to select an ATM POS device b Double click the Data Format cell for the selected ATM POS device The Data Format cell drop down box is displayed c Clickin the Data Format cell to display the available data formats d Select the data format you want to assign to the ATM POS device e Doone of the following e Click Apply to confirm selection and remain in the Device Configuration dialog box 173 174 Click OK to confirm selection and return to the Port Device page Available ATM POS Device De ATM POS Name ATM POS DataFormjt Protocol Ha ATM POSO1 1 JER 650 v POS GENERAL O2 ATM POS02 2 None O3 ATM POS03 3 None O4 atmeposo4 4 None l O5 ATM POSOS 5 None Os ATM POSO6 6 None None O ATM P0S07 7 None None Oe atm Posos 8 None None O9 atm Posog 9 None None O10 ATMePOS1O 10 None None O11 ATM POS11 11 None None
217. ick OK 4 Open the DX8100 front panel POWER SWITCH Figure 196 Accessing the DX8100 Front Panel 234 C2630M B 4 08 5 Using your finger reach behind the front panel and grab the filter assembly tag Pull the filter assembly 1 out POWER SWITCH Figure 197 DX8100 Filter Tab Location 6 Remove the filter 2 PA A A A A AS SS O e E E E E E e Removing the Filter Figure 198 7 Do the following Using a can of compressed air blow air from the back side of the filter through the front a Verify that the filter is clean b Use a cloth to remove dust from the filter bracket C Insert the filter into the filter bracket d Re install the filter assembly e 8 Close the front panel door 9 Startthe DX8100 and resume operation 235 C2630M B 4 08 Index A access levels Administrator 17 logging into DX8000 17 logging out of DX8000 17 user 17 accounts access levels 17 access levels definition of 193 Administrator 17 built in user accounts 192 Guest 17 activating remote sites 200 active remote cameras locating 200 address DHCP 152 static IP 152 administrator accessing the setup mode 109 setup options 109 alarm event emergency notification 130 recording mode setting up 130 alarm inpu
218. ime Range ASSIGNING A CUSTOM EXPORT VIDEO FILE NAME By default the DX8100 assigns a file name to each time range When the video channel selected is exported the file is assigned the name appearing in the Name column r Time Range StatDay Start Ti EndDay_ EndTime Name _ _ O1 10132004 08 00 00 1013 2004 08 02 00 ch01 101304_080000_101304_080200 02 10132004 10 15 00 1013 2004 10 16 00 ch01 101304_101500_101304_101600 O3 10432004 1300 00 1013 2004 13 02 00 ch01 101304_130000_101304_130200 4 1043 2004 14 00 00 1013 2004 14 41 06 ch01 101304_140000_101304_144106 O5 1043 2004 16 00 00 1013 2004 16 05 00 ch01 101304_160000__101304_160500 MAS 10 13 2004 17 00 00 1013 2004 17 05 00 Security Lobby Delete Item File Name Security Lobby Apply Figure 73 Default File Names The default filename is constructed from the information displayed in the Start Day Start Time End Day and End Time columns To assign a custom file name for a time range 1 Verify that the check box of the row you want to rename is selected 2 Entera file name for the file you want to export Export file names follow standard Windows file naming conventions C2630M B 4 08 3 Click Apply The Apply button updates the Name field A F Device r Time Range gt Optical disk drives StartDay StartTime EndDay EndTime CD R RW O1 10432004 08 00 00 10 13 2004 O TEAC CD WS52E O2 10132004 1015 00 10
219. ine In stereo A 2 channel stereo input left and right channel allows you to connect up to two external audio sources You can assign a specific camera to record video in association with each audio channel For example you can assign camera 2 to the left audio channel and camera 32 to the right audio channel Mic In Accepts one audio input You can assign one camera to record video in association with the audio input Audio output Allows you to connect an audio output device such as an amplifier to listen to recorded video and audio simultaneously Optional expanded audio input To use the DX8100 expanded audio feature the optional DX8100 AUD audio card must be installed You can determine if the audio card is installed by checking the Audio option status in the Channel Information section of the Camera page The Audio status is one of the following Notinstalled If the optional audio card is not installed the Advanced button in the Audio Settings area is available Installed enabled If the optional audio card is installed the Advanced button in the Audio Settings area is not available The DX8100 compresses audio data to save space In this case recorded audio that may not be of the same quality as live audio Consult your Pelco sales representative for more information regarding the DX8100 AUD option 114 C2630M B 4 08 This sections describes how to setup the audio feature and is organized into the following
220. ing Alarm Inputs to a Camera on page 37 Linking a Relay Output to a Camera on page 38 Linking Relay Outputs to Alarm Inputs on page 38 Manually Turning On and Off a Relay To manually turn on and off a relay 1 2 Right click a relay The shortcut menu opens Click ON to turn on the relay click OFF to turn off the relay Linking Alarm Inputs to a Camera The DX8100 allows you to link alarm inputs to a camera The DX8100 allows you to link alarms to cameras by dragging them onto individual camera view panes or onto cameras listed in the Site tree You can link multiple alarm inputs to a single camera You can also link a single alarm input to multiple cameras To link an alarm input to a camera 1 2 3 C2630M B 4 08 On the DX8100 toolbar click E In the Site tree click the plus sign next to the camera to which you want to link alarms Click the plus sign next to the to see the list of alarm inputs Drag an alarm input onto a camera pane or a camera listed in the Site tree 37 38 Linking a Relay Output to a Camera The DX8100 allows you to link relays to a camera You can link multiple relays a single camera You can also link a single relay to multiple cameras The DX8100 allows you to link relays to cameras by dragging them onto individual camera view panes or onto cameras listed in the Site tree To link a relay output to a camera 1 2 ER 4 On the DX8100 toolbar click EX In t
221. ing for Extended M onitor Page 2 To assign a camera to a pane left click and drag the camera from the Site tree onto a pane O E E E ll amp E E ES C2630M B 4 08 Panel 1 2 NAA NAA Camera 1 NAA N A Figure 7 Assigning a Camera to a Pane 33 3 Repeat step 2 to assign other cameras to the view 4 To move a camera from one pane to another pane do the following a To move camera 01 C01 right click S01 CO1 and drag it to the new pane One of two actions will occur Camera S01 C01 is moved to a pane occupied by camera S01 C04 In this case camera S01 C04 moves to the pane previously occupied by Camera 01 C01 Camera S01 C01 is moved to an empty pane marked N A In this case the N A moves to the pane previously occupied by Camera S01 C01 5 To remove a camera entirely from a view right click the camera and drag it outside of the view area 6 Click Apply to save the channel mapping VIEWING VIDEO ON THE EXTENDED MONITOR To display video on the extended monitor 1 After setting up the channel mapping move the cursor to the extended monitor 2 Clickin the top middle area of the extended monitor s display The division toolbar is displayed Lal be bil sal Gel La al PELCO PELCO Figure 8 Displaying the Extended M onitor Division Toolbar 3 Click the specific division button for which a view is configured Video is displayed on the extended monitor At the exte
222. ing the ATM POS Communication Connection 0 ccc cece EEEE 180 Recording ATM POSTranSaciO sia oa dead lao o er aio datos Dt daa pad a ilah 181 Backup Configuration Screen eiii nier a a a e lea need 184 Add Backup Schedule Dialog BOX ciu ros cd wien o a a eee dds 186 Editing an Existino Backup Schloss coro aii ates dad oa dias dd is 187 Instant Record Backup Now Dialog BOX eres cunei eect cece i ehn i e E E E oa EEE 189 USGP Pages serron riepa a a a a a aE E E A EA NES 191 Add N ew User Dialog BO ena a a e cane ATETA dane A AA Oe A A 195 Adding a Site witha Static IPAddress irsin corista it a head Daba da valo p 198 Adding a Site with a Dynamic IP Address 0 cece ccoo EEEE 199 SA A E cath Wasi NA 200 Exporting DVR SettingS cascceey cid ia a A A A EEEE ARA DAS ia dd 203 Import DX8100 Server Configuration a AR a daa B24 cada 204 Viewing a LOG Files a ar a bat A E EA a ven A A ok 205 A AS A 205 Window Log WewerDialod BOX occ nient ras iia rd na ira ira desta dada tad ads 206 EXPO li A A A Ai 206 System Setup TIME tit ir a A A A db 208 Data Retention Time Limit Entered Manually cece ccc cece cert entree ere eee een eee Een eee Ene erg 209 External Monitor Automatic Mapping 00 cece ccc cece eee eee ere eer EE EEE e e EN EEE EEE i EEE EES 211 External Monitors Manual Mappings erener ii noid dude ob bhai era eb CE EET a Monee dl 212 Loading a Mapping Sequence mitad ori alcoba a da nian bes 213 Modify a Mapping Sequence oooocco
223. ing the slider to the right increases the sensitivity The motion sensitivity window provides a visual indicator that helps you set the sensitivity to the correct level so that erroneous motion events caused by wind or other disturbances are avoided e Figure 87 shows the position of the red sensitivity indicator at a low sensitivity setting In this case a large motion level is needed to cause the green motion indicator to exceed the red sensitivity indicator Figure 87 Low Sensitivity Level e Figure 88 shows the position of the red sensitivity indicator at a high sensitivity setting In this case a low motion level will cause the green motion indicator to surpass the red sensitivity indicator Figure 88 High Sensitivity Setting Level e Figure 89 shows the position of the red sensitivity indicator at a medium 50 sensitivity setting default In this case a motion event is large enough to cause the green motion indicator to surpassed the red sensitivity indicator Figure 89 Adequate Sensitivity Level C2630M B 4 08 113 5 Click Apply Ex Motion Zone Zonel gt Channel Inform on Name Camera 1 Resolution 320 240 Frame Rate 1 Ips Recording Mod Normal A ording Pre Alarm PostAlaim Linked Alarm 1 Linked Relay Nine Audio Installed inable m Motion Detection r Camera Properties Selected C
224. ing without saving click Apply and skip steps 5 9 Click Save The Save Profile dialog box opens Select an existing profile or enter a new profile name under which to save the sequence Click OK In the Sequence Table click Apply Click Apply in the External Output page 3b HH Manual Camera Mapping Mode Panel Division Selection O 69 ES E E EN EE Drag and Drop cameras from the Site Tree onto each view panel Sequence Table Sequence oO1 OMin 30 Sec Load Save Delete Alarm input 1 y 1 60 Secon Sequence No Override monitor output in response to this type of event Motion alarm override dwell time Apply Figure 176 External Monitor M anual Mapping C2630M B 4 08 Loading an Existing Sequence List To load an existing sequence list 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 3 In the Manual Camera M apping M ode section do the following a Click the button to select the M anual Camera M apping mode b Click Load to load or modify an existing sequence The Load profile dialog box opens c Select a profile d Click OK The DX8100 dialog box opens prompting you to append the sequence to the list e Click No to the Append option External Output C Auto Camera Mapping Mode reve IEEE Dwell time 10 z 1 60 Seconds Override monitor output in response to
225. ink Settings Video Loss Channel CAMERAO Camera Name Camera 1 y Enable Record on Source Video Loss Event O elle e o ee Ce e e Cen Lee Lea e aaa ae Figure 103 Event Recording Link Settings Video Loss Record Link Settings Section LINKING PTZ PRESETS AND PATTERNS TO EXTERNAL EVENTS The DX8100 can be configured in such a way that motion alarms ATM POS transactions and video loss events detected by one camera will result in the repositioning of another Similarly alarm inputs can be set to trigger camera positioning presets Only a single preset or pattern can be linked to a camera This section describes how to link PTZ presets and patterns to motion and alarm events including the following topics Linking PTZ Presets and Patterns to M otion Events on page 125 Linking PTZ Presets and Patterns to Alarm Events on page 125 e Linking Presets and Patterns to ATM POS Events on page 126 e Linking Presets and Patterns to Video Loss Events on page 127 124 C2630M B 4 08 Linking PTZ Presets and Patterns to Motion Events To link two cameras so that motion detected on one results in the repositioning of another l 2 3 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click 29 The Linking page is displayed Click the Event PTZ Link Settings tab In the Motion Detection Link Settings section do the following a Selecta camera from the Camera Channel drop do
226. ion The transaction data is displayed in the Data window Start for 16 2006 J 13 foo foo Sj End for 16 2006 3 154 foo fon 3 Transaction Information I Device Name ETM POSM ej T Transaction Number r Data Information T Transaction with Exception Only I Line Item IV Action Code CH I Exception Code N Start Search I Stop Search 6 Channel Number Transaction Number fi a F Data Overlay Enable z e Figure 58 Searching Transactions by Action Code PIXEL VIDEO SEARCH 88 The DX8100 allows a user to automatically search any 24 hour period of recorded video for changes in screen pixels This feature can be configured to identify motion events even when motion detection has not been enabled on a camera The DX8100 allows sharing of time range search settings between the Thumbnail and Pixel search mode If you initiate a Thumbnail search you can select a preview clip and initiate a Pixel search The Pixel search mode is based on the same time criteria as the preview Thumbnail clip This section describes how to search video by changes in screen pixels and includes the following topics Searching Video Based on Changes in Screen Pixels on page 89 e Viewing a Video Thumbnail on page 90 C2630M B 4 08 SEARCHING VIDEO BASED ON CHANGES IN SCREEN PIXELS DX8100 pixel video search is accomplished in two steps Searching recorded video for changes in screen pixels A
227. is case you must use the IP address of the target drive The DX8100 allows you to use the host name of the target device To do so you must enable NetBIOS option in the Windows environment You need to know what letters are already assigned to drives and the path to the folder you want to map This section describes how to map to and disconnect from a network drive including the following topics e Mapping a Network Drive e Disconnecting a Network Drive MAPPING A NETWORK DRIVE To map a network drive 1 Make sure the DVR is in Playback or Search mode by clicking or al 2 Click Jr if you are in Live mode or proceed to step 3 if you are in Search mode Click O The Export Video dialog box opens 3 Click M ap NetDrv The M ap Network Drive dialog box opens asking for a drive letter and path 4 Inthe Drive drop down box select a drive letter that is not being used 5 Type the path in the Folder drop down box For example type IP_address_of_server folder_name 6 Optional Click the Reconnect at logon box if you do not want the mapped drive to remain connected each time you logon C2630M B 4 08 97 7 Click Finish The newly mapped drive is added as a remote drive and is displayed in the Device area The mapped drive can now be accessed just like a local drive KK x r Device m Time Range E 2 Optical disk drives E G CD R RW O1 1044 2004 06 00 00 10 14 2004 06 30 00 Front Entrance O TEAC CD W552 O2 10
228. is case the DX8100 application will not start until the password is manually entered NOTE The DX8100 will not automatically reboot if there are mapped network drives To enable the Auto Reboot feature 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click C The System page is displayed 3 In the Auto Reboot section click the Enable check box 4 Inthe Auto Reboot section do the following to specify the day and time to automatically reboot the system a Select the day of the week in the drop down box b In the Hour drop down box select the hour Time is displayed in 24 hour clock format c Inthe Minute drop down box select the minutes 5 Click Apply SPECIFYING THE DATA RETENTION TIME LIMIT The DX8100 data retention time setting allows the Administrator user to configure a time limit for viewable recorded video The time limit can be entered manually or selected from the drop down menu lists The data retention time is set in increments of one or more days The viewing time limit window starts from the date of recording to the configured time limit For example if the time limit is set for 11 days all video recorded on Aug 24 2006 can be viewed up to and including September 4 2006 The data recorded on Aug 24 cannot be viewed on Sept 5 The video data recorded on Aug 24 is not be deleted it is just not available for viewing If the Administrator sets the retention time to unlimited
229. is not available for COM 1 In the selected device drop down box select an ATM POS device In the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration page is displayed Click the Advanced tab For information on the Advanced page refer to Setting Up ATM POS Exceptions on page 174 In the Exception Table select an exception Click Edit The Exceptions dialog box opens Edit the exception content Do one of the following e ClickOK to accept the changes and exit the Exceptions dialog box e Click Cancel to exit the Exception dialog box and not save the changes Deleting an ATM POS Exception To delete an ATM POS exception 1 2 3 In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed In the Communication Port drop down box select a port Port 1 to Port 4 The device mode option is not available for COM 1 In the selected device drop down box select an ATM POS device In the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration page is displayed Click the Advanced tab For information on the Advanced page refer to Setting Up ATM POS Exceptions on page 174 In the Exception Table select an exception Click Delete The DX8100 message box is displayed In response to the DX8100 message do one of the following e Click Yes to delete the exception Click No if you do not want to continue with the deletion Click Cancel to discard
230. is not restored after the import process is executed all backup settings are restored except the target device configuration setting The target device setting must be re entered in order for the scheduled backup routine to execute This sections describes how to use the import and export feature including the following topics e Exporting Current DVR Settings Using the Edit M enu to Perform an Export on page 203 Exporting Current DVR Settings To save current DVR configuration settings 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click C The System page is displayed 3 Select the Export button 4 Select the check boxes of each configuration item you want to back up 5 Do one of the following a To specify the file name to which you want to export enter the drive path and file name information into the text box Setting file names follow standard Windows file naming conventions For example C 1DX8100Y an_ 2004_config bak or b To browse fora location 1 Click Browse The DX8100 Setup File Export Dialog box opens 2 Enter a file name in the File name text box 3 Navigate to the drive and folder in which you want to save the settings file 4 Click the Up button to move up a level in the folder hierarchy 5 Click Save C2630M B 4 08 6 Click Export Now r Export lmport Configuration Q Export Browse Export Now C Import Browse Import Now FF
231. isplays an hour glass when a task requires a longer time to complete 20 This section describes the DX8100 main window and includes the following topics DX8100 M enu Bar on page 23 DX8100 Toolbar on page 26 Displaying the DX8100 Window from a Page on page 27 Description of Operating M odes on page 27 Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 28 C2630M B 4 08 The following figure shows the parts of the DX8100 main window Trea Figure 2 DX8100 DVR Main Window C2630M B 4 08 21 The following table describes the parts of the DX8100 application window Table A Parts ofthe DX8100 Application Window Item Part Description 1 Title Bar Displays the DX8100 application title 2 M enu Bar Provides access to drop down menus Toolbar Provides access to display setup export and search tools 4 Site Tree Displays top down hierarchical management of DX8100 resources such as servers cameras alarms and relays O View Panels Display live and playback video from attached cameras A view panel consists of view panes e View pane A view pane is a division of a view panel Each view pane contains only a single camera channel Up to 36 view panes can fit in a single view panel e View panel A view panel is made up of the entire DX8100 viewing area View panels are divided into multiple panes A panel can display from one to 36 individual cameras For additional information
232. ite output The Dual Display Card provides a composite video BNC output the allows video to be displayed on a monitor up to 1500 feet away from the server If you upgraded your unit from version 1 1 to 1 2 the Dual Display Card is supported After the display card is installed refer to Configuring the Dual Display Card For information about installing the card refer to the DX8100 Dual Display Card Installation manual C2637M CONFIGURING THE DUAL DISPLAY CARD To configure the DX8100 to display video on the extended monitor NOTE When you enable the extended monitor when using the Dual Display Card the DX8100 needs to be restarted to enable the overlay feature on both monitors 1 From the DX8100 menu bar choose File gt Exit The Shut down dialog box opens 2 Click Exit to Windows 3 Click OK The Log On to Windows dialog box opens 4 Enter the Windows password and then click OK The system logs you into the operating system 5 Go to Start gt Settings gt Control Panel and then double click the Display icon The Display Properties dialog box opens 6 Click the Settings tab 7 To enable the extended monitor do the following a On the Settings tab click the monitor icon that represents the extended monitor you want to use in addition to your primary monitor b Click Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor c In the Color quality area select Highest 32 bit NOTE If the color mode i
233. ith Standard User access and higher High The camera can be viewed by users with Power User access and higher e In the Protocol drop down box select the appropriate PTZ protocol for the camera or select No PTZ if the selected camera does not support PTZ functions Some of the supported protocol options are as follows NO PTZ Disables all PTZ functions for the current camera PELCO C Coaxitron PELCO D Pelco engineered PELCO P Pelco engineered SAMSUNG V2 0 PANASONIC VICON KALATEL HONEYWELL HSD251 AMERICAN DYNAMICS PHILLIPS TC8560 TC700 Series LG v1 0 You must configure one of the RS 422 RS 485 PTZ ports for Spectra for Coaxitron to function For more information refer to Setting Up RS 422 RS 485 Communication Port Properties on page 163 C2630M B 4 08 111 3 f Do the following 1 2 In the PTZ Locking Auto timeout drop down box select an appropriate timeout value Timeout values can be set between five and 60 seconds The default value is 10 seconds Because the DX8100 Series DVR is designed to operate in a networked environment it is possible that multiple users may attempt to simultaneously control the PTZ features of a single camera To minimize potential conflicts only one user at a time is allowed to control the PTZ features of a camera PTZ control is made available on a first come first served basis Once a user gains control of a camera s PTZ features all other user
234. ive audio C2630M B 4 08 Listening to Live Audio from a Remote DX8100 System To listen to live audio at a remote DX8100 server or client system 1 2 9 On the DX8100 toolbar click Setup The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Check the Channel Information section to verify that the audio option is installed and available For information about setting up the DX8100 server to record and listen to live audio refer to Audio Setup on page 114 In the Camera Properties section select the camera channel that is configured for live audio recording In the Audio Settings section verify that the Audio Disable check box is not selected Click Apply Verify that you can hear live audio On the DX8100 toolbar click EN Drag a camera that is configured to record live audio from the Site tree onto a view pane Verify that you can hear live audio CONFIGURING VIDEO LOSS DETECTION You can configure the DX8100 to monitor each camera for the following events Loss of synchronization This event occurs if the data cable between the camera and DX8100 is disconnected cable is cut or unplugged or when the camera looses power Low level of video This event occurs if the DX8100 detects a low level of video signal from the camera The available light source for the camera indoor outdoor lightly is greatly diminished The DX8100 data cable is disconnected You can adjust the operation time from 0 00 to 23 59 For exam
235. ized into the following topics Adding a NTP Time Server on page 156 Editing a NTP Time Server on page 157 Deleting a NTP Server on page 158 Comparing the DX8100 and NTP Server Time on page 158 Manually Synchronizing the DX8100 Time on page 159 Setting Up Automatic Time Synchronization on page 159 Enabling Database Overwrite on page 160 Adding a NTP Time Server To add a NTP time server 1 156 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page In the Setup dialog box click The Network page is displayed Click the NTP tab Do the follow ing a Click Add Edit Delete The NPT Server List dialog box opens NTP Server List xj Server List IEN O north america pool ntp org 70 91 204 1 Add 4 gt Cancel Figure 134 NTP Server List Dialog Box b Click Add The Add Edit NTP Server dialog box opens Add Edit NTP Server E SNTP Server C DX8100 NTP Server URL l mP D 0 0 0 Port Number 123 coros Figure 135 Add Edit NTP Server Dialog Box C2630M B 4 08 c To select the NTP server do one of the following Do nothing and accept the default SNTP Server option button In this case a NTP server is used to provide time synchronization Clickthe DX8100 NTP Server option button to select the DX8100 to provide time synchronization for the network d To specify the NTP server addressing do one of the following e ifthe DX8100 NTP Serve
236. k segment Up to 16 cameras can be viewed and managed for each remote site 32 of which can be simultaneously assigned to view panels Once a site has been added to the site list it can be managed and viewed just as the local DVR The following steps allow a user with Power User access and higher to configure access to remote DVRs Once a remote site has been added all viewing searching and setup functions of that site can be accessed from the local DX8100 To access the features of a remote site users must possess a valid user account with the appropriate access rights for that site This section describes how to add a site with a static IP or dynamic IP address and includes the following topics e Adding a Site with a Static IP Address e Adding a Site with a Dynamic IP Address on page 198 Adding a Site with a Static IP Address To add a remote DVR site when the IP address is known 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 In the Setup dialog box click D 3 Select the M anual button if it is not already selected 4 Entera site name for the remote DVR Site names can be up to 32 characters and can contain spaces and special characters For example Building 1 DVR 5 Enter the IP address of the remote site C2630M B 4 08 197 6 If necessary do the following a Enter a new base port number 9002 is the default Unless there is a conflict on your network you should no
237. k the Right Channel check box and in the drop down box select an associated camera e Optional Left click the Aux volume control and drag left to decrease the audio input level or to the right to increase the audio input level f Click OK g Click Apply x AUX Audio Channel I Audio Disable Input Device Line in X Left Channel V Camerad5 y Right Channel M Camerad5 a Aux volume _ Espe Figure 92 AUX Audio Settings Dialog Box C2630M B 4 08 115 Setting Up the Expanded Audio Options To set up the expanded audio option 1 Do the following a Install the optional DX8108 AUD DX8116 AUD audio card if necessary For information about installing the optional DX8108 AUD DX8116 AUD audio card refer to the DX8100 8 16 Channel Audio Card Installation manual C2638M b Connect an audio input device microphone to the numbered DX8108 AUD DX8116 AUD audio card input for the camera channel being configured for live audio recording c To hear live audio at the local server connect head phones to the DX8100 audio output connector 2 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 3 Check the Channel Information section to verify that the audio option is installed and available 4 In the Camera Properties section select the camera channel you want to configure for live audio recording 5 Inthe Audio Settings section verify that the Audio Disable check box is not selec
238. l For information on how to select view modes refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 28 PTZ OSD M enu or Digital Zoom Control This control provides two functions depending on whether the DX8100 is operating in Live view or playback mode e Live view mode Provides whether the DX8100 is operating in Live view or playback mode users with access rights to operate PTZ OSD features For information on using the PTZ OSD menu controls refer to Using the PTZ OSD Menu Control on page 55 This panel is hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the playback zoom control For information on how to select view modes refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 28 e Playback mode Provides users with access rights to operate digital zoom features This panel is hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the playback zoom control For information on how to select view modes refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 28 Status Bar Displays the current date and time recorder processing status disk status indicator user name of the current logged in user and total amount of recorded video NOTE As the storage array of the DX8100 fills beyond its capacity video is deleted in a first in first out FIFO fashion The disk status indicator on the status bar shows
239. l information about each phase of the configuration process refer to the following topics Setting Up an ATM POS Data Format e Assigning a Data Format to an ATM POS Device on page 173 Setting Up ATM POS Exceptions on page 174 e Verifying the ATM POS Communication Connection on page 179 e Recording ATM POS Events on page 180 To select the device mode and set up the ATM POS communications options 1 In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed 2 Do one of the following Single Mode In the Communication Port drop down box select a port COM 1 or Port 1 to Port4 Multi Mode In the Communication Port drop down box select COM 1 If you select COM 1 the Interface M ode option is unavailable and is set to RS 232C by default 3 Inthe device drop down box select ATM POS and configure the following port settings using the drop down boxes provided Interface mode by default is set for RS232C for COM 1 C2630M B 4 08 Baudrate Parity Data bits Stopbits r Communication Port Configuration Communication Port he Interface Mode Baud Rate Parity Data Bits Stop Bits Figure 143 Multi Mode Communication Port Settings 4 Inthe Port Device page do the following a In the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration dialog box opens b In the Device M ode drop down box do one of the following Singl
240. larm override dwell time O E A GE Ges ES Sequence Table Duration fg ET Ch Ch 2 2 D Min 1 Sec O3 D Min 7 Sec q Load Save Delete Alarm input 1 1 60 Seconi Apply Figure 179 Delete a Mapping Sequence Appending an Existing Sequence List To append an existing sequence list to the current list 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click The External Output page is displayed 3 Click Load The Load profile dialog box opens 4 Select a profile 5 Click OK The Append to list dialog box opens 6 Click Yes to add the new sequences to the existing list 7 To add delete or modify sequence instances follow the directions in the sections above 8 Click Save 9 Select an existing profile or enter a new profile name to save the sequence list 10 Click OK 11 Click Apply in the Sequence Table section 12 Click Apply CONFIGURING DISPLAY OVERRIDE The Capture Card can be configured to interrupt normal output when a motion or alarm event is detected Each event instance causes live video from the sensing camera to be displayed for up to 60 seconds after event detection To set up event monitor override options 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click C2630M B 4 08 215 3 Select the type of event that will be allowed to override
241. layChammal eao l El Relay Name pa e m Relay Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 NO NO NO NO NO NO NO J NO Figure 94 Relay and Alarm Settings Page Relay Settings Section C2630M B 4 08 119 Configuring Basic Alarm Input Operating Properties Most applications will not require you to change relay and alarm settings from their default states To configure basic alarm input operating properties 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 2 Click to display the Link page 3 In the Alarm Settings section do the following a In the Alarm Channel drop down box select the Alarm you want to configure b Inthe Alarm Name text box enter an optional new name for alarm Alarm names can be up to 32 characters long and can include spaces and special characters You can also rename sites cameras alarms and relays from the Site tree by slowly clicking twice on each object s name c Inthe Alarm Type section click the NO NC button to toggle the default output type for each alarm NO normally open or NC normally closed 4 Click Apply Alam Settings ES Alarm Channel o Alam Name po 9 Alam Type dodo da dada ne ne one Cne me Cne Cne Cne Figure 95 Relay and Alarm Settings Page Alarm S
242. lect another server to update Click No to finish the update process and reboot The local or remote server will reboot 30 seconds after the upgrade process has been completed lx The server upgrade in process You will be shutdown in 30 seconds Do you update another server y n Figure 192 Upgrade Confirmation Dialog Box UPDATING DX8100 CONFIGURATION FILE The DX8100 DVR allows you to update the configuration file for multiple DX8100 servers and server groups simultaneously The M ultiple Configuration Upload command on the File menu opens a dialog box which displays all of the DX8100 devices and groups listed in the Site tree To upload the resident DX8100 server configuration file to selected DX8100 devices 1 In the System page export the current DVR settings For more information about exporting configuration settings refer to Exporting Current DVR Settings on page 202 2 From the DX8100 menu bar choose File gt M ultiple Configuration Upload The M ultiple Configuration Upload dialog box opens The DX8100 devices and groups listed in the Site tree are listed in the M ultiple Configuration dialog box Site List 3 In the Site List in the Multiple Configuration Upload dialog box click the check box for each DX8100 server and server group you want to update 232 C2630M B 4 08 4 Inthe Multiple Configuration Upload dialog box do the following a Click Browse The DX8100 Setup File Import dialog box opens
243. mation do the following 1 Click OS Log View The Window Log Viewer opens 2 Click a button to select a category x Type Date Time Source EventiD User Compute C Success Error 08 01 2005 09 30 46 W38VC 105 NIA DX8000 A Error 08 01 2005 01 02 14 W3swC 105 NIA DX8000 Error Error 07 27 2005 16 17 35 WI3SVC 105 NIA DX8000 C Waming Error 07 27 2005 13 23 23 W38VC 105 NIA DX8000 Error 07 25 2005 07 45 34 W38VC 105 NIA DX8000 Doo Error 07 22 2005 14 05 20 W3SVWC 105 NIA DX8000 Error 07 22 2005 14 03 23 SDDrw 43 NIA DX8000 Audit_ Success Error 07 21 2005 07 07 26 W38VC 105 NIA DX8000 Error 07 18 2005 01 02 16 W38VC 105 NA DX8000 Audit Failure Error 07 14 2005 09 19 30 W3SVC 105 NIA DX8000 Error 07 14 2005 09 17 07 SDDrw 43 NIA DX8000 Error 07 13 2005 14 59 33 W38VC 105 Ni DX8000 Error 07 11 2005 14 35 15 W38VC 105 NIA DX8000 Error 07 11 2005 14 33 37 SDD 43 N A DX8000 Error 07 11 2005 14 32 13 SDD 43 NIA DX8000 Error 07 11 2005 01 05 44 W38VC 105 NIA DX8000 Error 07 06 2005 15 05 18 W38VC 105 NIA DX8000 Error 07 06 2005 08 48 38 W3SVC 105 NIA DX8000 Error 07 01 2005 09 28 42 W38VC 105 NIA DX8000 Error NA 28 2005 11 10 97 WISV 105 Mia aa P ES al Figure 171 Window Log Viewer Dialog Box 5 Do one of the following e Click OK to close the log dialog box e Click Clear to erase the log Exporting Log Information To export a system log file 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera pa
244. me ranges simultaneously For more information refer to Changing a Bookmarked Time Range on page 100 7 Click in the File Name box and then type the file name for each selected video time range You can accept the default file name assigned to the time range For more information refer to Assigning a Custom Export Video File Name on page 101 8 Select the export format For more information refer to Selecting the Export Format on page 102 C2630M B 4 08 99 100 9 Click Export SS x m Device 7 Time Range O Optical disk drives a CD R AW O TEAC CD W552E DVD R RW x Not installed 6 Hard disk drives E S Remote drive i i g 10 0 1 14 public Susers B E Removal drive Ott Refresh Create folder Map NetDrv Disconnect NetDrv StatDay StartTime EndDay EndTime Name O1 10432004 08 00 00 10 13 2004 08 0200 Lobby 2 10432004 10 15 00 10 13 2004 10 16 00 East Entrance O3 1043 2004 13 00 00 10 13 2004 13 0200 West Entrance 10 13 2004 14 00 00 10 13 2004 14 41 06 Security Entrance Delete Item File Name Security Entrance Apply r Export Format Avi C ASF Native C BMP C JPEG C TIF F Audio Record F Real Time Image Count 1 Interval Continuous z T Enable deinterlacing filter Export Cancel Figure 71 Exporting Selected Video CHANGING A BOOKM ARKED TIME RANGE To change a bookmarked time range or cr
245. mode you want to configure Options are as follows 640 7 4 Normal Motion Alarm ATM POS The 640 resolution setting is for the standard VGA format The 704 resolution is for the cropped D1 video NTSC PAL 5 Select resolution values for individual channels from the drop down boxes The following table describes the available resolution values Setting a resolution value for one recording mode sets the resolution value for all modes For example setting resolution to 640 x 480 in M otion recording mode will change the resolution to 640 x 480 in Normal and Alarm recording modes as well Table AG Resolution Values Video Format dad EA 640 704 640 704 CIF 320 x 240 352 x 240 320 x 288 352 x 288 2CIF 640 x 240 704 x 240 640 x 288 704 x 288 ACIF 640 x 480 704 x 480 640 x 576 704 x 576 6 Do the following a Using the ALL frame rate settings slider set the frame rate for all channels b To set the frame rate for individual channels use the frame rate slider for each channel to select a frame rate from 1 30 ips according to the available capacity for that channel The frame rate of an individual channel cannot exceed the maximum setting of the ALL frame rate slider 7 Click OK C2630M B 4 08 8 Click Apply when you return to the Schedule Setup screen C2630M B 4 08 320X240 y TIPS 320x240 y TIPS 320K240 y 11PS Figure 122 Frame Rate Configu
246. ms in Page Down zooms out Up and Down Arrows These keys provide the following functionality On screen display preset and pattern modes The up arrow key raises the camera and the down arrow key lowers the camera The keys perform the same actions as the mouse to move the camera Remote camera programming mode The arrow keys navigate up and down the camera menu choices The keys perform the same actions as the PTZ keypad focus and buttons Left and Right Arrows These keys provide the same actions as the mouse for moving the camera The left arrow key pans the camera to the left and the right arrow key pans the camera to the right and These keys perform similar actions as using the mouse to change the speed of camera movement W hen pressed once the plus key increases the camera s pan tilt speed when pressed once the minus key decreases the pan tilt speed Each time the plus key is pressed the pan tilt speed is increased toward maximum speed each time the minus key is pressed the pan tilt speed is decreased toward minimum speed To use the keyboard and keys to control camera pan tilt speed 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click EN 2 Select a PTZ enabled camera from the Site tree 3 Click the mouse pointer in the camera s view panel 4 Press and hold the up down and left right arrows to pan tilt the camera 5 Press the plus key once or more times to increase the pan tilt
247. n Advanced Diagnostics m Data Format List This page is where you configure the data format transaction monetary time and character options Data Format Name Modified ER 650 Delete 2i IMPORTANT The options and parameters configured at this page determines how data from 4TM POS terminals is interpreted This information is used to separate the data stream into individual transactions and separate the various fields within the transactions Every field format must match that of the selected ATM POS device especially the month format Apply ex Cancel Figure 147 Data Format List 9 In the Device Configuration page do the following for ATM POS device a Click the Settings tab The Available ATM POS Device table is displayed b In the Device ID column click an ATM POS device to select it c Double click the Data Format cell for the selected ATM POS device The Data Format cell drop down box is displayed d Click in the Data Format cell to display the available data formats e Select the data format you want to assign to the ATM POS device 10 In the Protocol column do the following a Double click the Protocol cell for the selected ATM POS device The Protocol cell drop down box is displayed b Click in the Protocol cell to display the available protocols c Select the protocol you want to assign to the ATM POS device 11 Do one of the following e Click Apply to confi
248. n and close the dialog box click Cancel Make the desired change Click Apply Comparing the DX8100 and NTP Server Time The DX8100 check the difference feature allows you to quickly compare its time with an external time source To compared the DX8100 s time with an external time source 1 2 3 158 On the DX8100 toolbar click Setup The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page In the Setup dialog box click Network The Network page is displayed Click the NTP tab The NTP page is displayed In the NTP Server drop down box select a NTP server Click Check the Difference The difference between the DX8100 server and NTP Server time is displayed in the Difference time area Difference 175 seconds beyond Figure 139 Checking Time Differences C2630M B 4 08 Manually Synchronizing the DX8100 Time You can manually synchronize the DX8100 to an external time source You do not have to enable the NTP service but you do need access to a NTP time server To manually synchronize the DX8100 to an external time server l 2 35 On the DX8100 toolbar click Setup The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page In the Setup dialog box click Network The Network page is displayed Click the NTP tab The NTP page is displayed In the NTP Server drop down box select a NTP server For information about adding a NTP time server refer to Adding a NTP Time Server on page 156 Click Synchronize Clock Imme
249. n designating a specific action code For information about action codes refer to Setting UP ATM POS Device Properties on page 164 Exception Code A predefined transaction filter used to detect a specific data structure within the ATM POS transaction data For information about exceptions refer to Setting Up ATM POS Exceptions on page 174 Start and Stop Start Initiates a search event Stop Ends a search event POS Search Table Lists the data discovered in response to the POS options selected for the transaction and data information Channel number From 1 16 Device name By default ATM POS01 to ATM POS16 The device name can be changed Transaction number Number assigned by the ATM POS device to the transaction data Date Time Date and time transaction is recorded Exception Yes if an exception filter is active for the transaction data has an exception No if the transaction does not have an exception filter The transaction and data information are based on the ATM POS configuration settings derived from the following Data format ATM POS exceptions e Exception action codes For information about setting up ATM POS transaction and data options refer to Setting UP ATM POS Device Properties on page 164 80 C2630M B 4 08 Table Y Parts ofthe POS Search View Continued Item Part Description Data Window Area where recorded transaction data is displayed
250. n full screen view 1 Select the playback mode For information about working in the playback mode refer to Working in Playback M ode on page 65 2 Selecta window division 3 On the DX8100 toolbar click Playback video is displayed in full screen view To display the DX8100 main window from the full screen view e Right click in the DX8100 window Displaying Index Search Video in Full Screen View To display index search video in full screen view C2630M B 4 08 27 1 Select the index search mode For information about working in the index search mode refer to Working in Playback M ode on page 65 2 Click J to begin viewing video 3 On the DX8100 toolbar click 3 Index search video is displayed in full screen view To display the DX8100 main window from the full screen view e Right click in the DX8100 window SWITCHING BETWEEN STANDARD AND EXTENDED PANEL VIEWS The DX8100 features a viewing area that can be expanded to fill a larger portion of the main window Extended view expands the viewable panel containing camera panes but hides the timeline PTZ digital zoom and playback controls To use the timeline PTZ digital zoom and playback controls you must take the DX8100 out of extended view To switch back and forth between standard and extended view Fromthe DX8100 menu bar choose View gt Extended View UNDERSTANDING VIEW PANES AND PANELS This section describes the DX8100 viewing area The viewing ar
251. n tees 45 InstanERECO NO criati ia ice aie vel Gan nate wa akan Seanad ain dal raya Ohad AR e A ci a VEN 45 Enabling and Disabling Instant Recording 00 ccc oce t eee ede eed deer enn Ener een es 45 C2630M B 4 08 3 Adding Instant Recording to OSD oo icici cece noo e rro e E EERE TE E AA A DEE eee DEE EEE EEE Eng 46 Starting and Stopping Instant Recording cc cece cece cece o rr e eee eee eed Heese een Eben Ene E Henne 46 Operating the On Screen PTZ Controls oo coc o e een renee EEE EEE EE EEE EEE ED HEE SEHR EEE EERE EE Erg 47 Operating the PTZ CONTOS sinuni ao dar la ed task A da at OA db Shoals dad dada add 48 Adjusting the Camera LEnS ciclista rr ale dit een de beta ita dt 49 Adjusting the Camera ZIMIO ca Moe eee 49 Using PC Keyboard Shortcuts to Operate PTZ and Lens Functions cise cece cece teeter eee e settee ete tn ee eneneens 50 PIZ Presets ii Seanad end te oka emer Lal nea tana AAA beeen ARA Loner aai i eh d death 51 Programmingia Presets shade titel a al cias 51 ACUARELA A A AA RAS ASAS AAA CAS ALA 52 Clearing a PreSOt osado Da pies Do nda Lagat Dita ai EANAN Ba e dd 53 PTZ Pattes ci ia ia AA A AA ibi 53 AA A ES een EE A NOE 53 Activating a Patten dc da ia in AAA e a OEA O EE o dl dci cia abi 54 Clear a PM a ta aa Dann a ai iO ao a Did os 55 Accessing Programming Features of Remote Cameras occo rc 55 Sending Auxiliary Commands to a DENCE enre iare ie E corr 58 Configuring Preset TOUS isn coords a a
252. nce appending to an existing sequence list 215 creating 212 deleting 214 loading an existing list 213 modifying in the list 213 238 extended monitor 32 extended view mode 49 external events 120 external storage 13 F file size video image 140 frame rate about calculating 146 advanced configuring 142 overview 129 140 range of 140 resolution value 142 frame rate setting 141 full screen view video displaying 27 full window view 26 index video displaying 27 live video displaying 27 playback video displaying 27 selecting 26 G getting started exiting the DX8000 18 first time login 17 powering on the DX8000 15 shutting down the DX8000 16 starting the DX8000 15 user security levels 16 H hard disk 15 hardware capture card 211 DX8000 AUD audio card 114 external equipment 58 upgrading 15 Help enabling disabling 210 online viewing 210 import setup 24 index view panel 22 indicators audio 44 camera 44 instant recording 44 on screen PTZ control 44 pan tilt and zoom 44 record 44 site 44 C2630M B 4 08 information port 153 instant recording indicator 44 instant recording mode 45 interface mode 164 K keypad 49 L language selecting 14 15 linking alarm input removing from camera 39 alarm inputs linking to cameras 37 link setup options 118 event PTZ link settings event recording link settings event relay link settings relay and alarm settings relays linking to cameras 38 r
253. nd 3 to clear multiple presets 5 Click ES to exit programming mode Figure 25 Clearing a Preset PTZ PATTERNS A pattern is a user defined viewable camera path with a definite beginning and end Patterns are made up of a sequence of standard pan tilt and lens commands Patterns are stored in the internal memory of the PTZ device such as a Spectra dome that is connected to the DX8100 The Spectra Ill supports one pattern and the Spectra III SE supports up to four unique PTZ patterns Depending on the type and configuration of the PTZ device the DX8100 can address up to four unique PTZ patterns Once defined a pattern can be activated with a series of on screen commands A pattern will run continuously until it is deactivated Only PTZ enabled cameras that support pattern programming through D P Coaxitron or supported third party protocols can use this feature The PTZ controls are hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the PTZ controls To switch between the standard and extended view mode From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt Extended View This section describes how to program activate and clear patterns and access the programming features of remote cameras This section includes the following topics Programming a Pattern Activating a Pattern on page 54 Clearing a Pattern on page 55 e Accessing Programming Features of Remote Cameras on page 55 P
254. nded monitor video is only displayed if a view is already configured for the division button you selected If a view is not configured for a division the Pelco logo blue screen is displayed 4 Click a division button to display a different view MODIFYING AN EXTENDED MONITOR VIEW To modify a view while viewing video on the extended monitor 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Channel M apping icon g 2 Click the division button for the current view displayed on the extended monitor 3 Modify the view add move and remove cameras 4 Click Apply The change is displayed on the extended monitor 34 C2630M B 4 08 WORKING WITH THE SITE TREE The site tree provides access to DX8100 resources such as cameras alarm inputs and relay outputs Objects can be selected by clicking the left mouse button once and then linked by dragging and dropping the icon into a view pane or another site tree item The site tree information reflects the current DX8100 server configuration The following figure shows the site tree Figure 9 Site Tree Parts C2630M B 4 08 35 36 The following table describes the site tree parts Table M Site Tree Parts Item Part Description 11 Name Site Expands and collapses the DX8100 site Right clicking the site name opens a shortcut menu that provides the following commands User Log In opens the User Log In dialog box where you enter your user name and password to log into the DX81
255. nformation and verify that the selected backup device provides adequate space to receive the backed up data 3 Click OK 4 Click OK to accept the defaults for the time setting channel record type and categories The backup starts immediately or b To customize the backup options 1 Change the backup time range channel record type and category 2 Click Estimated Backup Size The Estimated Backup Size dialog box opens displaying backup details 3 Read the backup information and verify that the selected backup device provides adequate space to receive the backed up data 4 Click OK C2630M B 4 08 5 Click OK The backup starts immediately x Device Selection y Time Setting R RW O NEC DVD_RW ND 3550A DVD R RW OD NEC DVD_RWND 35504 S HARD DISK DRIVES SPR EN mor merezco Sadie Tre Rue 5 a Removable dive 2005 2005 z NOT INSTALLED owe es 52 63 53 Time 12 34 fiz gt 5 gt Channel amp Record Type CRT a folle efe e os fefta eaa Pas 2 27 25 25 0 31 32 Map a network drive Disconnect mapped drive Categones All Recording y ES Estimated Backup Size Cancel Figure 161 Instant Record Backup Now Dialog Box MAPPING A NETWORK DEVICE The DX8100 allows you to map to or disconnect from a network drive You need to know the drive letters as well as the path to the folder to which you want to map To map a network drive
256. ng Table Action Code Define String Add gt Delete You can search recording data by this user mapping table Figure 153 Advanced Page C2630M B 4 08 7 In the Exception Table section click Add The Exceptions dialog box opens Exceptions E xi Exception Name USER DEFINEO A 7b Line Item Modifier None 7d Value This Exception Effect Display Effect Show Fis A Figure 154 Exceptions Dialog Box 8 In the Exceptions dialog box do the following a In the Exception Name text box enter a name or description for the exception up to 20 characters b In the Line Item text box enter the name of the line item up to 20 characters The line item entry is case sensitive If the transaction is displayed as all capital letters then the line item entry must be in all capital letters The DVR will search for this entry anywhere in the transaction ATM transactions do not usually contain line items The program may display a No data found error message if searching ATM transactions using line items If the line item box is left blank it is considered found or satisfied c In the Modifier drop down box select a modifier that further defines the line item A modifier must be selected before a value can be entered If a modifier is not selected the Value text box is unavailable d In the Value box enter the value The value 9999 99 maximum is used with the modifie
257. ng Times for All Record M odes cece cece cece ete reer eet e ner rr 131 Calendar Date Select is eddies a Meats cada re thes ele A Destine daa 132 Year View Calendar Quick M ENU i ocioso or catenins a UAE a Can a ers 133 Month View Page Multi Day Schedule 0 ccc ccc cece cece e renee e eer e nee EEE EEE ED EEE EEE nen EEE 134 Month View Page Single Day Schedules cs5000scde ca cia iran e sa uean a a fa epa ees 135 Month View Calendar Quick Mie nutie sener Soa incor bec cok hod A iS ear 136 Month View PAG scort ei ia Dd 8 8 RIA Le DADAS AO dad 137 Month View Page iia A A A A a a Maine 138 Eustom Camera Eto Pl Settles A a o 139 Examples of Custom Camera Settings s s usai rre 139 FrameRate Configuration Dial0 Birras da a dto BES cad 141 C2630M B 4 08 183 C2630M B 4 08 Frame Rate Configuration SCTEeN 00ococooococonr ocre 143 Setting Up DX8100 for Maximum IPS Recording cc cece cece eet eee rr 145 Frame Rate Configuration ii A tata A trea Oot AAA awn AA ated 145 Maximum Rate and Resolution RECOrding 0 c ccc cece tec ere ore 146 Example of Frame Rate Capacity iee ri ti A dean ni E 146 Linking Relays to Motion Detection coo sonic Jerid Vesta od nes 147 Linking Relays to Alas n A AAA REEI OEE 2 CE TAA 148 Linking Relays to ATM POS a asi E wha tea 149 Linking Relays to VIASO LOSS 2 000 occurs poca gaitera e debar s ropit ECU A A P EOE EEEE a col 150 Network Setup Pages cti o A A EESE DEER aS 152 En
258. ng the DX8100 Time Click Apply 159 160 Enabling Database Overw rite In the event that the DX8100 time is reset to a period earlier than the current time the DX8100 allows you to do one of the following Database Overwrite Enabling this option causes the DX8100 to overwrite previously recorded data coincide with the time at which the clock is turned back For example if at 2 00 p m current time you set back the DX8100 clock to 1 30 p m an earlier time the previously recorded data beginning at 1 30 p m is overwritten Selectnot to enable Database Overwrite If this option is not enabled previously recorded data is not overwritten For example if at 2 00 p m current time you set back the DX8100 clock to 1 30 p m an earlier time the DX8100 does not record data between 1 30 p m and 2 00 p m In this case any video events occurring during that half hour time period are not recorded Recording does not begin again until after the DX8100 clock exceeds 2 00 p m To enable Database Overwrite 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click Setup The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 2 In the Setup dialog box click Network The Network page is displayed 3 Click the NTP tab The NTP page is displayed 4 Click the Database Overwrite check box to select the option C2630M B 4 08 SETTING UP PORT AND DEVICE COMMUNICATION PROPERTIES The system must be powered on and you must be logged in as a Power User or Administrator
259. nitor for motion detection events Click Select All to monitor all channels for motion detection Click Deselect All to deselect all channels Click OK Click Apply Sending E mail Notifications in Response to Alarm Events E mail notifications can be sent whenever an alarm input is activated To initiate e mail notifications to be sent in response activated alarm inputs 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 2 The Notification page is display 3 Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab 222 C2630M B 4 08 4 Inthe Notification Items section do the following a Click the Alarm check box b In the Selected Channels field click once to the right of the word Alarm The Selected Channels dialog box opens c Doone of the following Clickthe check box for each channel you want to monitor for alarm detection events Click Select All to monitor all channels for alarm detection Click Deselect All to deselect all channels 5 Click OK 6 Click Apply Sending E mail Notifications in Response to Video Loss Events E mail notifications can be sent whenever a camera attached to a DX8100 experiences a video loss event To cause e mail notifications to be sent in response to video loss events 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 2 The Notification page is display 3 Click the Emergency E mail No
260. ns coco et trees 230 Updating DXBLOO Configuration File cotos acia pr aR maha aa ne Ba dade Ds dia nea de dae dath 232 Recovering a Password cw sa cutee a yes A race oe deena fy Abed OT EE eae ebiw en Dhak ey Abbe Gand ea ond 233 Performing Periodic Maintenance ccc cece cece eer rene ne EEE REDE EE EEE D EEE EEE EEE EEE nen EEE 234 C2630M B 4 08 List of Illustrations onu MU SW PY Ha C2630M B 4 08 Front Panel and POW er Swithin aer citar era rd ia io aaa ria Re 15 DX8100 DVR Main Wind OW sic treet ante a ll pde ia A ewe hee aiden 21 View Panes and Panel for 4 Division Display 0 ccc cect eee orcos 28 Example of Single 4 9 and 16 Division View Panels ccc cece cette e creer terete eee e teen e beret een e nee 30 View Panel dE a a A a a ath eats 31 Channel Mapping for Extended Monitor Page ccc ccce ccc o rr rr 33 Assigning a Camerasto a POS cie dd es Haute B22 onal gn hone 33 Displaying the Extended Monitor Division Toolbar ccc 34 A OR 35 Add to Favorites Dial g BOX cion oe a a A E a de da 41 Favorites Menu lia A Ad ada eii 41 Organize Favorites Dialod BOX ica ida ti A A al 42 Organize Favorites Dialog Box and List of Favorites FoldelS 000o0ooccocoroco orcos 43 Move to Folders Dialog BOX comio pustiad nera ela dana is ada a di dalla iia 43 Live View OSD Pan tra A A AS AE DAA ta Aia ia bae 44 DVR OSD MenuOptions is a ad a 45 Activating Instant Recording 000cooccococo nooo corr 46 On
261. ns manual USER SETUP The User page allows an Administrator Admin to add delete and change the properties of users Admin has full permission of the DX8100 Users are subdivided into groups and each group is granted a particular level of access Admin is the level that who can change permissions for all lower level users A lower level user cannot have more permission than a higher level user This section describes how to configure users and includes the following topics Built in User Accounts on page 192 Definition of User Access Levels on page 193 Definition of Camera Security Access on page 193 Adding New Users on page 194 Modifying User Properties on page 195 Changing User Passwords on page 196 Changing a User s Group Affiliation on page 196 Deleting Existing Users on page 196 Setting Login Timeout on page 196 Assigning Automatic Login Permission to a User on page 197 ACCESSING THE USER PAGE To access the User page 190 l 2 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click O The User page is displayed C2630M B 4 08 The following figure shows the User page C2630M B 4 08 Restricted User Group Add a Figure 162 User Page 191 The following table describes the parts of the User page Table BA Parts ofthe User Page Item Part Description 1 User Name Table Lists the authorized users 12 User Buttons Allows you to
262. nts Allows user to select a date and time for playback 8 O 0 0 DOGO OOF Playback Control Provides buttons to control video playback Includes forward and reverse playback and still image Also Panel provides controls for playback speed and volume Heh Zoom Provides access to digital zoom features during playback Search Control Provides access to the index thumbnail POS and pixel search controls DISPLAYING A DEINTERLACED IMAGE IN THE SEARCH MODE If you are searching for an image that is recorded at 4CIF at a low frame rate per second the viewed image might move or tear The View menu s Deinterlaced Image option is used to enhance the image during a search activity To search video using the deinterlaced option 1 On the menu bar click View gt Display deinterlaced image 2 On the DX8100 toolbar click a The DX8100 is placed in the Search mode REUSING THE SEARCH TIME RANGE The DX8100 allows sharing of time range search settings between the Thumbnail and Pixel search mode If you initiate a Thumbnail search you can select a preview clip and initiate a Pixel search The Pixel search mode is based on the same time criteria as the preview Thumbnail clip C2630M B 4 08 15 INDEX VIDEO SEARCH Index search allows a user to search video by events such as motion detection or alarm activation Events are listed chronologically and by type To ensure the proper camera channel is selected
263. o in the Deinterlaced M ode Viewing Live and Playback Video Simultaneously C2630M B 4 08 VIEWING VIDEO IN THE DEINTERLACED MODE Images recorded at 4CIF at a low frame rate per second might move or tear In this case you can use the View menu s Deinterlaced Image option to enhance the displayed image In the deinterlaced mode the DX8100 converts the recorded image and displays it at 2CIF resolution The process removes one of the 4CIF interlaced fields even or odd from the 4CIF recorded image to arrive at 2CIF resolution for the displayed image The original image is retained at the recorded 4CIF resolution For exported images the DX8100 provides a global option for enabling a deinterlacing filter In this case the selected channel s image is exported at 2CIF resolution This setting is effective for all channels and cannot be set for individual channels For more information about enabling the denaturalizing filter refer to Enabling the Deinterlacing Filter on page 97 To view video using the deinterlaced option click gt to start video playback 2 On the menu bar click View gt Display deinterlaced image VIEWING LIVE AND PLAYBACK VIDEO SIMULTANEOUSLY The DX8100 allows simultaneous viewing of live and playback video from a single camera source To view live and playback video from the same camera 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click 2 Drag a camera from the Site tree to a view panel 3 click gt to
264. on On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click The Notification page is displayed Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab 1 2 3 C2630M B 4 08 Do the follow ing a Inthe Mail Group section select a group name from the drop down box b Click the e mail address of the user you want to edit c Click Edit The E mail Settings dialog box opens d In the Group drop down box select a different group for the user e If necessary enter a new e mail address for the user in the E mail Address text box Click OK Click Apply Stops Security Department Security Departmen Figure 184 M odify M ember Attributes 227 228 SENDING E MAIL NOTIFICATIONS This section describes how to send e mail notifications and includes the following topics Sending E mail Notifications to Individuals To configure e mail notifications to send alerts to an individual 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 3 Sending E mail Notifications to Individuals on page 228 Sending E mail Notifications to Groups on page 229 Click 2 The Notification page is displayed Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab Do the following a In the To text box enter the e mail address of the individual to whom you would like to send e mail notifications b Optional In the CC text box enter a second e mail address of a
265. on Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration page is displayed 5 In the Data Format List highlight the name of a data format 6 Click Edit The Data Format dialog box opens 7 Verify that the name of the data format you want to edit is displayed in the Data Format Name text box 8 Perform the edits 9 Do one of the following To accept the changes click OK To not accept the changes click Cancel C2630M B 4 08 Deleting a Data Format To delete an existing data format 1 2 33 In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed In the Communication Port drop down box select a port Port 1 to Port 4 The device mode option is not available for COM 1 In the selected device drop down box select an ATM POS device In the Communication Port Configuration section click Configure The Device Configuration page is displayed Click the Data Format tab The Data Format List page is displayed In the Data Format List highlight the name of a data format Click Delete A DX8100 message box is displayed prompting you to confirm deletion of the data format Do one of the following To delete the data format click Yes Tonotaccept the deletion click No or Cancel Assigning a Data Format to an ATM POS Device After you have created a data format you can assign it to a specific ATM POS device To assign an existing data format to a specific ATM POS dev
266. on page is displayed Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab In the Mail Group area do the following a Click Manage Groups The Group Management dialog box opens b Click Add Group The M anage Groups dialog box opens c Enter the name of the group Group names can be up to 32 characters in length and can include spaces but not special characters Click OK Click Close Click Apply Modifying an E mail Group Name To modify a group name 1 2 3 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click 2 The Notification page is displayed Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab In the Mail Group area do the following a Click Manage Groups The Group M anagement dialog box opens b Inthe Group Name table select a group c Click Edit Group The M anage Groups dialog box opens d Edit the existing name or enter a new name for the group Click OK Click Close Click Apply Deleting an E mail Group To delete a group 1 2 3 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click 2 The Notification page is displayed Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab In the Mail Group area do the following a Click Manage Groups The Group M anagement dialog box opens b Inthe Group Name table select a group c Click Delete Click Close Click Apply C2630M B 4 08 Adding Members to an E mail Gro
267. ontrols iiien nrm a evade e a a Me Dee teed deca Pee An MEA bead tato eyed 92 Setting a Starting BOOM alt ors chan tiaweny oeiaa nietees iit dies Leto ed ds uc bare Manne ci abelian 93 Removingsa Single BOOKMATE n a sonia tadides a a te ceil a rd didde wanna ad a ides Gonna Madd 93 Book Marking Multiple Time REGIONS aiie iei cect ere i T EEE EERE EEE EEE DED E EERE Ere EEE Ee 94 Selecting a Time Range for DUpNCatiON eriei crni raat ares de ni ineat Senet pi eread besa veda idad berg inne 94 Select Channel Dialog Box 1 A A A edie diane ESOS 95 Selecting the Export Device and Time Ranges 2 te etn ttt tenn 95 Installing a USB flash OWES i iia ies ban neva de ldaw a AT RA ood sae cid do 96 Enabling the Deinterlacing Filter from the Export Video Dialog BOX 0 cece cece cece cette cette tees eee nee et etn en enneens 97 Export Video Dialog BOX iss nc fv nnesg oa peeve el enki ster A de besa A deen A 98 Export ing Selecta VI it A SE aul ata tan ab ttt ta Y Din 100 Export TIME RANGE iio sv a E e E E e eis bas A ede be 101 Default File Names Mateos ct bho aE eveudho tans ued ENERE oi C PONE E EEN hoeninn ted AE tan coca 101 Renaming Expor Time Ranges sits sted il a Sade te titel A tens 102 StullIMage Export Formats andiye i a A Aa A here aes 103 Real Time Versus Non Real Time Export 0 0 cece cece ce cree ener rere Ee EEE EEE DEDEDE EE EEE EEE EEE Erg 104 Accessing Log Commands from the Application WindoW cocco tt nent ene 105 Log
268. or to a time later than the current retention time limit all video data if the retention time is set to Unlimited or data within the newly set retention time limit can be viewed To set the data retention time limit 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 9 The System page is displayed 3 Inthe Data Retention Time Limit area select a retention time limit from the drop down list Data Retention Time Limit CEE i Unlimited Figure 174 Data Retention Time Limit Entered M anually 4 Click Apply The Shut Down dialog box opens prompting you to restart the DX8100 C2630M B 4 08 209 5 Do one of the following To restart the DX8100 to use the new settings click Yes The DX8100 restarts To cancel the new settings click No The current time limit setting is restored and the system does not restart WORKING WITH ONLINE HELP The DX8100 server includes an online Help system By default the Help system is disabled and not available for viewing The Admin user has authority to configure the DX8100 to display or not display online Help W hen Help is enabled all user groups can open and view the Help system NOTE There is a security risk when Help is enabled A guest user can gain access to the Windows file manager through the online Help system To enable disable Help for viewing 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2
269. ore changing any port information on the DX8100 Table AO TCP IP Ports Used by the DX8100 Port Number User Changeable Description 9002 Yes Base port for transmission of video audio and interface data 9003 Yes Softwareupgrades 9004 Yes Emergency agent notifications 9005 No Information port 13900 No Ping port Access the Network page to set up the TCP IP DHCP and bandwidth throttle options For information on accessing the Network page refer to Setting Up DX8100 Network Access on page 151 Consult your network administrator before assigning or changing port numbers M ake sure that the ports are not blocked internally but are protected from external threats by a firewall Client and server ports must be identical To configure the base port and software upgrade port 1 If necessary in the DX8100 Base Port box enter a new base port number 9002 is the default 2 If necessary in the Software Upgrade Port box enter a new software upgrade port 9003 is the default 3 If necessary in the Information Port box enter a new information port 9005 is the default 4 To set the network bandwidth throttle to limit the amount of network resources allocated to client connections drag the network bandwidth throttle slider to the desired value Client bandwidth can be adjusted from a minimum of 64 Kbps to a maximum of 10 M bps in increments of 64 Kbps 5 Click Apply C2630M B 4 08 153 WORKING WITH MULT
270. ow to set up camera mapping and includes the following topics Setting Up Automatic Camera M apping e Setting Up M anual Camera M apping on page 211 C2630M B 4 08 Setting Up Automatic Camera Mapping Automatic camera mapping offers a simplified method for configuring the Capture Card analog output Video from each camera source will be automatically cycled across the monitor s view panels In automatic mode all cameras will be displayed sequentially starting with Camera 1 and continuing through Camera 32 depending on your system s configuration The automatic camera mapping feature includes the following stipulations The automated sequence will be interrupted each time a motion or alarm event is detected When the DVR detects an event either motion or alarm it will switch the monitor output to display the camera source that detected the event The amount of time the event channel overrides the automated sequence can be set from 1 60 seconds Eight channel DVRs offer only the 1 x 1 2 x 2 and 3 x 3 view panel options If you select more than one screen division each camera channel will cycle through each screen before the next panel division is presented To configure automatic camera mapping 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click The External Output page is displayed 3 In the Auto Camera M apping M ode section do the following a Select the Auto Camera M ap
271. ox opens to the Camera page 2 Click 2 The Notification page is displayed 3 Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab CONFIGURING EMERGENCY E MAIL NOTIFICATION This section describes how to set up emergency e mail notification and includes the following topics e Enabling or Disabling E mail Notification Setting Up the E mail Server e Testing E mail Notification on page 220 Enabling or Disabling E mail Notification To enable or disable emergency e mail notification 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 2 The Notification page is displayed 3 Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab 4 Inthe Emergency E mail Notification page do one of the following e Clickthe Enable Notification button to enable e mail notification e Clickthe Disable Notification button to disable e mail notification Setting Up the E mail Server Set up the e mail server in the Emergency E M ail Notification page For information on accessing the Emergency E M ail Notification page refer Accessing the Emergency E mail Notification Setup on page 219 To set up the e mail server 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 2 The Notification page is displayed 3 Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab 4 Enter a name in the Full Name text box You should enter a name that reflects the DX8100 server sending the notification
272. p DNS WINS on page 155 CONFIGURING THE DX8100 FOR NETWORK ACCESS Using the TCP IP protocol up to five DX8100 Series DVRs can be networked for remote viewing and management In addition up to five simultaneous PC Web and mobile clients can connect to each DVR The DX8100 Series DVR supports both static IP addressing and dynamic addressing through Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Consult your network administrator for more information on IP address configuration The system must be turned on and connected to a secured private network and you must be logged in with either Power User or Administrator access to configure network software settings You must reboot the DVR for any network configuration changes to take effect This section describes how to setup network access and includes the following topics Setting Up DX8100 Network Access Setting Up DHCP on page 152 e Setting Up a Static IP Address on page 153 Setting Up DX8100 Network Access To begin the network setup process 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 2 In the Setup dialog box click The Network page is displayed 3 Click the Network tab if it is not already selected 4 Entera new name for your DVR in the Site Name field Site names can be up to 30 characters in length the default site name is DX8100 C2630M B 4 08 151 5 Entera unique System ID for your DVR in the System ID field System IDs must star
273. page 29 40 C2630M B 4 08 SETTING UP FAVORITES The DX8100 Favorites menu allows you to organize and save camera views For example you might want to display camera views that show the delivery gate entrance for buildings 1 4 7 and 12 during the hours of 06 00 to 07 30 and another camera view that displays the front lobby of buildings 1 through 16 at 08 00 This section describes the following topics e Adding a Camera View to Favorites Organizing Favorites in Folders ADDING A CAMERA VIEW TO FAVORITES You can create multiple camera views to monitor various site locations For example you could create a folder named Day Shift for displaying camera views during normal working hours and Night Shift for displaying various camera views after work and during the night hours For information about organizing favorites into folders refer to Organizing Favorites in Folders To add a camera view to favorites 1 From the DX8100 menu bar click Favorite gt Add to Favorites The Add to Favorites dialog box opens pddtoravortes x Favorites note Cancel Name fi Create In gt gt Figure 10 Add to Favorites Dialog Box 2 Enter the camera view name in the Name text box 3 Click OK The camera view is added to the favorites and the Add to Favorites dialog box closes 4 To view the new entry from the DX8100 menu bar click Favorites The new entry appears in the Favorites list File Edit View Export Favorite Help A
274. perating modes Table I Operating Modes Icon Mode Description gt Live Enters the display mode and opens the DX8100 main window where live and playback video is displayed 4 Live mode Allows all users to view live video Playback mode Allows users with playback access rights to play back recorded video Search Enters the search mode and opens the Search window providing access to search features Allows users with a playback access rights to search video data using specific criteria Setup Enters the setup mode and opens the Setup dialog box to the Camera setup page default view and allows Y access to the other setup pages Users with Power User access and higher are allowed to set up the features and options for the DVR DISPLAYING VIDEO IN FULL SCREEN VIEW The DX8100 allows full screen viewing of video data in the live playback and index search mode providing more screen area to display video Displaying Live Video in Full Screen View To display live video in full window view 1 Select the live video mode For information about working in the playback mode refer to Working in Live View M ode on page 40 2 Selecta window division 3 On the DX8100 toolbar click Live video is displayed in full screen view To display the DX8100 main window from the full screen view e Right click in the DX8100 window Displaying Playback Video in Full Screen View To display playback video i
275. perties 112 PTZ locking auto timeout 112 PTZ protocol 111 security level 111 security level selecting 111 video loss detection 118 single assigning to view pane 36 standard audio 114 zoom adjusting 49 camera designator 44 camera event detection and repositioning overview 124 camera mapping 210 camera removing a linked alarm input 39 Capture Card optional 210 capture card analog output setting up 210 Capture Card displaying video 40 channel mapping 32 channel resolution 129 Coaxitron protocol 51 C2630M B 3 08 COM 1communications properties 163 commands auxiliary sending 58 compression video 140 connecting DX8000 DVRs 109 D D protocol 51 data bits 164 165 data communications dome devices setting up 163 data packets 153 data retention time 209 data transmissions 153 designators camera 44 site 44 digital zoom control 22 diskspace 22 disk status indicator 22 display mode Live video 27 playback video 27 See pane panel DNS or WINS services setting up 155 documentation printed 16 Dome communications ports settingup 163 Dual Display Card 32 dwell time 25 DX8000 command descriptions 23 exiting application 23 overview of application window 20 DX8000 application logginginto 17 DX8000 application window panels 28 panes 28 DX8000 setting up 109 dynamic IP address remote site 197 dynamic link library DLL files installing 183 dynamic link library DLL files updating 183 e mail notification over
276. ping M ode button b Select from the screen division options c Select dwell time 1 60 seconds from the drop down box This is the amount of time each window will remain on the monitor d Select the type of event that will be allowed to override the monitor output e Alarm input Motion detection e Set the dwell time an event will be allowed to override the screen 1 60 seconds 4 Click the Apply button at the bottom of the page 3b External Output E Auto Camera Mapping Mode ion O A AE HH time 10 y 1 60 Seconds Override monitor output in response to this type of event Motion detection gt Motion alarm override dwell time 10 1 60 Seconds Figure 175 External Monitor Automatic M apping Setting Up Manual Camera Mapping Manual camera mapping allows a user to customize the Capture Card analog output Individual cameras can be assigned to view panels in any combination Each customized screen can be added to a sequence list and assigned a specific amount of dwell time These combinations of customized screens and corresponding dwell times make up sequence instances multiple sequence instances can be combined into a sequence list The resulting list will sequentially display each instance on an external monitor in a continuous loop The sequence will continue uninterrupted until an alarm or motion event overrides the cycle The manual camera mapping feature has the following stipulations Eigh
277. play video on the extended monitor connected to the Dual Display Card VGA connector You can also reconfigure the Dual Display Card to display video on a composite monitor connected to the Dual Display Card BNC connector For information about how to reconfigure the Dual Display Card refer to the Dual Display Card Installation manual C2637M The Dual Display Card must be installed in the DX8100 and you must be logged on to the DX8100 application for the Channel M apping icon e to be available The DX8100 division buttons allow you to configure multiple extended monitor views The following figure shows the 9 Division view The DX8100 supports up to nine different channel mapping views Selected cameras from the site tree can be displayed on the extended monitor and can be assigned to multiple views Each view is set up independently removing a camera from one view does not remove it from another To set up channel mapping for the extended monitor VGA or composite 32 C2630M B 4 08 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click the Channel M apping icon e You can also access this page from the Setup dialog box by Extemal Output Channel Mapping for Extended Monitor O E E E El ll Oe E Panel 1 4 N A The setup page opens to the Channel M apping for Extended M onitor tab clicking the Ext M onitor icon N A N A N A N A N A N A N A NA Cancel Apply Figure 6 Channel M app
278. plays backup schedules waiting to be executed information Backup time The date and time a backup schedule is defined to run Filter The channels selected for back up Targetdevice The selected backup media device Enqueue time The system s estimated time for backup completion Waiting backup Allows you to do the following Priority up Allows you to move the selected backup schedule to a higher place in the list Priority down Allows you to move the selected backup schedule to a lower place in the list Delete Allows you to delete the selected backup schedule Running backup information Lists the backup schedules that are currently running ACCESSING THE BACKUP CONFIGURATION PAGE For information on the Backup schedule page refer to Data Backup Setup on page 184 To access the Backup page 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Inthe Setup dialog box click amp C2630M B 4 08 186 ADDING A BACKUP SCHEDULE The DX8100 allows you to configure the start time and time range for backing up data The backup schedule can be configured to run on a daily basis at a set time and for a specified time range Or you can set up the backup schedule s to run on selected days of the week In this case selecting a weekly backup schedule allows you to customize the start time and time range for each selected day of the week The start date and time cannot be
279. ple if the start time is 6 00 and the end time is 18 00 a low video level event from 18 01 to 5 59 will not be detected The low video level detection time option is only available when the low level of video option is selected The DX8100 also stores a video incident as a video loss recovery event The status provides the start and restore time for the video loss event The DX8100 allows you to select the loss of synchronization and low level of video option independently C2630M B 4 08 The PTZ camera and multiple relay output can be mapped to a video loss event Multiple cameras can be configured to record in response to a video loss event The DX8100 can be configured to use emergency agent notification In this case the last available video image at the time the event occurred is sent to the designated remote client If no image exist then the system attaches a red colored pane to the e mail The red pane contains the text Video Loss For information about setting up emergency notification referto Emergency Notification Setup on page 216 The DX8100 can be configured to send an e mail notification in response to a video loss event In this case the last available video image at the time the event occurred is attached to the e mail If no image exist then the system attaches a red colored pane to the e mail The red pane contains the text Video Loss For information about setting up emergency notification refer to Emergency E
280. ppear in the view area until you click Apply Click Default to return all picture property settings to the normal state You can click the Hide Show button to clear the view area to get a better look at your picture property changes Refer to step 2 in M otion Detection Setup on page 113 5 Click Apply Motion Zone m Channel Information Name Camera 4 Camera 4 Zonet y Resolution 352 x 240 Frame Rate 15 fps pa 7 r la e s Recording Mode Normal Recording ss HHH OAN y E Pre Alarm Post Alarm Linked Alarm 4 Linked Relay None Audio Installed Enable r Camera Properties m Motion Detection Selected Channel Camer d4 y I Disable Number of Blocks 4 2020 a D Camera Name Camera 4 SE Sensitivity F 500 A Hide Select All Clear All Camera Security None y ele PTZ Locking Auto timeout 10 Sec y PTZ Adjustment Test Panl Pan Titu TitD y Audio Settings i E LEE pew paa Audio Channel I Disable ip Swit None z View WER ee 2 m Video Loss Detection r Picture Adjustment Video Loss I Loss of synchronization Bri j retValue T Low level of video rightness 127 0 128 0 Low Level of Video Detection Operation Time 7 Contrast I 0 sret Time papa End Time 3 Has E Apply to All Cameras 127 0 128 0 IV Protocol IV Motion Detection Saturation ooo WM Camera Security IV
281. r above to trigger an exception You can use a period to separate dollars and cents but do not use a comma between thousands and hundreds e Inthe This Exception Effect section do one of the following e Accept the default display effect setting e Inthe Display Effect drop down box select Don t Show or Show 9 Click OK 10 At the Advanced page do one of the following Click Apply to confirm selection and remain in the Device Configuration dialog box Click OK to confirm selection and return to the Port Device page Table AW ATM POS Exception M odifiers Modifier Description None Value to the right is not used and is disabled gt Greater than Trigger exception only if the value found on the line is greater than the value entered in the Value text box lt Less than Trigger exception only if the value found on the line is less than the value entered in the Value text box Equal to Trigger exception only if the value found on the line is equal to the value entered in the Value field l Not equal to Trigger exception only if the value found on the line is not equal to the value entered in the Value field C2630M B 4 08 177 178 Editing an ATM POS Exception To editan ATM POS exception 1 2 33 In the Network page click the Port Device tab The Port Device page is displayed In the Communication Port drop down box select a port Port 1 to Port 4 The device mode option
282. r an event occurs or periodically according to a predefined schedule You can configure up to 32 e mail groups and up to 32 members can be assigned to each e mail group Before sending notifications you must provide information about your e mail server and establish the events motion alarm and video loss that you want to include in the e mail message Timing and frequency of the e mail notifications must also be set You should test the e mail notification function immediately after configuration to ensure your system is set up correctly C2630M B 4 08 NOTES To use emergency e mail notification the DX8100 Series DVR must be connected to a LAN that maintains an SM TP mail server The network must also be connected to either an intranet or the Internet depending on the location of the e mail accounts to which you want to send notifications Consult your network administrator for information on configuring e mail notification on your local network DX8100 does not support Google Gmail This section describes how to set up emergency e mail notification and includes the following topics e Accessing the Emergency E mail Notification Setup Configuring Emergency E mail Notification on page 219 e Setting Up the Time Period on page 221 Sending E mail Notifications on page 228 ACCESSING THE EMERGENCY E MAIL NOTIFICATION SETUP To access the emergency e mail notification setup 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog b
283. r and includes the following topics Accessing a Preset Tour Group Adding Presets to a Tour on page 60 Deleting Presets from a Tour on page 61 Accessing a Preset Tour Group To access the Preset tour group dialog box 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click 4 2 On the DX8100 keypad click and then on the PTZ keypad The Preset tour group dialog box opens 3 Select the preset tour 1 4 that you want to program from the drop down box 4 Do one of the following To add presets to a tour refer to Adding Presets to a Tour on page 60 To delete presets from a tour refer to Deleting Presets from a Tour on page 61 Preset tour group x Available presets v Number Name DwellTime sec Eli Preset01 2 Preset02 O 2 m 3 Preset03 2 O 4 Preset04 2 Os Preset05 2 Na Preset 2 Add to Group Preset Tour Group lv 01 6 Delete Save Apply exe Figure 34 Preset Tour Dialog Box C2630M B 4 08 59 Adding Presets to a Tour To add presets to a tour 1 Access the Preset tour group dialog box For information on accessing the Preset tour group dialog box refer to Accessing a Preset Tour Group on page 59 2 Click the check box beside one of the presets you want to add to the tour 3 Double click in the Dwell Time field of a preset and then increase or decrease the time in seconds at which the camera will remain during that sequence of the tour 4 Repeat step
284. r option is selected the URL option is not available In this case the IP option button is automatically selected and you must provide the DX8100 NTP Server IP address or e Ifthe SNTP Server options is selected you can do nothing and accept the default URL option button In this case you must enter the SNTP Server URL e Clickthe IP option button and enter the SNTP Server IP address e Enter either the NTP server URL or IP address f Accept the default NPT server port number or enter a port number 5 Click OK The DX8100 attempts to locate the NTP server If successful the NTP server is added to the NTP Server List The DX8100 displays the message NTP server not found if the server cannot be located Editing a NTP Time Server To edit a NTP time server 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page 2 In the Setup dialog box click The Network page is displayed 3 Click the NTP tab The NTP page is displayed Local Time Aug 23 2006 12 54 59 Update Time zone GMT 08 00 Pacific Time US Canada Tijuana NTP Server 0 poolntp ora 81 91 70 122 Add Edit Delete Difference Check the difference Synchronize Clock immediately I Auto start Z Synchronize when system starts I Synchronize time in intervals h m 10 3 2 3 F DB Overwrite I Enable NTP Service Last attempt status Auto synchronized 12 24 29 PM 08 23 2006 Figure 136 Editin
285. r to see which cameras are active Some DVRs have eight channels while others have 16 24 or 32 To refresh the screen to verify which cameras are active 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 In the Setup dialog box click 3 Select the M anual button if it is not already selected 4 Enter a remote site IP address 5 Click Refresh 6 Click Apply r Ske Information r Manual Q C SiteName qm gt lt I Camera 1 I Camera 2 F Camera 3 I Camera 9 F Camera 9 I Camera 10 T Camera 15 I Camera 16 I Camera 17 FF Camera 21 I Camera 22 I Camera 23 FF Camera 27 TF Camera 28 I Camera 29 r Site IP ist Add gt gt DX8100Lab 10 106 12 213 Add Group Edt _ oe I Camera 4 I Camera 5 I Camera 6 I Camera 7 F Camera 11 I Camera 12 TF Camera 13 F Camera 14 T Camera 18 T Camera 19 M Camera 20 I Camera24 I Camera25 Camera 26 I Camera 30 I Camera 31 I Camera 32 8 Figure 166 Finalizing Site Setup ACTIVATING REMOTE SITES Comcel tony The DX8100 only supports up to five remote connections However one PC client can connect up to 100 servers simultaneously Using the multicast feature the DX8100 DVR can support an unlimited number of W eb client connections To activate up to five remote sites 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 In the Setup dialog box click
286. rarchy 4 Select the settings file you want to open 6 Click Open Click Import Now 203 204 6 Click Apply r Export Import Configuration Export Browse J Q_ Import Browse Import Now F Camera Linking F Schedule I User F Monitor F Port T Backup I Site Setup FT asp FT ATM POS ject All Figure 168 Import DX8100 Server Configuration Using the Edit Menu to Perform an Import To import a settings file from a specific drive or folder l From the DX8100 menu bar choose Edit gt Import Setup The DX8100 Setup File Import Dialog box opens Select the folder location of the file you want to import Click the Up button to move up a level in the folder hierarchy Click the settings file you want to open Click Open USING SYSTEM LOGS The DX8100 automatically stores system information in a number of log files Users with Power User access and higher can use these files to track system statistics and monitor security The DX8100 allows you to view its activity log and Windows OS log files This section describes how to use the system logs and includes the following topics Viewing a Log File on page 205 Exporting Log Information on page 206 C2630M B 4 08 The following table lists DX8100 activities and Windows OS log views The log views are available from the View menu in the application window Viewing a Log File To view a log file Table BD DX8100 Activities Windows OS
287. ration Screen 320K240 11PS 320240 11P5 320240 1Ps 320x240 11PS 320X240 y 11PS X 320x240 y 11PS 320x240 y 11PS 320 240 y 11PS 320x240 11P5 320x240 11PS 320x240 11PS 320x240 11PS 320x240 TIPS 143 Understanding DX8100 Server Maximum IPS Recording The DX8100 can record at frame rates up to 480 IPS NTSC and 400 IPS PAL The total frame rate capacity is distributed among 8 16 24 32 channels depending on the configuration of your unit Resolution and frame rate values can be assigned evenly among all channels or they can be configured independently for individual channel Frame rate values can also be customized according to recording mode normal motion alarm and ATM POS For information about setting up the DX8100 to record at the maximum rate and resolution refer to Setting Up DX8100 for Maximum IPS Recording Table AH DX8100 Server Maximum IPS Recording ee NTSC IPS PAL IPS Total Per Camera Total Per Camera CIF 240 30 200 25 DX8108 2CIF 120 15 100 12 ACIF 60 7 50 6 CIF 480 30 400 25 DX8116 2CIF 240 15 200 12 ACIF 120 1 100 6 CIF 360 15 300 12 DX8124 2CIF 180 6 150 6 ACIF 90 3 75 3 CIF 480 15 400 12 DX8132 2CIF 240 6 200 6 ACIF 120 3 100 3 Setting Up DX8100 for Maximum IPS Recording The following table describes how the DX8100 organizes cameras channels into groups of four cameras per group To achieve th
288. ree years on PM CL200 300 400 Series LCD monitors 2 Date of shipment P O number sales order number or Pelco invoice number Two years on standard motorized or fixed focal length lenses 3 Details of the defect or problem Two years on Legacy CM 6700 CM 6800 CM 9700 Series matrix and DF5 DF8 Series fixed dome products Two years on Spectra Ill Spectra Mini Esprit ExSite and PS20 scanners including when used in continuous motion applications Two years on Esprit and WW5700 Series window wiper excluding wiper Method of return shipment shall be the same or equal to the method by which the blades item was received by Pelco Two years except lamp and color wheel on Digital Light Processing DLP displays The lamp and color wheel will be covered for a period of 90 days The RETURNS air filter is not covered under warranty y To expedite parts returned for repair or credit please call Pelco at 800 289 9100 T MO dad aoa Wall meee ONE TS or 559 292 1981 to obtain an authorization number CA number if returned for One year except video heads on video cassette recorders VCRs Video heads credit and RA number if returned for repair and designated return location will be covered for a period of six months Six months on all pan and tilts scanners or preset lenses used in continuous All merchandise returned for credit may be subject to a 20 percent restocking and motion applications preset scan tour and auto
289. rm selection and remain in the Device Configuration dialog box Click OK to confirm selection and return to the Port Device page C2630M B 4 08 167 Device Configuration E xl General Settings Data Format Text to Screen Advanced Diagnostics Available ATM POS Device ATM POS Name Data Format Protocol 1 ATM POSO1 1 Modified ER 650 POS GENERAL 02 ATM POSO2 2 None None O3 ATM POSO3 3 None None Os ATM POS04 4 None None os ATM POSO5 5 None None Os ATM POSO6 6 None None O7 ATM POSO 7 None None Os atm posos 8 None None O9 aAtm Posos 9 None None O10 aTmMPOS10 10 None None O11 armPost1 11 None None O12 ATM P0S12 12 None None O13 ATM POS13 13 None None O14 ATM POS14 14 None None O15 ATM POS15 15 None None O16 ATM POS16 16 None None xl WARNING If a device is set to the single mode only one device can be assigned to the connection port Apply ox Cancel Figure 148 Assigning the Data Format ATM POS Devices 12 Click Linking 29 The Linking setup page is displayed 13 Click Event Recording Link Settings The Event Recording Link Settings page is displayed Relay and Alarm Settings Event Relay Link Settings Event Recording Link Settings Event PTZ Link Settings r Motion Record Link Settings Motion Source Camera CAMERAO1 Y Camera Name Camera 1 p Enable Record on Source Camera Motion Per ca ca ce 05 05 Ler ffe Les 000 09 cra cra cra
290. rmat Page circ cece rr rr rr 171 AU Transaction Start and End Parameters w 0 ceri iieri origioe van dra ns ad a a e rei ed a 171 ANG Acton A O A 175 AWSATM IPOS Exception Modifier eeen A A eee es Ai dens 177 AX KB300A Standard Operational Mode Features ccc cc rr 182 AY KBD300A Shift Mode Operational Features 00cc cc rca rr rr 183 AZ Parts of the Backup Schedule Page arre vdeo cites ls DAS E E a ellas 185 BA Parts Of the UP A A A a A A A Sabian eta 192 BB Default User Group Access Rights cocco ccro o corr 193 BE Default Camera Security Levels acia dd ad a ta p dows dn dug b s Deaton Be O 193 BD DX8100 Activities Windows OS LOG Files oo ccc cece eter o ere rr rr 205 C2630M B 4 08 11 Operation and Programming You are reading DX8100 Series digital video recorder DVR version 1 2 documentation The information in this manual describes how to configure and use the DX8100 system in your security application For a brief description of the DX8100 server and client applications refer to Welcome to the DX8100 Series DVR Welcome to the DX8100 Series DVR Welcome to the DX8100 Series DX8100 DVR features dual monitor display multimode recording for up to 16 ATM POS devices or single mode recording for up to four ATM POS devices system health status and configuration multi event recording continuous motion detection alarm and scheduled recording The DX8100 is a high performance PC based easy to operate DVR and
291. rmation E HDD Modet ST 375054005 y High Limit HDD Temperature 33 C 31 40 F 80 c 176000 F Network Information UPS Information Status Connected Link Speed 1000 0 Mbps Bandwidth Utilization 0 0 Mbps r Setting SMART Update Intervat 1 hr y System Update Interval 120 min y Figure 83 System Health Dialog Box 3 To set a threshold for a device function do the following a Click the text box for the device function b Enter the value you want Click Apply d Click Close to exit the dialog box A C2630M B 4 08 107 108 WORKING WITH SYSTEM HEALTH LOG VIEW The System Health Log allows you to view a history of the events that have occurred A calendar function allows you to use a date range to display health status events To access the System Health Log 1 From the DX8100 menu bar click View gt System Health View 2 On the submenu select Log View The System Health Log opens System Health Log E xj System Health Check 14 51 45 MOTHERBOARD Temperaturel 50 35 14 52 45 MOTHERBOARD TemperaturelL 45 35 14 53 45 MOTHERBOARD Temperaturel 44 35 14 54 45 MOTHERBOARD Temperaturel 45 35 14 55 45 MOTHERBOARD J Temperaturel 46 35 14 56 45 MOTHERBOARD 1 Temperaturel 51 35 14 57 45 MOTHERBOARD Temperaturel 44 35 14 58 45 MOTHERBOARD L Temperaturel 45 35 14 59 45 MOTHERBOARD Tempera
292. rrent configuration up to 32 video cameras can be connected to a single DX8100 The following section illustrates basic camera configuration You must be logged in as an Administrator or Power User to configure cameras This section describes how to setup the camera and includes the following topics Basic Camera Setup Motion Detection Setup on page 113 Audio Setup on page 114 e Applying Settings to all Cameras on page 118 BASIC CAMERA SETUP To set up camera picture and PTZ options 1 Do one of the following e Onthe DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog opens to the Camera page e Ifthe Setup dialog box is already open click cam The Camera page is displayed 2 In the Camera Properties section do the following a Select a camera from the drop down box You can also select a camera from the Site tree by clicking on it b Select the Disable check box if you want to disable the camera c Enter an optional new name for the camera Camera names can be up to 32 characters long and can include spaces and special characters d Set camera security level The default security levels are as follows None The camera can be viewed by all users Low The camera can be viewed by all users including the Guest account NOTE If you do not want video from a low security level camera to be viewed by the Guest user set the security level for that cameras to medium or higher Medium The camera can be viewed by users w
293. rt PTZ functions and at least one PTZ preset pattern must be defined for this function to work C2630M B 4 08 6 Click Apply ATM POS Link Settings ATM POS Address ATM PO ATM POS Name TM POSO1 501 x Linked PTZ Setting camera q y Linked Camera Preset Not in use C Linked Camera Pattem Not in use L Figure 106 Event PTZ Link Settings Linking Presets and Patterns to ATM POS Events Linking Presets and Patterns to Video Loss Events To link a video loss event to a camera so the detected video loss event results in a repositioning of that camera 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 29 The Linking page is displayed 3 Click the Event PTZ Link Settings tab 4 Inthe Video Loss Link Settings section do the following a Selecta camera channel from the Video Loss Channel drop down box b In the Linked PTZ Setting section select a camera to be linked from the Linked Camera Channel drop down box This camera will change PTZ position in response to a video loss event detected by the source camera 5 To select a PTZ preset or pattern for the linked camera in the Linked PTZ Setting section do the one of the following To force the linked camera to move to a PTZ preset in response to a video loss event detected by the source camera 1 Click the Linked Camera Preset button to select this option 2 In the Preset drop down
294. s 1 and 2 for each additional preset you want to add to the tour 5 Click Add to Group 6 Click Save 7 Click Exit to return to the main screen Preset tour group xj Available presets y Number Name DwellTime Sec 2 1 Preset01 2 Preset02 7 2 5 __ O E oO 4 Preset04 2 Os Preset05 2 Na Preset Y y Number Name DwellTime Sec O 1 Preset01 2 O2 Preset02 7 O 3 Preset03 5 Delete E Save Apply Exit Figure 35 Adding Preset to Tour 60 C2630M B 4 08 Deleting Presets from a Tour To delete presets from a tour 1 Access the Preset tour group dialog box For information on accessing the Preset tour group dialog box refer to Accessing a Preset Tour Group on page 59 2 Click the check box beside one or more presets you want to delete from the preset tour group 3 Click Delete 4 Click Save 5 Click Exit to return to the main screen Preset tour group xj Available presets 1 Preset01 2 2 Preset02 7 3 Preset03 5 O 4 Preset04 2 O 5 Preset05 2 Na Preset gt y Add to Group Preset Tour Group vo 3 v Number Name TDmelTimeses Oi Preset01 2 21 2 PresetO2 O 3 Preset03 5 a he 32 Figure 36 Deleting Preset from Tour C2630M B 4 08 62 ACTIVATING A PRESET TOUR This section describes how to activate a preset tour You can save a preset tour for later use without engaging the tour by not performing step 5 Then continue
295. s are locked out All other users must wait until the controls for that device have been left idle for the amount of time configured for that camera as specified in the PTZ Locking Auto timeout drop down box To perform a PTZ test click Pan L left Pan R right Tilt U up and Tilt D down to verify that the camera responds to PTZ commands g Setthe selected camera address as follows 1 2 In the Dip Switch Address drop down box select an address from the available addresses If the selected camera s protocol is set to NO PTZ or PELCO C the DIP Switch Address drop down box is unavailable In this case the camera s dip switch setting cannot be set using software This option is available for cameras and protocols that support software configured addresses Only one address can be assigned per camera The DX8100 displays an error message if you attempt to assign the same address to different cameras To view the camera DIP switch address setting for all attached local cameras click View The DIP Switch Address View dialog box opens The assigned DIP switch setting for all attached cameras is displayed In the Picture Adjustment section adjust picture properties by moving sliders for Brightness Contrast Hue and Saturation As you adjust the picture properties of a camera on the local DVR changes will be reflected immediately in the view area near the top of the screen Changes made to cameras at a remote site will not a
296. s detected C2630M B 4 08 0 co ceci mr ces Fora 7 Total recorded 2 0 341 10 4 Figure 49 DX8100 DVR Index Search Screen THUMBNAIL VIDEO SEARCH Thumbnail search allows users to visually search video that has been recorded over a 24 hour period Video is presented as a series of thumbnail images Each thumbnail represents the first image recorded during a specified period of time Thumbnails can be expanded and collapsed to represent hourly 10 minute and 1 minute intervals The DX8100 allows sharing of time range search settings between the Thumbnail and Pixel search mode In this case if you initiate a Thumbnail search you can select a preview clip and initiate a Pixel search The Pixel search mode is based on the same time criteria as the preview Thumbnail clip To visually search video using thumbnail images 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click al 2 Onthe DX8100 Search control click GR B 3 Select a camera from the Site tree 4 From the drop down box select the date on which you want to begin your search 5 Click the thumbnail for the hour you want to begin searching 6 Click to change the thumbnail time range to shorter intervals or click Ito change the thumbnail time range to longer intervals Click ete change from 1 hour intervals to 10 minute intervals Click again to change from 10 minute intervals to 1 minute intervals Click once to change from 1 minute intervals to 10
297. s set to M edium 16 bit video will not be displayed on the extended monitor d In the Screen resolution area set the resolution to match the resolution set for the primary monitor e By default the extended monitor s icon is located to the right of the primary monitor s icon Do nothing to accept the default location or left click and drag the icon to the desired location 8 Click OK 9 Restart the DX8100 The Pelco slash screen is displayed on the extended monitor For information about mapping channels for display on the extended monitor refer to M apping Channels on the Extended M onitor on page 32 C2630M B 4 08 19 Understanding the DX8100 Application Window This section describes the DX8100 application window and its operation The application window is the central control center where you can access to the DX8100 features and functions View both live and recorded video Exit to the Windows environment Access DX8100 setup features Control camera PTZ functions Select cameras for viewing and recording Specify playback date and time Access playback controls This section includes the following topics Description of the DX8100 M ain Window Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 28 Working with the Site tree on page 35 DESCRIPTION OF THE DX8100 MAIN WINDOW The application window is displayed after the DX8100 starts The main window provides access to both live and recorded video The DX8100 d
298. scan modes refurbishing charge Pelco will warrant all replacement parts and repairs for 90 days from the date of Goods returned for repair or credit should be clearly identified with the assigned Pelco shipment All goods requiring warranty repair shall be sent freight prepaid CA or RA number and freight should be prepaid to a Pelco designated location Repairs made necessary by reason of misuse alteration normal wear or accident are not covered under this warranty If a warranty repair is required the Dealer must contact Pelco at 800 289 9100 or 559 292 1981 to obtain a Repair Authorization number RA and provide the following information If there is a dispute regarding the warranty of a product that does not fall under the warranty conditions stated above please include a written explanation with the product when returned Green The materials used in the manufacture of this document and its components are compliant to the requirements of Directive 2002 95 EC This equipment contains electrical or electronic components that must be recycled properly to comply with Directive 2002 96 EC of the European Union regarding the disposal of waste electrical and electronic equipment WEEE Contact your local dealer for procedures for recycling this equipment REVISION HISTORY Manual Date Comments C2630M 9 06 Original version C2630M A 6 07 Added new features data retention custom setting full screen button multica
299. se pointer in the direction you want to move the camera The display changes to an arrow indicating the direction of the mouse NS Figure 19 On Screen PTZ M ovement 5 Release the mouse button when you have repositioned the camera to the desired location C2630M B 4 08 ADJ USTING THE CAMERA LENS The keypad is hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the keypad To switch between the standard and extended view mode From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt Extended View For information on changing view modes refer to Switching Between Standard and Extended Panel Views on page 28 To adjust camera lens features Clickthe plus or minus button next to the zoom focus and iris function on the keypad Figure 20 PTZ Keypad with Camera Lens Controls ADJ USTING THE CAMERA ZOOM To adjust camera zoom using the mouse Rotate the mouse wheel forward to zoom in and backward to zoom out The following figure shows how to operate the mouse to zoom in and out You can also use keyboard shortcuts to operate the lens features of cameras such as Pelco s Spectra Ill For more information about using keyboard shortcuts refer to Using PC Keyboard Shortcuts to Operate PTZ and Lens Functions on page 50 E E Figure 21 Mouse Wheel Zoom C2630M B 4 08 49 50 USING PC KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS TO OPERATE PTZ AND LENS FUNCTIONS Users with PTZ access rights Standard U
300. selected All Days Weekdays Weekends or Custom M ode 4 Start and End Date Sets the start and end dates for a custom schedule M arkers O Record M ode Selects a recording mode to be applied to a camera Options are as follows Normal Motion Alarm ATM POS Channel Allows the assignment of recording modes across individual camera channels over a 24 hour period Camera Settings Panel Allows custom settings to be applied to individual cameras for each recording mode Apply Saves current schedule Frame Rate Allows configuration of channel resolution and frame rates Configuration Configure Relays Allows configuration of relays that have been linked to cameras and alarms S956 00 0 0 Instant Recording Enables or disables selection of instant recording from the View menu SETTING UP THE CAMERA RECORDING MODE The DX8100 allows you to schedule each camera to record in a single or multiple event mode across a 24 hour timeline Users with Power User access or higher can schedule video recording for one or more cameras Use the Record M ode section near the bottom of the Schedule page to configure the recording mode for each camera This section describes how to schedule a recording mode and includes the following topics Scheduling a Record M ode Clearing a Scheduled Recording on page 130 Scheduling a Record Mode The DX8100 allows you to schedule a camera for multiple event
301. sensor event is identical to an alarm event To play back video recorded during an alarm or motion event 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click EX 2 From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt Index View The Event Type drop down box is displayed Motion 12 13 16 Motion 12 12 45 Motion 12 08 06 Figure 43 Event Type Drop down Box 3 Select a camera by clicking it in the Site tree 4 Inthe Date Section drop down box above the playback timeline select the day that you want events to be displayed 5 In the Event Type drop down box select the event type you want to view Options are as follows All None Motion Alamin ATM POS Video Loss 6 Select an event from the listing 7 On the playback control click J to begin viewing OPERATING PLAYBACK DIGITAL ZOOM 70 Video playback can be zoomed using a control keypad or the mouse when the DX8100 is in the Playback or Search mode In Playback mode the on screen PTZ feature is replaced with the mouse activated digital zoom Playback digital zoom is also available in Search mode For information on the Playback mode refer to Working in Playback M ode on page 65 For information on the Search mode refer to Working in Search M ode on page 74 The PTZ controls are hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the PTZ controls To switch between the standard and extended view mode From the DX8100 menu bar choose View
302. ser by default and higher can use a PC keyboard to operate PTZ and lens functions of cameras that support such features PTZ and lens functions can be controlled in Live mode using the keyboard The following table describes the keyboard buttons that you use to control PTZ and lens functions Table P Standard PC Keyboard Functions for Controlling PTZ and Lens Functions Key Description Insert and Delete These keys provide the following functionality On screen display preset and pattern modes Insert increases focus and Delete decreases focus performing the same actions as the focus control on the PTZ keypad Remote camera programming mode Insert and Delete perform the same actions as the PTZ keypad focus and buttons navigating up and down through the camera menu choices Home and End These keys provide the following functionality On screen display preset and pattern modes The Home key opens the iris and the End key closes the iris performing the same actions as the PTZ keypad iris and buttons Remote camera programming mode The Home key selects an option from the camera s on screen menu The End key cancels an option or exit a menu These keys perform the same actions as the PTZ keypad iris and buttons Page Up and Page Down These keys provide the same functionality in the on screen display and the preset and pattern modes as the PTZ keypad zoom and buttons Page Up zoo
303. set up a static IP address This information can be obtained from your network administrator Access the Network page to set up the static IP address For information on accessing the Network page refer to Setting Up DX8100 Network Access on page 151 To set up a static IP address 1 In the Network page verify that the Obtain An IP Address Automatically DHCP check box is not selected 2 Inthe IP Address box enter a unique IP address for example 10 10 0 170 The last three digits must be different for each recorder for example 171 172 173 and so forth 3 In the Subnet M ask box enter the subnet mask for example 255 0 0 0 is the default 4 Inthe Default Gateway box enter the gateway address the IP address of the default router on your immediate network segment 5 Click Apply SETTING UP TCP IP AND BANDWIDTH THROTTLE The DX8100 uses the TCP IP networking protocol to communicate over LAN and WAN networks TCP IP uses logical network ports to organize data transmissions and to ensure that data packets are delivered to the proper application For example e mail is traditionally delivered through TCP IP port 25 and Web pages through port 80 The following table describes the ports assigned to direct video and control information into and out of the DX8100 You should keep port numbers set at their default values unless there is a known conflict with your existing network infrastructure Consult your network administrator bef
304. site by right clicking its site name and then selecting User Log In from the shortcut menu 3 Enter a user name and password for the remote site 18 C2630M B 4 08 LOGGING OUT OF A REMOTE SITE Logging out of the local or a remote DVR does not disconnect you from that system Logging out will return you to the Guest account To disconnect from a remote server referto Disconnecting from a Remote Site on page 18 You can only log out of one server at a time If you are logged into multiple servers you must log out of each server individually You can also log out of a local or remote DVR by right clicking its site name from the Site tree and selecting User Log out from the quick menu To log out of a local or remote DVR site From the DX8100 menu bar choose File gt User Log out WORKING WITH DUAL MONITORS DX8100 version 1 2 includes a standard Dual Display Card that provides additional viewing of up to 72 video channels simultaneously in either of two ways VGA output This feature allows you to display video from selected cameras on the extended monitor while at the same time displaying video from selected cameras on the primary monitor The primary monitor remains available for other tasks such as viewing and controlling PTZ cameras and monitoring video from cameras displayed on the extended monitor Up to 36 cameras can be displayed on each monitor Video from any connected server can be displayed on the monitors Compos
305. specific camera In this case selecting a camera linked to an ATM POS device automatically inserts the name of the ATM POS device in the Device Name box Transaction Number A number assigned by the ATM POS device that is printed on the sales are transaction receipt Data Information Allows POS search by data information options as follows Transaction with Exception Only Finds all transactions for which an exception is defined Line Item Allows you to search POS data by a specific transaction line item based on the following guidelines Line item entries are not case sensitive Enter lower or uppercase characters Specify the asterisk wildcard Search by a single word or multiple words appearing in a transaction line Type the first few characters of the first word appearing in the transaction and the wildcard For example type sma for a line item containing the entry small orange juice The search returns all transactions that contain the word small Type the first few characters of the second word in a transaction and the wildcard For example type ora for a line item containing the entry small orange juice The search returns all transactions that contain the word orange Search by abbreviation For example type 6 pk fora line item containing the entry Soda 6 pk The search returns all transactions that contain the abbreviation 6 pk Action Code A two letter abbreviatio
306. ssing user setup page 190 Administrator 16 109 193 dwell time changing 31 DX8000 accessing 109 Guest useraccount 17 pan tilt and zoom control operating 47 Power User 16 45 109 193 Restricted User 25 31 192 193 Standard User account 22 25 193 user access levels 193 user accounts adding new users 194 existing users deleting 196 log in timeout setting 196 modifying 195 password changing 196 user s group affiliation changing 196 user accounts default 192 user name and password 17 V video full window view displaying 26 images printing 14 live viewing 18 20 playback controls 66 playback viewing 18 C2630M B 3 08 video compression 140 video loss detection of 117 emergency notification 216 relay output linking to 122 synchronization loss of 117 video level low 117 video low level 117 view cycle view setup 25 dwelltime 25 extended 28 pane panel See pane panel standard 28 viewing area See pane panel W warranty period 14 Web Client multicast using 13 wildcard character 86 wildcard character 86 wiper operating 58 Z zones motion detection 113 zoom adjusting camera 49 243 C2630M B 3 08 244 PRODUCT WARRANTY AND RETURN INFORM ATION WARRANTY Pelco will repair or replace without charge any merchandise proved defective in Pelco assumes no risk and shall be subject to no liability for damages or loss material or workmanship for a period of one year after the date
307. sting export and printing of backed up video and M UX analog video output C2630M B 4 08 Added new features dual display expanded ATM POS and system health check Pelco the Pelco logo Camclosure Coaxitron DigitalSENTRY Endura Esprit ExSite Genex Intelli M Legacy and Spectra are registered trademarks of Pelco Inc Copyright 2008 Pelco Inc All rights reserved Spectra Ill is a trademark of Pelco Inc DLP is a registered trademark of Texas Instruments Incorporated Microsoft Windows Internet Explorer DirectDraw DirectX ActiveSync and ActiveX are registered trademarks of M icrosoft Corporation Intel Pentium and XScale are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation Nero is a registered trademark of Nero AG Samsung is a trademark of Samsung in the United States or other countries Panasonic is a registered trademark of M atsushita Electric Industrial Co Ltd Kalatel is an trademark of GE Interlogix American Dynamics is a trademark of Sensormatic Electronics Corp Philips is a registered trademark of Koninklijke Philips Electronics N V LG is a registered trademark of LG Vicon is a trademark of Vicon Industries Inc Honeywell is a trademark of Honeywell International Inc GOOGLE is a trademark of Google Inc R PELCO Worldwide Headquarters 3500 Pelco Way Clovis California 93612 USA USA amp Canada Tel 800 289 9100 Fax 800 289 9150 International Tel 1 559 292 1981 Fax 1 559 348 1120 www pelco
308. switches from using TCP to using User Data Protocol UDP Since the Web Client connection is using UDP the user does not have to log in or out of the DX8100 server The Web Client displays the connection status connected or disconnect The PTZ feature is not available The Web Client displays only the camera name in the site tree All other camera recording details such as the recording mode resolution recording rate and so forth are not displayed The camera name and DX8100 server information is not updated until a new connection to the DX8100 is initiated The Web Client monitors the UDP socket every 10 seconds to ensure that live data is being received If live data is not received within 30 seconds the W eb Client will disconnect from the DX8100 server after two minutes and automatically reconnect to the DX8100 Enabling Multicasting The recommended multicasting IP range is from 224 0 1 1 to 224 0 1 253 To enable multicasting 1 In the Network page click the check box labeled Enable M ulticasting 2 Inthe Multicast Group IP text box enter the multicast group IP address IM Enable Multicasting h T Multicast Group IP an a Network Information Figure 132 Enabling Multicasting 3 Click Apply The DX8100 message dialog box opens prompting you to restart the DX8100 154 C2630M B 4 08 4 Do one of the following e ClickYes to restart the DX8100 ClickNo to cancel the rest
309. t Client names can be up to 63 characters and can include spaces but not special characters b Enter the client s IP address c If necessary enter a port number in the Agent Port text box The default port number is 9004 Unless there is a conflict on your network you should not change the Emergency Agent port number from its default of 9004 Make sure any changes to port numbers are made consistently across all DX8100 servers and clients on a network Client and server ports must be identical 5 Click OK 6 Click the Apply button at the bottom of the screen CHANGING CLIENT EMERGENCY AGENT PROPERTIES To change an existing client s information in the emergency notification list 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click The Notification page is displayed 3 Do the following a In the Emergency Agent Setup section select a client from the list b Click Edit The Agent Setup dialog box opens c Enter a new name for the client Client names can be up to 63 characters long and can include spaces but not special characters d Entera new IP address for the client e If necessary enter a port number in the Agent Port text box The default port number is 9004 Unless there is a conflict on your network you should not change the Emergency Agent port number from its default of 9004 M ake sure any changes to port numbers are made consistently across all DX8100 servers and
310. t Saving Time The DX8100 ensures that no data is lost when the system clock is changed to reflect Daylight Saving Time or Standard Time The DX8100 follows the Windows operating system clock changes and is configured by default to automatically recognize Daylight Saving and Standard Time changes W hen the DX8100 encounters a time change it will record data for the transition time period twice For example when the system clock is set back one hour from 2 00 AM to 1 00 AM there will appear two periods on the playback time line that represent the transition hour SELECTING THE VIDEO FORM AT To select the appropriate video signal format for your location 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click C The System page is displayed 3 Inthe Video Format section click NTSC or PAL to select the format 4 Click Apply WORKING WITH CTRL ALT DEL FUNCTION This section describes how to use the DX8100 Ctrl Alt Del key combination and includes the following topics e Enabling Ctrl Alt Del Using Ctrl Alt Del Enabling Ctrl Alt Del Enabling the Ctrl Alt Del key combination allows you to open the Windows Task M anager dialog box to perform system administration tasks To complete the procedure you must be logged on to the DX8100 as an administrator or power user The DX8100 keyboard is remapped To see which keys replace the Ctrl and Alt keys refer to the Important Security Information for System
311. t change port numbers from their default values M ake sure any changes to port numbers are made consistently across all DX8100 servers and clients on a network Client and server ports must be identical b Entera new upgrade port number 9003 is the default c Enter a new information port number 9003 is the default d Click Add The site appears in the Site IP list on the right 7 Repeat steps 4 6 for each additional site Up to 50 remote sites can be added to the site list 8 Click Apply Once a remote site has been set up its name appears in the Site tree It may take up to five minutes to initially connect to the site Once a connection has been established cameras from the remote site can be dragged onto the main screen view panels aa Se Information O vr hd aj Add gt gt e Figure 164 Adding a Site with a Static IP Address Adding a Site with a Dynamic IP Address She IP ist DXx8100Lab 10 106 12 213 Add Group Edt I Camera 4 I Camera 5 I Camera 6 I Camera 7 F Camera 11 F Camera 12 Camera 13 F Camera 14 I Camera 18 F Camera 19 I Camera 20 I Camera 24 I Cometa 25 I Camera 26 Refresh T Camera 30 F Camera 31 T Camera 32 An Administrator level user can connect DX8100 units even when the exact IP address of a remote DVR is not known To add a site successfully the following must be established Each DVR must be attached to the s
312. t channel DVRs offer only the 1 x 1 2 x 2 and 3 x 3 view panel options e Ifyou select more than one screen division each camera channel will cycle through each screen before the next panel division is presented C2630M B 4 08 211 212 This section describes how to set up manual camera mapping and includes the following topics Creating M onitor Sequence Instances Loading an Existing Sequence List on page 213 Modifying a Sequence Instance in the List on page 213 Deleting a Sequence Instance from the List on page 214 Appending an Existing Sequence List on page 215 Creating M onitor Sequence Instances To add a sequence instance to the sequence list On the DX8100 toolbar click YF The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click The External Output page is displayed In the M anual Camera M apping M ode section do the following 1 2 3 a b E d Select the M anual Camera M apping M ode button if it is not already selected Select one of the screen division options Drag cameras from the Site tree onto each view panel until all panels have been assigned a camera From the Min and Sec drop down boxes select the amount of time the sequence instance will remain on the monitor Click Add The instance is added to the Sequence Table Do one of the following Repeat step 3 for each additional sequence instance you want to add to the sequence list If you want to apply the custom sett
313. t viewing backed up video refer to Viewing and Searching Backed Up Video in the Client Applications Help the Client Applications manual or Viewing Backed Up Video on page 190 C2630M B 4 08 Logs and Health Status This section describes how to work with the system log and system health status feature and includes the following topics e Viewing Logs from the Application Window e Viewing System Health Status on page 106 VIEWING LOGS FROM THE APPLICATION WINDOW You can access the system logs from the application window or from the System setup page For information about working with logs from the System setup page refer to Using System Logs on page 204 To access system logs 1 From the DX8100 menu bar click View gt Log A submenu is displayed listing the various commands View Export Favorite Help OSD i ie TT Log gt System On Off Resolution gt System Failure Cycle Views Setup Export Extended View Backup Index View Network Connection System Health View gt Login ID list with time Video Loss Display deinterlaced image Figure 77 Accessing Log Commands from the Application Window 2 From the submenu click a command The Log View dialog box opens If there are no log events for the specific log command you selected the Log View message box is displayed LU x Period Start Date Jov 31 2008 z End Date Jov 31 2008 y C User Figure 78 Log View Dialog Box_C2630M B 3 Click OK 4
314. t with a letter must be 15 characters or less and cannot include spaces or special characters Your DVR site name is used to identify your system to clients and other DX8100 servers Your DVR s system ID is used to uniquely identify your system on a LAN System IDs are required to prevent possible conflicts with other network devices 6 Setup the For information on setting up DHCP or static IP addressing refer to Setting Up DHCP on page 152 or Setting Up a Static IP Address on page 153 Serork DNS WINS Port Device NTP Site Name 0x810 System ID px8100_B137 gt Obtain An IP Address Automatically DHCP B Subnet Mask po ye ES Default Gateway Figure 131 Network Setup Page Setting Up DHCP Your network must support DHCP and an active DCHP server must be present for dynamic addressing to work If you select DHCP and your network does not include an active DHCP server the IP address settings will default to addresses in the 169 254 x x range Consult your network administrator for more information Access the Network page to set up the DHCP options For information on accessing the Network page refer to Setting Up DX8100 Network Access on page 151 To configure the DVR to acquire a dynamic IP address through DHCP 1 In the Network page click the check box labeled Obtain An IP Address Automatically DHCP 2 Click Apply 152 C2630M B 4 08 Setting Up a Static IP Address The DX8100 allows you to
315. ted 6 Click Apply 7 Verify that you can hear sound from the DX8100 audio output LISTENING TO LIVE AUDIO The DX8100 audio feature allows you to listen to live audio at a local server or listen to live audio from a remote DX8100 server or client system For information about setting up the DX8100 server to record and listen to live audio refer to Audio Setup on page 114 This section describes how to listen to live audio and includes the following topics Listening to Live Audio at a Local Server Listening to Live Audio from a Remote DX8100 System on page 117 Listening to Live Audio ata Local Server To listen to live audio at the local server 1 10 116 Connect head phones to the DX8100 audio output connector For information about setting up the DX8100 server to record and listen to live audio refer to Audio Setup on page 114 On the DX8100 toolbar click Setup The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Check the Channel Information section to verify that the audio option is installed and available In the Camera Properties section select the camera channel that is configured for live audio recording In the Audio Settings section verify that the Audio Disable check box is not selected Click Apply Verify that you can hear sound from the DX8100 audio output On the DX8100 toolbar click EN Drag a camera that is configured to record live audio from the Site tree onto a view pane Verify that you can hear l
316. tem To send an auxiliary command 1 On the DX8100 keypad click to enter the programming mode 2 Select the camera in the DX8100 view panel to which you want to send the auxiliary command 3 Click the Aux button Keypad buttons 1 4 are available Figure 32 Auxiliary Aux Button The following figure shows that keypad buttons 1 4 are available Figure 33 Keypad Buttons 1 4 are Available 4 Click a keypad button 1 4 The auxiliary function assigned by camera for the selected button is executed 58 C2630M B 4 08 CONFIGURING PRESET TOURS A preset tour allows a camera to move through a programmed sequence of PTZ presets The DX8100 Series DVR can store up to four preset tours While four tours can be programmed only one tour can be activated at a time A preset tour will operate continuously until another PTZ control action is performed At least one PTZ preset must be set in order to create a preset tour The PTZ controls are hidden in the extended view mode In this case select the standard view mode to display the PTZ controls To switch between the standard and extended view mode From the DX8100 menu bar choose View gt Extended View This section describes how to configure preset tours and includes the following topics Programming a Preset Tour Activating a Preset Tour on page 62 Deactivating a Preset Tour on page 62 PROGRAM MING A PRESET TOUR This section describes how to program a preset tou
317. tes the OSD POS view option must be selected at the View menu For information about the POS option refer to View Menu on page 24 To record ATM POS events 1 Setup the ATM POS device communication and do the following a Assign the ATM POS device to a COM port and set up COM port properties For information refer to Setting Up ATM POS Device Communication Ports on page 163 b Select the ATM POS device mode For information refer to Selecting the ATM POS Device M ode and Communications Options on page 164 Qa o m Create a data format for the ATM POS device For information refer to Setting Up an ATM POS Data Format on page 169 Assign the data format to the ATM POS device For information refer to Assigning a Data Format to an ATM POS Device on page 173 Set up ATM POS exceptions For information refer to Setting Up ATM POS Exceptions on page 174 f Assign the exception to the ATM POS device For information refer to Assigning an Exception to An ATM POS Device on page 178 g Verify the ATM POS communication connection For information refer to Verifying the ATM POS Communication Connection on page 179 2 Setup a camera to record the ATM POS events a Setup the designated ATM POS camera for scheduled ATM POS recording b Configure the ATM POS link settings c Configure the ATM POS record link settings 180 C2630M B 4 08 d Optional Configure the ATM POS PTZ link settings 3 In
318. the amount of disk space used by recorded video The red indicator marks the current recording position of the disk array blue indicators mark parts of the array that are storing previously recorded video and clear indicates that no video has been recorded in that area of the array C2630M B 4 08 DX8100 MENU BAR This section describes the DX8100 menu bar commands and includes the following topics File M enu on page 23 Edit M enu on page 24 View Menu on page 24 Export M enu on page 25 Favorite M enu on page 25 Help M enu on page 25 File Menu The following table describes the DX8100 File menu commands Table B File Menu Commands Command Description User Log in Opens the User Log In dialog box for entering the user name and password to log in to the DX8100 User Log out Immediately logs the current user out of the DX8100 The system returns to the default mode Software Upgrade Opens the Select Upgrade Package dialog box for selecting the source from which to access files to upgrade the DX8100 software This command is available only when you log in to the DX81000 as Administrator Password Recovery Opens the Password Recovery dialog box for entering the password provided by Pelco Product Support For more information refer to Recovering a Password on page 233 For information on recovering a password contact Pelco Product Support include contact information or a link to the contact inform
319. tification Setup tab 4 Inthe Notification Items section do the following a Click the Video Loss check box b In the Selected Channels field click once to the right of the words Video Loss The Selected Channels dialog box opens c Doone of the following Clickthe check box for each channel you want to monitor for video loss detection events Click Select All to monitor all channels for video loss detection Click Deselect All to deselect all channels 5 Click OK 6 Click Apply SETTING UP E MAIL NOTIFICATION GROUPS The DX8100 allows you to set up groups to send an emergency notification to multiple users The DX8100 supports the following e You can create up to 32 e mail notification groups Upto 32 members can be assigned to each e mail group A group can be notified in response to an alarm or motion detection event This section describes how to set up e mail notification groups and includes the following topics e Adding an E mail Notification Group Modifying an E mail Group Name Deleting an E mail Group on page 224 Adding M embers to an E mail Group on page 225 Deleting M embers from an E mail Group on page 226 e Modifying E mail Group M ember Attributes on page 227 C2630M B 4 08 223 224 Adding an E mail Notification Group To add an e mail notification group 1 2 3 On the DX8100 toolbar click Et The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click 2 The Notificati
320. time range you want to export 3 In the Export Format section do the following a Click the Audio Record check box to include recorded audio b Click the Real Time check box to export video using standard clock time 4 Click Export to export video data STOPPING AN EXPORT WHILE IN PROCESS Once an export operation has begun a user can easily stop it by interrupting or canceling the operation from the Export menu on the main or search screens Interrupting an export simply stops the progress of the export while keeping all current video information intact Canceling an export will delete any video data exported during the operation as well as end the export itself This section describes how to stop an export process and includes the following topics e Retaining Video When Stopping an Export Process Deleting Video Data W hen Stopping an Export Process Retaining Video When Stopping an Export Process To halt an export that is in process while retaining current video data stored From the DX8100 menu bar choose Export gt Interrupt Export Deleting Video Data When Stopping an Export Process To halt an export that is in process and delete any current video data stored From the DX8100 menu bar choose Export gt Cancel Export WORKING WITH DX8100 BACKED UP VIDEO The DX8100 allows you to view search export back up and print backed up video To do so you must use the DX8100 Client application For more information abou
321. times Release the right mouse button The highlighted recording times are cleared Do one of the following Toaccept the change click Apply The selected time period is deleted e Tocancel the change click Cancel The deleted recording times are restored E Record Mode JE Normal MM Motion JE Alarm PF arm Pos A A 0 1 2 3 1 AAA ar ara raa Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Cancel Apply Figure 111 Clearing Recording Times for All Record Modes 131 CREATING YEARLY RECORDING SCHEDULES The DX8100 allows you create and save various recording schedules This section describes how to create yearly recording schedules and includes the following sections Creating a Yearly Recording Schedule Scheduling Individual Days Using the Year View on page 132 Copying Schedule Attributes to a Different Day on page 132 Creating a Yearly Recording Schedule Year View allows a user to customize recording schedules for individual days Year View displays daily recording schedules in a calendar format The calendar displays one year s worth of daily recording schedules The scheduling period begins in the current month Days circled in red have been assigned weekday weekend or everyday recording schedules Days circled in blue have been assigned a custom recording schedule Days without circles denote that no recording has been scheduled for that day Scheduling Individual Days Using the Y
322. to configure communication port settings Refer to the instructions that came with your peripheral device for correct settings This section describes how to set up port and device communication properties including the following topics Understanding the Port Device Page e Setting Up ATM POS Device Communication Ports on page 163 Setting Up RS 422 RS 485 Communication Port Properties on page 163 e Installing or Updating Device Protocols on page 183 UNDERSTANDING THE PORT DEVICE PAGE This section describes the Port Device page The following figure shows the Port Device page Network DNSAWINS Port Device NTP Communication Port com I i Figure 142 Port Device Page C2630M B 4 08 161 162 The following table describes the parts of the Port Device page Table AQ Parts ofthe Port Device Page Item Part Description Port Communications port drop down box where you select the port for connecting a device to the DX8100 The available choices are as follows COM 1 Uses RS 232 serial data standard Port 1 to 4 Uses either RS 422 or RS 485 serial data standard Device Attached device drop down box where the type of device is selected to be interfaced to the DX8100 through the communication port Configure Device configuration button that opens the Device Configuration dialog box The Device Configuration dialog box performs two functions depending on the type of device sele
323. transmission The end of text string Decimal Specifies the type of control character that marks the end of a transaction line Decimal 13 represents the ASCII CR control character User String Allows you to enter an end of line string Monetary Format Includes the following options Monetary Unit Text box for entering the monetary symbol Thousand Separator Symbol used in transaction data to separate number by thousands Decimal Separator Symbol used in transaction data to separate dollars and cents Time Format Allows you to set the following options to match those in the transaction data Date Selects the date format Month Type Selects the month format Time Selects the time format Time Period Selects the time period 12 or 24 hour Character Format Allows you to speci f y a character filter Special Device Character Not available at this time Custom Device Filter Contains the character filter Add M oves the character filter into the Custom Device Filter table Delete Deletes the selected filter in the Custom Device Filter table Control Code Contains a selection of control codes for creating a desired filter Special Character Contains a selection of characters for creating a desired filter Range Not applicable The following table describes the transaction start and end parameters C2630M B 4 08 Table AU Transaction Startand End Parameters
324. ts linking a single alarm input to multiple cameras 37 linking multiple alarms to one camera 37 removing a linked alarm input from a camera 39 setting up alarm input selecting 120 alarm output type selecting 120 basic operating properties 120 creating custom name for 120 supported 119 analog output standard 13 area viewing pane 22 28 panel 22 28 ATM POS communications connection running diagnostics 179 connection verifying 179 viewing ATM POS data 180 ATM POS device data format assigning to an ATM POS device 173 creating 172 deleting 173 editing 172 overview 169 Data Format page overview 170 device filter custom 172 dynamic link library DLL files 183 multimode 164 protocols installing 183 updating 183 C2630M B 3 08 single mode 164 ATM POS event ATM POS address selecting 122 ATM POS recording mode setting up 130 linking relay to 121 recording 180 ATM POS exceptions assigning to an ATM POS device 178 creating 176 deleting 178 editing 178 exception action codes defined 175 modifiers 177 overview 80 85 174 audio 114 audio indicator 44 auxiliary feature external equipment 58 how used 58 protocols supported 58 backed up data backup schedule creating 186 deleting 188 editing 187 instant starting 188 overview 185 media device selecting 190 overview 184 viewing 104 184 190 backed up video working with 90 104 190 bandwidth throttle options 153 base port 153 baud rate 164 165 C
325. ture also allows you to export the DX8100 settings to a specified location for later retrieval For more information refer to Using the Edit M enu to Perform an Export on page 203 Import Setup Opens the DX8100 Setup File Import dialog box for importing a DX8100 system configuration file For more information refer to Using the Edit M enu to Perform an Export on page 203 View Menu The following table describes the DX8100 View menu commands Table D View Menu Commands Command Description OSD Opens a submenu with the following choices Site name A global setting that when selected displays a site s name in the respective view pane Camera name A global setting that when selected displays a camera s name in the respective view pane Video recording A global setting that when selected displays an icon in the upper right corner of the pane and enables video recording for the cameras assigned to a view pane Audio recording A global setting that when selected enables audio recording for the cameras assigned to a view pane The DX8100 compresses audio data to save space In this case recorded audio may not be of the same quality as live audio PTZ A global setting that when selected displays PTZ if active for the cameras assigned to a view pane e Instant recording A global setting that when selected displays the instant recording icon for the cameras assigned to a view pane POS A global s
326. turel 44 35 MOTHERBOARD Temperature 46 35 MOTHERBOARD TemperaturelL 51 35 MOTHERBOARD Temperaturel 47 35 MOTHERBOARD Temperaturel 45 35 MOTHERBOARD Temperaturel 45 35 MOTHERBOARD Temperaturel 46 35 MOTHERBOARD Temperaturel 45 35 A MOTHERBOARD Temperaturel 45 35 MOTHERBOARD Temperaturel 50 35 Figure 84 System Health Log 3 To display logged events do the following a In the calendar click the left and right arrow buttons to select a month a Click the date 4 To navigation to the data you want to view do the following Click Go to today to display information about the current date Click Go to to advance to subsequent pages 5 Click OK to exit the System Health Log 01 31 2008 Ei January 2008 gt I Sun Mon TueWedThu Fri Sat 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Go to today C2630M B 4 08 Setting Up the DX8100 Only a single user with Administrator or Power User access is allowed to access a DX8100 5 Setup mode at one time When connected to a network supporting multiple DVRs and or clients users with Administrator access override and block Power Users If two users with the same access level attempt to enter Setup mode simultaneously the DX8100 will allow access to setup features on a first come first served basis Unavailable setup options will be grayed out
327. ty Up Priority Down Delete 4 Cancel Apply Figure 158 Backup Configuration Screen C2630M B 4 08 The following table describes the parts of the Backup schedule page Table AZ Parts ofthe Backup Schedule Page Item Part Description Backup schedule table Describes the configured backup schedule details Name The type of backup schedule Daily or Weekly Daily includes all days of the week M onday through Sunday Weekly indicates a specific day of the week that the backup schedule is to occur A selection check box allows you to select or deselect a backup schedule to run as scheduled A deselected backup schedule does not run as scheduled Backup start time The date and time a backup schedule is defined to run Backup time The time period entered for the backup schedule Filter The channels selected for back up Target device The selected backup media device Backup schedule buttons Allows you to do the following Add Opens the Add Backup Schedule dialog box for configuring a backup schedule For more information about the Add Backup Schedule dialog box refer to Adding a Backup Schedule on page 186 Edit Allows you to edit the details of the selected backup schedule Delete Allows you to delete a selected backup schedule Instant Backup Opens the Backup Now dialog box where you enter options to start a backup schedule information control buttons Waiting backup Dis
328. uesting a password reset Pelco will then issue a reset code that can be used for 24 hours with the provided MAC address only If possible Use company letterhead to submit all information the exact time the mac address and so forth detailed on the password recovery including the bulleted information above Fax to 1 888 294 3885 attention DX8100 Password Recovery C2630M B 4 08 233 To recover a lost or forgotten Admin password 1 From the DX8100 menu choose File gt Password Recovery The Password Recovery dialog box appears x Q MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Date Time Tuesday February 24 2004 12 39 59 Crack key P OK Cancel Figure 195 Password Recovery Dialog Box 2 Contact Pelco Product Support with the following information a MAC address as it appears in the Password Recovery dialog box b Current date for your location as it appears in the Password Recovery dialog box c Any additional information requested by Pelco Product Support 3 Enter the new password you obtained from Pelco Product Support in the field provided 4 Click OK PERFORMING PERIODIC MAINTENANCE The DX8100 filter should be cleaned periodically to ensure proper ventilation and cooling of the DX8100 The filter is easily accessible through DX8100 front panel To remove and cleanse the filter 1 From the DX8100 menu bar choose File gt Exit The Shut Down dialog box opens 2 Select Shut down 3 Cl
329. up Up to 32 members can be assigned to each e mail group To add e mail addresses to a group 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 2 The Notification page is displayed 3 Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab 4 Do the following a Inthe Mail Group section select a group name from the drop down box b Ensure that the group check boxes under To and CC are deselected c Enter an e mail address in the To or CC text boxes d Click Add to Group 5 Click Apply Fullname D8100 First Floor Lobby E mail Address idx8100_first_h pelco com To r ce r Figure 182 Add User to E mail Group C2630M B 4 08 226 Deleting Members from an E mail Group To delete a user from a group 1 2 3 On the DX8100 toolbar click Et The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click 2 The Notification page is displayed Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab Do the following a In the Mail Group section select a group name from the drop down box b Select the user you want to delete from the list c Click Delete Click Apply Mail Group Security Department eA Keup bwade pelco com Security Department smite pelco com Security Department Figure 183 Remove User from E mail Group C2630M B 4 08 Modifying E mail Group M ember Attributes To modify a user s e mail address or group affiliati
330. up the time period and includes the following topics e Configuring E M ail Notification Frequency Setting the Time of Day Sending E mail Notifications in Response to M otion Events on page 222 Sending E mail Notifications in Response to Alarm Events on page 222 Sending E mail Notifications in Response to Video Loss Events on page 223 Configuring E Mail Notification Frequency Depending on the volume of motion alarm or video loss events detected by the DX8100 the number of e mail notifications can be far too many to manage effectively To keep the number of e mails sent by the DX8100 at a manageable level the e mail notification frequency can be adjusted W hen events have been detected e mail notifications can be sent out in intervals from once per minute up to once every six hours If no events have been detected during the specified frequency interval no notification will be sent Each e mail notification will include information about the first event detected during the interval the last event detected during the interval and a still image in PEG format of the last event To configure notification frequency 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 2 The Notification page is display 3 Click the Emergency E mail Notification Setup tab C2630M B 4 08 221 4 In the Frequency section select the frequency interval from the drop down box Options for sending an e
331. user logs in Click Apply C2630M B 4 08 ASSIGNING AUTOM ATIC LOGIN PERMISSION TO A USER The DX8100 allows one user to automatically log in to the DX8100 application The administrator must assign automatic login permission to the user Once automatic login permission is assigned to the user the user will be automatically logged in to the DX8100 application In this case the assigned user does not have to enter the user name and password NOTE Automatic login user permission makes the DX8100 more vulnerable because a higher level user is logged in every time To assign automatic login permission 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click Ca The User page is displayed 3 In the Auto Login User drop down selection box select a user 4 Click Apply The next time the DX8100 application is started the assigned user is logged in automatically SITE SETUP This section describes how to connect to a remote site and includes the following topics e Adding a Remote Site e Finding Active Remote Cameras on page 200 Activating Remote Sites on page 200 Editing a Remote Site on page 201 Deleting a Remote Site on page 201 ADDING A REMOTE SITE Up to one hundred DX8100 DVR server sites can be added to the local server s site list Up to four remote DVR sites can be accessed from a single DX8100 a total of five sites including the local DVR can be active on a single networ
332. utputs to activate in response to an alarm event 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 29 3 Click the Event Relay Link Settings tab 4 Inthe Alarm Link Settings section do the following a Select an alarm channel from the Alarm Channel drop down box b Click the button for each relay you want to link to the selected alarm You can also drag relays onto alarms in the Site tree while in Live mode main screen 5 Click Apply jp Alarm Link Settings Alam Channel JALARMOT i y Alarm Name Alsemot _ i ae fw ee Figure 97 Event Relay Link Settings Alarm Link Settings Section Linking Relay Outputs to ATM POS Events To set relay outputs to activate in response to an ATM POS event 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click 29 3 Click the Event Relay Link Settings tab C2630M B 4 08 121 4 Inthe ATM POS Link Settings section do the following a Select an ATM POS address from the ATM POS Address drop down box b Click the button for each relay you want to link to the selected ATM POS address You can also drag relays onto ATM POS devices in the Site tree while in Live mode main screen 5 Click Apply ATM POS Link Settings r Linked Relay Setting ic a i i a Cere Ca 5 ms me Lo mr Figure 98 Event Relay Link Settings ATM POS Link Settings Section
333. vice Name The Device Name text box is available 2 Type the ATM POS device name in the Device Name text box 4 Setthe date and time range for the search 5 In the Data Information section click the check box to select Transaction with Exception Only The Exception Code check box is available 6 Click Start Search If the device name channel date and time are valid and if transactions with exceptions were recorded during the time range the transactions are displayed in the POS Search Table 7 In the POS Search Table click a transaction The transaction data is displayed in the Data window 84 C2630M B 4 08 8 On the playback controls click Forward Playback The video recorded for the transaction is displayed in the Video window Playback Start for10 200 03 03 03 End for 10 2006 J 10 foo 4 foo Sj Transaction Information J Device Name ATM POSO1 I Transaction Number T Line Item I Action Code 7 TF Exception Code r Data Information M Transaction with Exception Only O 01 10 2006 09 10 41 718 Start Search Stop Search F Data Overlay Enable TRANSACTION NUMBER 4 u Device Name DATE 1 10 2006 TIME 9 11 5 ATM POSOL 2006 1 10 9 8 51 ATM POSO1 2006 1 10 9 9 10 HOT DOGS 8 PK 1 89 ATM POSO1 2006 1 10 9 9 21 TRI TIP 7 98 Z zis SUB TOTAL 9 87 ATM POSO1 2006 1 10 9 10 47 AX ATM POS01 2006 1 10 9 11 5 p ATM POS01 2006 1 10 9 11 17 pars
334. view 228 sending to groups 229 sending to individuals 228 video loss event sending in response to 117 e mail server 218 237 emergency agent notification 117 accessing Emergency Agent Setup page 216 camera linking to client emergency agents 218 clients adding 217 changing emergency agent properties 217 deleting from notification list 217 Emergency Agent Client utility required 216 overview 216 port 153 server event transmission time setting 218 emergency e mail notification accessing Emergency E mail Notification page 219 alarm 218 alarm events sent in response to 222 e mail groups 218 e mail server configuring 219 enabling disabling 219 group adding 224 adding members 225 deleting 224 deleting members from group 226 modifying 224 modifying member attributes 227 overview 223 local area network LAN 219 motion events sent in response to 222 overview 218 settingup 219 testing configuration 220 time period notification frequency settingup 221 overview 221 setting the time of day 222 video loss events sent in response to 223 event jump to 66 events alarm 119 ATM POS 120 motion detection 113 recording modes 130 video loss detection 117 exception 174 Expansion Unit 26 export setup 23 24 Ext monitor camera mapping automatic camera mapping settingup 211 manual camera mapping settingup 211 overview 210 Capture Card configuring interrupt override 215 external monitor option 216 overview 210 sequence insta
335. ward or reverse direction Play Reverse Initiates normal playback of recorded video in the reverse direction 0000 0100 000 0 Rewind to Beginning Returns the bookmark to the start of the earliest recorded video C2630M B 4 08 The following figure shows the DX8100 playback speed and volume controls Figure 40 Playback Speed and Volume Controls The following table describes the parts of the playback speed and volume controls Table U Parts of the Playback Speed and Volume Controls Item Part Description 1 Normal Playback speed is at normal rate 2 Faster Playback speed is increased to a faster rate O Slower Playback speed is reduced to a slower rate 4 Louder Volume is increased to a higher level or decreased to a lower level Q Mute Volume is silenced C2630M B 4 08 PLAYBACK TIM ELINE The playback timeline is used to select a day and time to begin playback The timeline includes a horizontal slider that can be moved to select playback time over a 24 hour period Time periods containing recorded video are represented as color coded segments of the timeline The following figure illustrates the timeline color coding scheme 68 Panel 1 8 03 C09 Camera 9 Figure 41 Playback Timeline The following table describes the parts of the playback tim
336. wing requirements User names can be between 4 and 20 alphanumeric characters in length e User passwords can be between 4 and 10 alphanumeric characters in length User names cannot contain spaces and special characters e User names and passwords are case sensitive To add a new user 1 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page 2 Click O The User page is displayed 3 Click Add The Add New User dialog box opens 4 Do the following a Entera login name for the user b Enter the user s full name c Enter a brief description for the user For example enter Building 6 Security Guard d Enter a password for the user Passwords must be between 4 and 10 characters in length and cannot contain spaces and special characters e Re enter the same password to confirm 5 Click Next The user access level options for the New User dialog box are displayed 6 Select the user s access level Restricted Standard or Power 7 Click Finish C2630M B 4 08 8 Click Apply Add New User j xj Enter the basic information for the new user 4a User name idee ol Full name fixed Py Description Front desk security Type and confirm a password for the user Password ld Confirm password _ 1 Back Next gt Cancel Figure 163 Add New User Dialog Box MODIFYING USER PROPERTIES Follow the steps below to change user attributes such as user name and
337. wn box This camera will be the motion source b In the Linked PTZ Setting section select a camera to be linked from the Linked Camera Channel drop down box This camera will change PTZ position in response to motion detected by the source camera To select a PTZ preset or pattern for the linked camera in the Linked PTZ Setting section do one of the following Toforce the linked camera to move to a PTZ preset in response to motion detected by the source camera 1 Click the Linked Camera Preset button to select this option 2 In the Preset drop down box select a PTZ preset 1 150 To force a PTZ pattern to be activated in response to motion detected by the source camera 1 Click the Linked Camera Pattern button to select this option 2 In the Pattern drop down box select a PTZ pattern 1 4 to be activated on the camera The selected camera must support PTZ functions and at least one PTZ preset pattern must be defined for this function to work Click Apply r Motion Detection Link Settings Camera Channel CAMERADI a Camera Name C mera 1 Linked PTZ Setting pote ee C ied Cera Pie name e y r CAMERA ed Camera Notin use C Linked Camera Pattem li nuse a Figure 104 Event PTZ Link Settings Linking Presets and Patterns to M otion Events Linking PTZ Presets and Patterns to Alarm Events To link an alarm input to a camera so activation of the alarm results in a repositioning of that camera 1 2
338. x Click Apply in the User Setup screen CHANGING A USER S GROUP AFFILIATION An Administrator level user can also change users group affiliation of users by dragging user names to different groups To change a user s group affiliation In the User name column of the User page click the user s name and drag it into a group DELETING EXISTING USERS Administrators can delete existing users To delete a user s account 1 2 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click a The User page is displayed Click the user name of the user you want to delete from the main user list Click Remove The Remove User dialog box opens Click Yes to confirm the deletion or No to cancel and return to the User Setup screen Click the Apply button at the bottom of the screen SETTING LOGIN TIMEOUT Administrators can define the amount of time a user s account can remain idle before having to log in again This setting applies to all users regardless of access level To set login timeout 1 2 3 On the DX8100 toolbar click YE The Setup dialog box opens to the Camera page Click The User page is displayed Select a time limit from the User Timeout drop down box e Time limits range from five minutes to one hour in five minute increments Selecting M anual from the drop down box will suspend the automatic logout feature A user will remain logged in until the user logs out or another
339. xport Menu The following table describes the DX8100 Export menu commands Table E Export Menu Commands Command Description Interrupt Export Immediately concludes an export process If the Interrupt Export command is executed before the scheduled backup time the system will save the backed up data until the time the Interrupt Export command is executed Cancel Export Immediately cancels the export process and no backed data is retained Favorite Menu The following table describes the DX8100 Favorite menu commands Table F Favorite Menu Commands Command Description Add to Favorites Opens the Add to Favorites dialog box where you can create and store a favorite to a specified folder Organize Favorites Opens the Organize Favorites dialog box where you can do the following Create a new folder Rename the folders Move favorites to a specific folder Delete a favorite or favorite folder Help Menu The following table describes the DX8100 Help menu commands Table G DX8100 Help Menu Commands Command Description DX8100 Help Opens the DX8100 Help system About Provides model and version information for the DX8100 application C2630M B 4 08 25 DX8100 TOOLBAR This section describes the DX8100 toolbar The following table describes the DX8100 toolbar buttons Table H DX8100 Toolbar Buttons
340. y the first frame of the video sequence is saved J PEG Saves a still image file in J PEG format Only the first frame of the video sequence is saved TIF Saves a still image file in TIF format Only the first frame of the video sequence is saved To select the export format From the Export Video dialog box select the radio button of the file format you want to export 102 C2630M B 4 08 EXPORTING A SEQUENCE OF STILL IMAGES Still image formats export the first frame of a bookmarked region and then a single frame for each time interval until the number of images specified has been exported For example consider exporting a six hour bookmarked region of video with an image count of 100 and a time interval of 3 seconds The resulting export will include the first frame of the bookmarked region followed by 99 additional images taken at three second intervals The first exported image will be the first frame of the bookmarked region and the last image will be the frame taken at 300 seconds into the bookmarked region To export a sequence of still images 1 Select a still image format Options are BM P PEG and TIF 2 Select the number of images 1 999 you want to save in the sequence 3 Select the time interval between each saved image in the sequence Options are as follows Continuous e 0 5 seconds 1second 2second 3second 4seconds 5seconds Export Format C Avl C ASF C Native C BMP JPEG C

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Hanoukah mode d`emploi    LG Electronics -UX840H Cell Phone User Manual  Cqué Tintoret  SAMSUNG  MODELO 3122  Miele B999790 Refrigerator User Manual  NAUTI 011-X - Nautica Zanca Sport  FY-27BQ7 FY-32BSQ7 FY-38BSQ7 天井埋込形換気扇 取扱説明書  1 電子式マルチメータ XM2−110シリーズ 取扱説明書  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file